Owners Manual BMWi 4 Gran Coupe

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
OWNER'S HANDBOOK.
BMW i4 GRAN COUPÉ.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A48801 - X/21

WELCOME TO BMW i.
Owner's Handbook.
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW i.
The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find it is to
operate. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW i.
Also use the integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains impor‐
tant notes on how to operate the car, enabling you to derive maximum benefit
from the technical advantages of your BMW i. It also contains information
which will help you to maintain both the operating safety and road safety of
your BMW i's as well as its full resale value.
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the printed Owner's Handbook is the
most up-to-date version. After a vehicle software update – for example, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle
will contain updated information.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board
literature.
We wish you a safe and pleasant journey.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up‐

grade – the Integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain up‐
dated information.
NOTES
Notes .................................................................................................................................... 6
Safety of the high-voltage system ............................................................................ 21
Owner's Handbook media ........................................................................................... 23
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in .......................................................................................................................... 26
Adjustment and operation ........................................................................................... 30
On the move ................................................................................................................... 35
CONTROLS
Vehicle cockpit ............................................................................................................... 42
Sensors in the vehicle .................................................................................................. 47
Vehicle operating condition ........................................................................................ 51
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 54
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 66
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 70
Connections .................................................................................................................... 75
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 84
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 110
Carrying children safely ............................................................................................. 124
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 135
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 153
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 177
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 186
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 220
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 224
Parking ............................................................................................................................ 251
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 271
Air conditioning ............................................................................................................ 273
4
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 282
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 288
Luggage compartment .............................................................................................. 292
DRIVING HINTS
Driving precautions ..................................................................................................... 298
Trailer operation ........................................................................................................... 303
Increasing range .......................................................................................................... 309
MOBILITY
Charging vehicle .......................................................................................................... 316
Wheels and tyres ......................................................................................................... 327
Under the bonnet ........................................................................................................ 352
Operating fluids ............................................................................................................ 354
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 357
Replacing parts ............................................................................................................ 360
Help in case of a breakdown .................................................................................... 364
Care ................................................................................................................................. 373
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 378
Seats for child restraint systems ............................................................................. 381
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 383
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 384
© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English ID8 X/21, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Handbook Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The quickest way to find information on a partic‐ Service Partner
ular topic or feature is to consult the alphabetical
A Service Partner of the manufacturer will be
index.
happy to answer any further questions.
We recommend that you read through the first
chapter to obtain an initial overview of the vehi‐ Internet
cle.
Vehicle information and general information on
BMW – on technology, for example – are avail‐
Validity of Owner's Handbook able on the Internet: www.bmw.com.
Vehicle production
Integrated Owner's Handbook in the
At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐
vehicle
ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐
formation. Updates following the copy deadline The Integrated Owner's Handbook shows all
can result in differences between the printed standard equipment, national-market equipment
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's and optional equipment which is offered or will
Handbook in the vehicle. be offered on a model-specific basis. The
integrated Owner's Handbook can be shown on
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
the control display.
of the printed Owner's Handbook for the vehicle.
After a software update in the vehicle

BMW Driver's Guide App
The BMW Driver's Guide App shows all standard
After a vehicle software update, for example, via
equipment, national-market equipment and op‐
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Own‐
tional equipment which is offered or will be of‐
er's Handbook for the vehicle will contain the lat‐
fered on a model-specific basis. The app can be
est information.
displayed on smartphones and tablets.
Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

BMW Driver's Guide web version
Entertainment, Communication
Driver's Guide web version shows all standard
The Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Enter‐ equipment, national-market equipment and op‐
tainment and Communication is available as a tional equipment which is offered or will be of‐
printed book from Service. fered on a model-specific basis. The Driver's
These topics are also covered in the integrated Guide web version can be displayed in any up-
Owner's Handbook in the vehicle. to-date browser.
6
Notes NOTES
Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Handbook
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in

order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle. The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that
life-threatening injury could occur as a result of
Measures that can be taken to help electric shock if the high-voltage technology or
protect the environment. the orange-coloured high-voltage components
"..." Texts on a display in the vehicle for are used inappropriately.
selecting functions.
›...‹ Commands for the voice control

system.
Vehicle equipment
››...‹‹ Replies by the voice control system. This Owner's Handbook shows all models and all
standard equipment, national-market equipment
and optional equipment which is offered or will
Actions
be offered on a model-specific basis, i.e. in the
Actions that need to be carried out are shown as model range. As a result, this Owner's Handbook
a numbered list. The list of steps must be carried may also contain descriptions and illustrations of
out in the specified sequence. equipment, systems and functions which are not
1. First action. installed in the vehicle in question, for example
due to:
2. Second action.
▷ Selected optional equipment.
Lists ▷ National-market version or national-market
equipment.
Alternative options and lists of items with no im‐
plied sequence are shown as bullet point lists: ▷ Possibility of subsequent enabling and soft‐
ware updates.
▷ First option.
This also applies to safety-relevant functions and
▷ Second option.
systems.
Before starting a journey, check whether a piece
Symbol on components and
of equipment or a function that is described is
assemblies available in the vehicle. Information about
This symbol on a vehicle component whether a function is currently available in the ve‐
indicates that further information on the hicle or whether and when the function can be
component is available in the Owner's installed in the vehicle can be obtained from a
Handbook. Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner.
7
NOTES Notes
If a piece of equipment, system or function is de‐ vehicle's equipment may vary from that descri‐
scribed in the Owner's Handbook, this does not bed in this handbook. For the same reason, it is
mean that it will be available in the vehicle. also impossible to guarantee that all descriptions
Please comply with the relevant laws and regula‐ will be completely accurate in all respects.
tions when using the corresponding functions We must therefore request your understanding
and systems. of the fact that the manufacturer of your vehicle
If certain equipment and models are not descri‐ is unable to recognise legal claims based on dis‐
bed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Sup‐ crepancies between the data, illustrations and
plementary Owner's Handbooks provided. descriptions in this Owner's Handbook and your
own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that
In right-hand drive vehicles, some operating ele‐
some of the optional equipment described in this
ments are arranged differently from those shown
manual is not available on Australian models due
in this Owner's Handbook.
to restrictions imposed by Australian Design
Rules and other requirements.
Production date Should you require any further information,
please contact your Service centre, who will be
The production date of your vehicle can be pleased to advise you.
found at the bottom of the door pillar on the driv‐
er's door. Validity of Owner's Handbook
The production date is defined as the calendar
month and the calendar year in which the vehicle Vehicle production
body and the powertrain assemblies are joined At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐
and the vehicle is driven or moved from the pro‐ ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐
duction line. formation. Updates following the copy deadline
can result in differences between the printed
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's
Status of the Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
Handbook Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
General After a software update in the vehicle

The high standards of safety and quality that
characterise the vehicles are ensured through
ongoing development. On rare occasions, this
may mean that the features described in this
est information.
handbook will vary from those in your vehicle.
For Australia/New Zealand: general Your own safety

When reading this Owner's Handbook, please
bear the following in mind: to ensure that our ve‐
Intended use
hicles continue to embody the highest quality
and safety standards, we pursue a policy of con‐ Please comply with the following when using the
tinuous, ongoing development. Because modifi‐ vehicle:
cations in the design of both vehicles and acces‐
sories may be introduced at any time, your own
8
Notes NOTES
▷ Owner's Handbook. BMW specifications with properly trained per‐

▷ Information attached to the vehicle. Do not sonnel. In the Owner's Handbook, facilities of this
remove stickers. kind are referred to as "another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop".
▷ Technical data of the vehicle.
If work such as maintenance and repair is carried
▷ The applicable laws and safety standards of
out incorrectly, it could result in consequential
the country in which the vehicle is used.
damage with associated safety risks.
▷ Vehicle papers and legal documents.
Work performed incorrectly on the vehicle paint‐
work can cause components, for example the ra‐
Warranty dar sensors, to fail or malfunction, resulting in a
The vehicle is technically designed for the oper‐ safety risk.
ating conditions and approval (homologation) re‐
quirements of the country to which it was first Parts and accessories
delivered. If the vehicle is to be driven in another
BMW recommends using parts and accessories
country, it may need to be adapted beforehand
that are approved by BMW and are therefore
to any different operating conditions and appro‐
suitable for this purpose.
val requirements prevailing in that country. If the
vehicle does not comply with the homologation You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv‐
requirements in a certain country, no warranty ice Partner for advice on genuine BMW parts and
claims can be lodged there for the vehicle. War‐ accessories, other BMW approved products and
ranty claims may also be invalidated if the electri‐ expert advice on all related matters.
cal system has been modified, for example The safety and compatibility of these products in
through the use of control units, hardware or conjunction with BMW vehicles have been
software which the vehicle manufacturer classi‐ checked by BMW.
fies as unsuitable. A Service Partner is able to BMW accepts product responsibility for genuine
provide further information. BMW parts and accessories. On the other hand,
Note: in addition to the statutory warranty, the BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces‐
selling Authorised BMW Retailers or the selling sory products of any kind which it has not ap‐
BMW AG branches in Germany are granting ad‐ proved.
ditional benefits with the purchase of new BMW BMW is unable to assess each individual product
vehicles within the framework of the BMW War‐ of outside origin as to its suitability for use on
ranty Booklet. More information: www.bmw.de/ BMW vehicles without safety risk. Likewise no
qualitaetsbrief. guarantee can be be assumed even if the prod‐
uct has been granted official approval in a spe‐
Maintenance and repairs cific country. Tests performed for such approvals
The advanced technology used in your vehicle, cannot always cover all operating conditions for
for example the state-of-the-art materials and BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are
high-performance electronics, requires appropri‐ insufficient.
ate maintenance and repair methods.
Consequently, the manufacturer of the vehicle
recommends having corresponding work carried
out by a BMW Service Partner. If another BMW
authorised workshop is chosen, BMW recom‐
mends choosing one that performs work, for ex‐
ample maintenance and repair, according to
9
NOTES Notes
Vehicle data and data The right of access also extends to information
about data that has been transferred to other
protection companies or bodies.
Please refer to the vehicle manufacturer's web
Responsibility and rights page for the applicable data protection policy.
This data protection policy contains information
Responsibility for data about the right to have data deleted or corrected.
The vehicle manufacturer's website also pro‐
Within the scope of data protection directives
vides its contact details and those of its data pro‐
and legislation, the manufacturer of the vehicle is
tection officer.
responsible for the processing of personal data
which is collected when the vehicle is used or The registered keeper can have the data stored
from web pages, customer support, online serv‐ in the vehicle read out by a Service Partner of the
ices and marketing campaigns. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner
or a specialist workshop, on payment of a fee
Personal identification where applicable.
Every vehicle has a unique vehicle identification The legally required OBD diagnostic socket in
number. Depending on the country, and with the the vehicle is used to read out the vehicle data.
assistance of the relevant authorities, the regis‐
tered keeper can be identified from the vehicle Data processing
identification number and the number plate. The collection of personal data may be neces‐
There are also other ways of tracing data collec‐ sary to enable the manufacturer of the vehicle to
ted in the vehicle back to the driver or registered fulfil obligations to the customer or legislator or
keeper, for example via the ConnectedDrive ac‐ to offer high-quality products and services.
count used.
These include, for example:
Data protection laws ▷ To fulfill contractual obligations regarding the

sale, servicing and repair of vehicles, for ex‐
In accordance with current data protection law, ample sales processes, maintenance.
vehicle users have certain rights vis-à-vis the ve‐
hicle manufacturer or companies that collect or ▷ To fulfill contractual obligations regarding the
process their personal data. provision of digital vehicle services, for exam‐
ple BMW ConnectedDrive.
Vehicle users have a free and comprehensive
right of access to their personal data which has ▷ To safeguard product quality and the re‐
been collected and held by organisations. search and development of new products,
and to optimise service processes.
Such organisations could be:
▷ To perform sales, service and administration
▷ Vehicle manufacturer. processes, including branches and National
▷ Qualified Service Partners. Sales Companies.
▷ Specialist workshops. ▷ To provide customer support, for example
▷ Service providers. contract processing.
Vehicle users may request information about ▷ To conduct advertising communication and
what personal data has been saved, what it is market research on the basis of personal
used for and where it has come from. Proof of consent.
ownership or use is required in order to obtain
this information.
10
Notes NOTES
▷ To fulfill legal obligations, for example infor‐ Transaction and interaction data
mation regarding Technical Campaigns. Information on the purchasing of products and
▷ To process warranty claims. services, interactions with customer support and
participation in market research studies.
Data collection
Use of apps and services of the vehicle
Type of data collected manufacturer
Depending on the situation, the following per‐ Information on the use of apps on mobile devi‐
sonal data may be collected. ces and online services.
Contact details Information on vehicle functions and settings
Name, address, phone number, email address. Information on functions and settings in the vehi‐
cle, for example when using online services.
Personal data
Vehicle-related sensor data and usage data
▷ Personal information provided by customers,
for example date of birth, education, house‐ Data which is generated and/or processed in the
hold size or occupation. vehicle.
▷ Data to determine identity, for example driv‐ ▷ Driver assistance systems: processing of
er's licence. sensor data which is used to evaluate the ve‐
hicle's surroundings or the driver's behaviour.
Contract data ▷ Personal settings: settings saved in the vehi‐
▷ Customer number, contract number, booked cle profile, for example seat setting.
online services. ▷ Multimedia, navigation, for example destina‐
▷ Stored payment information, for example tions.
credit card number.
Time of data collection
Credit rating Personal data may be collected at the following
▷ Information about transactions. times:
▷ Information about fraud or criminal offences. ▷ When the customer makes direct contact
with the manufacturer of the vehicle, for ex‐
Interests ample via the web page.
Information provided by the customer regarding ▷ When requesting information on products
areas of interest, for example product preferen‐ and services or direct purchases, for example
ces, hobbies and other personal preferences. on web pages or in apps.
▷ When making direct purchases, for example
Use of web pages and communication on the web page.
▷ Information on how web pages are used and ▷ When purchasing services directly, for exam‐
whether messages are opened or forwarded. ple online services.
▷ Account information regarding online serv‐ ▷ When the customer responds to direct mar‐
ices, customer portals and prospective cus‐ keting activities, for example when personal
tomer portals. data is provided.
11
NOTES Notes
▷ When using vehicles, products, services and eration, lateral acceleration, fastened seat
digital offers, for example web pages, apps. belts.
▷ When communicating personal data through ▷ Ambient conditions, for example temperature,
qualified partners of the vehicle manufacturer rain sensor signals.
or through third-party providers, provided that The data is processed within the vehicle and is
data protection requirements are met. usually transient. It is only saved for longer than
▷ When providing personal data through certi‐ the operating period if it is required in order to
fied address providers, provided that data provide services agreed with the customer.
protection requirements are met.
▷ When vehicle data, including the vehicle iden‐ Electronic components
tification number, is read out during service, Electronic components, for example control devi‐
maintenance and repair activities. ces and vehicle keys, contain components for
storing technical information. Information about
Data in the vehicle the vehicle condition, component use and wear,
maintenance requirements, events or faults can
General be stored temporarily or permanently.
A number of electronic control devices are instal‐ This information generally documents the condi‐
led in your vehicle. Electronic control units proc‐ tion of a component, a module, a system or the
ess data that they receive from vehicle sensors, vehicle's surroundings, including:
generate themselves or exchange with one an‐ ▷ Operating states of system components, for
other, for example. Many of the control units are example fill levels, tyre inflation pressure, bat‐
necessary for safe operation of the vehicle, or tery status.
provide assistance during a journey, for example ▷ Malfunctions and faults of important system
driver assistance systems. There are also control components, for example lights and brakes.
devices which manage comfort or infotainment
functions. ▷ Responses of the vehicle to particular driving
situations, for example triggering of an airbag,
Data saved in the vehicle can be deleted at any activation of the driving stability control sys‐
time. This data is only transmitted to third parties tems.
if expressly requested in the course of using on‐
line services. The transfer depends on the set‐ ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
tings selected for using the services. The data is required so that the control units can
perform their functions. It is also used for detect‐
Sensor data ing and rectifying malfunctions, as well as to opti‐
mise vehicle functions.
Driver assistance systems, for example Active
Cruise Control, Collision Warning or Attentive‐ Most of this data is transient and is only pro‐
ness Assistant, process sensor data which is cessed within the vehicle itself. Only a small pro‐
used to evaluate the vehicle's surroundings or portion of the data is stored in event or fault
the driver's behaviour. memories in response to specific circumstances.
These include, for example:
Personal settings
▷ Status messages relating to the vehicle and
its individual components, for example wheel Convenience functions, such as seat, climate or
speed, wheel circumferential velocity, decel‐ light settings, enhance the driving experience.
The personal settings for these functions can be
saved in a BMW ID or in a profile within the vehi‐
12
Notes NOTES
cle and retrieved as required, for example if the Stored data

settings have been changed in the meantime by Electronic vehicle components may contain data
another driver. Depending on the equipment, storage medium which store technical informa‐
these profiles can be saved in the vehicle manu‐ tion relating to the vehicle condition, events and
facturer's secure data systems. When the driver faults. The data required for service measures is
changes vehicle, these saved profiles can simply processed locally and is deleted automatically
be applied to a different vehicle. once the work is complete. A Service Partner of
The vehicle settings stored in a BMW ID or vehi‐ the manufacturer or another qualified Service
cle profile can be changed or deleted at any time. Partner or a specialist workshop can read out the
information. As part of service and repair work,
Multimedia and navigation data is read out via the OBD diagnostic socket
Data can be additionally imported into the vehicle using special diagnosis systems and transferred
entertainment and communication system, for to the vehicle manufacturer. The customer is en‐
example, via smartphone. The imported data can titled to withhold consent to the data being read
be processed within the vehicle, for example to out and forwarded.
play the user's favourite music.
Depending on the equipment, this data includes:
Optimising service processes
The vehicle manufacturer maintains documenta‐
▷ Multimedia data such as music or photos for
tion relating to each vehicle to ensure the best
playback in an integrated multimedia system.
possible service is provided. Within the scope of
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with legal requirements, this documentation may be
an integrated hands-free system or an made available to authorised third parties, for ex‐
integrated navigation system. ample specialist workshops.
▷ Destinations: depending on the equipment, The authorised third parties may only use this
route guidance can be started automatically data for the purposes of performing the service
using destinations learned by the navigation or repair order in question. This prevents work
system. from being duplicated unnecessarily on the vehi‐
▷ Data on usage of Internet services. cle, for example.
This data may be saved locally in the vehicle or
stored on a device that has been connected to Ensuring product quality
the vehicle, for example, a smartphone or USB The data logs the technical conditions of the ve‐
stick. hicle and helps in locating faults, complying with
warranty obligations and improving quality.
Service data To ensure product quality and the development
of new products, data on the usage of individual
General components and systems, for example, lights,
When services are required, for example repairs, brake, electric windows, displays, can be read
service operations, warranty work and quality as‐ out. This data helps the vehicle manufacturer to
surance measures, this technical information can optimise the design of components and sys‐
be read out from the vehicle together with the tems. Data analysis also provides the basis for
vehicle identification number. Technical Campaigns and statutory recalls.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring obligations to meet in line with prod‐
uct liability law. To fulfil these obligations, the ve‐
13
NOTES Notes
hicle manufacturer requires technical data from vehicle and used to control vehicle functions, for
the vehicle. example BMW Connected, Apple CarPlay.
Sound and images from the mobile device may
Goodwill and warranty claims be played back or displayed through the multi‐
Data from the vehicle can also be used to check media system in the vehicle, for example.
customer warranty claims. If goodwill or warranty Selected information is transferred to the mobile
claims are asserted, the data is read out and device at the same time. Depending on the type
transferred to the vehicle manufacturer to re‐ of integration, this includes position data and
solve the claims promptly. other general vehicle information, for example.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be This enables optimum use of selected apps, for
reset when a Service Partner of the manufacturer example navigation and music playback. How the
or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐ data is processed further is determined by the
ist workshop performs repair or servicing work. provider of the particular app being used.
Control over data Services

The transfer of data to the vehicle manufacturer
for the purposes of ensuring product quality or
General
optimising service processes can be stopped on If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
request. data can be exchanged between the vehicle and
other systems, for example with BMW Connect‐
Legal requirements regarding data edDrive.
disclosure
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
According to current law, the vehicle manufac‐
The various functions of online services provided
turer is obliged to provide the authorities with any
by the vehicle manufacturer are described at ap‐
data it has stored. Data is provided to the extent
propriate points, for example in the Owner's
required and on a case-by-case basis, for exam‐
Handbook or on the manufacturer's web page.
ple to investigate a criminal offence.
The relevant legal information pertaining to data
The current law also gives state bodies authori‐ protection is also given.
sation to read out data from the vehicle them‐
Personal data may be used to provide online
selves for individual cases. This could include
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con‐
reading out data from the airbag control unit to
nection, for example with the vehicle manufactur‐
shed light on the circumstances of an accident,
er's data systems set up for this purpose.
for example.
Any collection, processing and use of personal
In the context of legal obligations within the EU,
data above and beyond that needed to provide
certain vehicle consumption data, so-called
the services always requires legal permission, a
OBFCM data, are transmitted to the EU Com‐
contractual agreement or consent of the user.
mission via the vehicle manufacturer, e.g. fuel or
energy consumption and the distance covered.
The registered keeper can refuse to provide this BMW ConnectedDrive
data for this purpose. BMW ConnectedDrive networks the vehicle with
a number of digital services. When these serv‐
Mobile devices ices are used, only the data stored in the vehicle
and required to provide the service is transferred
Depending on the equipment, mobile devices
online, for example information on identifying and
such as smartphones can be connected to the
14
Notes NOTES
locating the vehicle. Usage is based on a con‐ Transparency concerning vehicle data
tractual agreement with the user. BMW CarData provides transparency in handling
In individual cases, the transfer of data is trig‐ vehicle data with the use of BMW Connected‐
gered as a result of predefined events, such as Drive. BMW CarData enables users to control
an intelligent emergency call. The wireless net‐ whether vehicle data being processed in the
work connection is established via an in-vehicle context of BMW ConnectedDrive is transferred
transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mo‐ to third parties. Users can decide for each indi‐
bile devices brought into the vehicle, for example vidual service offering whether data access is to
smartphones. Data transfer can be deactivated be granted or refused to third parties, for exam‐
on request. ple to insurance companies.
The wireless network connection enables online An archive can also be requested from BMW
functions to be used. These include online serv‐ CarData at any time. The archive provides infor‐
ices and apps supplied by the vehicle manufac‐ mation on the data that has been transmitted
turer or by other providers. and saved in the context of BMW Connected‐
Drive. BMW CarData can only be accessed by
Services from other providers third-party providers via the vehicle manufactur‐
When using online services from other providers, er's servers. Direct access to the vehicle and its
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ data is not permitted.
vant provider and subject to their data protection More information on BMW CarData is available
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ on the BMW ConnectedDrive customer portal.
facturer has no influence over the data that is ex‐
changed. Statutory emergency call system
Information as to how personal data is collected
and used in relation to services from third parties, Principle
the scope of such data and its purpose, can be The eCall emergency call system required by law
obtained from the relevant provider. enables manual or automatic emergency calls to
be made, for example in the event of an accident.
Personal decision The emergency calls are answered by the public
Every user decides for themselves whether they rescue coordination centre.
wish to enter into a contract for a service such as
BMW ConnectedDrive. Information on the extent General
of data processing and the content involved is
For information on the eCall statutory on-board
provided in writing before the service is acquired
emergency call system based on the 112 emer‐
and forms part of the vehicle handover.
gency call, as well as its operation and its func‐
The user has the option to deactivate the serv‐ tions, see the chapter on emergency calls.
ices at any time and consequently to stop the
The eCall service based on the 112 emergency
data processing required for the services. It is
call is a public service of general interest and is
also possible to have the entire data connection
provided free of charge.
activated or deactivated. Excluded from this are
functions and services which are required by law, If a serious accident occurs, the eCall statutory
for example emergency call systems. emergency call system is activated automatically
by on-board sensors as standard practice. It is
also triggered automatically if the vehicle is
equipped with an intelligent emergency call sys‐
15
NOTES Notes
tem that fails to work in the event of a serious ac‐ rescue, for example the risk of fire caused by
cident. fuel.
The eCall statutory emergency call system can ▷ The vehicle's position at the time of the acci‐
also be triggered manually if required. dent, its last three locations and the direction
If a critical system failure occurs that would put of travel in order to locate the vehicle more
the eCall statutory emergency call system out of quickly on very complex route sections, for
operation, the vehicle occupants receive a warn‐ example.
ing. ▷ A log of the automatic system activation,
For further information: along with the time stamp.
▷ Emergency call, see page 366. ▷ Control information, which tells rescue serv‐
ices whether the emergency call was trig‐
▷ Malfunction, see page 367.
gered automatically or manually, for example.
Information on data processing ▷ A time stamp for determining the time of the
accident in order to optimise the deployment
The eCall statutory emergency call system pro‐ plans of the rescue services.
cesses personal data in accordance with the
following regulations: ▷ The direction of travel for establishing which
side of the carriageway is affected, for exam‐
▷ Protection of personal data: Regulation (EU) ple.
2016/679 of the European Parliament and of
the Council. The authorities of the state in whose territory the
eCall system emergency call is made determine
▷ Protection of personal data: Directive which emergency call centres receive and proc‐
2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and ess the statutory emergency call.
of the Council.
Personal data is only processed for the purpose Data processing configuration
of transmitting eCall emergency calls to the sin‐
The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐
gle European emergency call number 112.
sures that the data contained in the system
memory cannot be accessed outside the system
SIM card before an emergency call is triggered.
The eCall statutory emergency call system oper‐ The data collected for the eCall statutory emer‐
ates via mobile radio through the SIM card instal‐ gency call system is only saved in the vehicle
led in the vehicle. The SIM card is not perma‐ and sent to the rescue coordination centre when
nently connected to the mobile phone network; an emergency call is triggered.
rather, it remains connected only as long as the
emergency call is active. The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐
sures that it cannot be traced and there is no
permanent tracking during normal operation.
Data types and their recipients
The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐
The eCall statutory emergency call system may
sures that the data in the internal system mem‐
only collect and process the following data:
ory is deleted automatically and continuously.
▷ The vehicle identification number for rapidly
The vehicle's location data is continuously over‐
identifying the vehicle, for example the model.
written in the system's internal memory so that
▷ Vehicle type, for example passenger car. only the vehicle's last three locations - which the
▷ Type of vehicle drive, for example petrol or system needs for normal operation - are ever
diesel, for assessing the risks involved in a stored.
16
Notes NOTES
The activity data log of the eCall statutory emer‐ The registered keeper has the right to use either
gency call system is retained only for as long as the intelligent emergency call system or the eCall
is necessary to handle the eCall emergency call statutory emergency call system.
and under no circumstances for any longer than For further information:
13 hours after the eCall emergency call was trig‐
Emergency call, see page 366.
gered.
Legal basis
Rights of individuals affected by data
processing The intelligent emergency call system processes
personal data in accordance with the following
The individual affected by data processing, for
regulations:
example the registered keeper, has the right to
access the data and can request that data con‐ ▷ Protection of personal data: Regulation (EU)
cerning him or her that is not processed in ac‐ 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of
cordance with the statutory regulations be cor‐ the Council.
rected, deleted or blocked as applicable. Each ▷ Protection of personal data: Directive
time that data is corrected, deleted or blocked in 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and
line with these regulations, the third parties to of the Council.
whom the data was transmitted must be notified, The ConnectedDrive contract concluded for this
insofar as this is reasonably practical. function, as well as the relevant laws, ordinances
The individual affected by data processing has and directives of the European Parliament and
the right to complain to the relevant data protec‐ the European Council provide the legal basis for
tion body if he or she believes that his or her the activation and function of the intelligent
rights have been violated as a result of having emergency call system.
their personal data processed. The relevant ordinances and directives govern
For matters relating to access rights, please con‐ the protection of individuals in terms of process‐
tact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ ing personal data.
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist The intelligent emergency call system processes
workshop. personal data in accordance with European di‐
rectives on the protection of personal data.
Intelligent emergency call system The intelligent emergency call system processes
personal data only with the registered keeper's
Principle consent.
The intelligent emergency call system enables The intelligent emergency call system and other
manual or automatic emergency calls to be added-value services may only process personal
placed, for example in the event of an accident. data with the express consent of the individual
The emergency calls are answered by an emer‐ affected by data processing, for example the reg‐
gency call centre appointed by the vehicle manu‐ istered keeper.
facturer.
In addition to the intelligent emergency call sys‐ SIM card
tem, the eCall statutory emergency call system is The intelligent emergency call system operates
present in the vehicle and is active depending on via mobile radio through the SIM card installed in
the situation. the vehicle. The SIM card is permanently logged
into the mobile phone network so a connection
setup can be established quickly. The data is
17
NOTES Notes
sent to the vehicle manufacturer in the event of Furthermore, the intelligent emergency call sys‐
an emergency. tem also conveys the following additional infor‐
mation to an emergency call centre appointed by
Improving quality the vehicle manufacturer and, where applicable,
The vehicle manufacturer also uses the data sent to the public rescue coordination centre:
as part of an emergency call to improve product ▷ Accident data, for example the direction of
and service quality. the collision as detected by the vehicle sen‐
sors in order to assist the rescue services in
Position determination their deployment plans.
Only the provider of the mobile phone network is ▷ Contact data, for example the phone number
able to determine the position of the vehicle of the installed SIM card and the driver's
based on mobile phone mast locations. The net‐ phone number, if available, so that those in‐
work operator is not able to link the vehicle iden‐ volved in the accident can be contacted
tification number to the phone number of the in‐ quickly if necessary.
stalled SIM card. Only the vehicle manufacturer
is able to link the vehicle identification number to Data storage
the phone number of the installed SIM card. The data relating to a placed emergency call is
saved in the vehicle. The data contains informa‐
Log data for emergency calls tion about the emergency call, for example the
The log data for emergency calls is saved in a place and time it was made.
vehicle memory. The oldest log data is regularly The emergency call centre saves audio record‐
deleted. The log data includes information on ings of the emergency call.
when and where an emergency call was placed, Audio recordings of the customer are saved for
for example in the event of an accident. 24 hours, in case details of the emergency call
In exceptional cases, the log data can be read out need to be analysed. After that, the audio record‐
from the vehicle memory. The log data is usually ings are deleted. Audio recordings of the emer‐
read out only if a court order has been issued gency call centre employee are saved for
and is only possible when the relevant devices 24 hours for quality assurance purposes.
are connected directly to the vehicle.
Disclosure of personal data
Automatic emergency call The data obtained in the context of an intelligent
The system has been designed so that an emer‐ emergency call is only used to process the
gency call is triggered automatically when an ac‐ emergency call. If legally obliged to do so, the ve‐
cident of a certain severity occurs and is detec‐ hicle manufacturer will disclose the data it has
ted by the sensors in the vehicle. processed and, where applicable, still has saved.
Sent information Statutory emergency call system

If an emergency call is made by the intelligent The owner of a vehicle equipped with an intelli‐
emergency call system, the same information is gent emergency call system and the eCall statu‐
conveyed to the appointed emergency call cen‐ tory emergency call system is entitled to use the
tre as is normally conveyed to the public rescue on-board eCall system instead of the intelligent
coordination centre by the eCall statutory emer‐ emergency call function.
gency call system.
18
Notes NOTES
To request deactivation, please contact a Serv‐ Under the bonnet

ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
The eCall statutory emergency call system is al‐
ways on standby in addition to the intelligent
emergency call system. The eCall statutory
emergency call system takes over the emer‐
gency call function if the intelligent emergency
call system is not operational for technical rea‐
sons, for example if the emergency call centre
appointed by the vehicle manufacturer cannot be
reached. The vehicle identification number is engraved
under the bonnet, on the right-hand side of vehi‐
The eCall statutory emergency call system uses
cle.
the infrastructure of the 112 public emergency
call number.
The system can be configured so that emer‐ Type plate on right-hand side
gency calls are always made via the eCall statu‐
tory emergency call system and not via the intel‐
ligent emergency call system. Have the setting
configured by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
specialist workshop.
Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is on the type
General plate on the right-hand side of vehicle.
Depending on the national-market equipment,
the vehicle identification number is located at dif‐
ferent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐
Type plate on left-hand side
scribes all the positions that are possible for the
model range.
The vehicle identification number is on the type

plate on the left-hand side of vehicle.
19
NOTES Notes
Windscreen
The vehicle identification number is additionally

located behind the windscreen.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Device manager"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID (VIN):"
20
Safety of the high-voltage system NOTES
Safety of the high-voltage system

Vehicle equipment ▷ When there is water in the footwell, for exam‐
ple after a rain shower with the window open.
This chapter describes equipment, systems and ▷ The vehicle is in water up to the allowed
functions which are offered or will be offered on height.
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ ▷ If liquid spills in the luggage compartment.
ded in the vehicle in question.
For further information:
Vehicle equipment, see page 7.
Monitoring the high-voltage
battery
Working on the vehicle Principle
The temperature in the high-voltage battery is
General monitored.
Changes and work on the vehicle, for example An unusually high temperature in the high-volt‐
the retrofitting of accessories, must only be car‐ age battery is indicated.
ried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer
or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐
Safety note
ist workshop that operates to BMW specifica‐
tions with suitably trained personnel.
WARNING
Safety note An unusually high temperature of the high-volt‐
age battery can cause a formation of gas and
smoke. There is a danger of injury or danger to
WARNING
life. In case of noticeable unusual odour or
An electric shock can occur if the work is not smoke formation, refer to the notes for actions
carried out correctly, in particular maintenance in the event of a message.
and repair of the high-voltage system. There is
a danger of injury, fire or danger to life. Only
have work on the vehicle, particularly mainte‐ High temperature message
nance, repair and modifications, carried out by a
Service Partner of the manufacturer or another While the vehicle is moving
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
A Check Control message is shown.
shop.
During and shortly after the charging

process
Contact with water Depending on the national-market version: the
vehicle sounds the horn and, if applicable, the
The high-voltage system is generally safe also in vehicle lights are flashing.
the following example situations:
21
NOTES Safety of the high-voltage system
Actions in the event of a message
While the vehicle is moving

1. Stop immediately.
2. Park the vehicle safely.
3. Exit the vehicle.
4. Establish and keep a sufficient distance to
the vehicle.
5. Alert emergency personnel.
During and shortly after the charging

process
1. If necessary, exit the vehicle.
2. Establish and keep a sufficient distance to
the vehicle.
3. Alert emergency personnel.
Automatic deactivation
In the event of an accident the high-voltage sys‐
tem is shut down automatically so as not to en‐
danger vehicle occupants and other road users.
Conduct after an accident, see page 369.
22
Owner's Handbook media NOTES
Owner's Handbook media

Vehicle equipment Printed Owner's Handbook
This chapter describes equipment, systems and
Principle
functions which are offered or will be offered on
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ The printed Owner's Handbook shows all stand‐
ded in the vehicle in question. ard equipment, national-market equipment and
optional equipment which is offered or will be of‐
fered on a model-specific basis.
General
General The Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication is available as a
printed book from Service.
Media overview
Content from the Owner's Handbook can be ac‐ Supplementary Owner's Handbooks
cessed in different formats. The Owner's Please also follow the Supplementary Owner's
Handbook is available in the following formats: Handbooks which are provided along with the
▷ Printed Owner's Handbook. on-board literature as required.
▷ Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's Handbook

in the vehicle
Vehicle production
At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ Principle
ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐
The Integrated Owner's Handbook shows all
formation. Updates following the copy deadline
standard equipment, national-market equipment
can result in differences between the printed
and optional equipment which is offered or will
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's
be offered on a model-specific basis. The
Handbook in the vehicle.
integrated Owner's Handbook can be shown on
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix the control display.
Selecting the Owner's Handbook
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
er's Handbook for the vehicle will contain the lat‐ 3. "Owner's Handbook"
est information. 4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents.
23
NOTES Owner's Handbook media
Scrolling within the Owner's

Handbook
Swipe up or down until the next or previous con‐
tents are displayed.
Context-sensitive help
General
The integrated Owner's Handbook can be called
up from any menu. Depending on the selected
function, the associated description or main
menu of the integrated Owner's Handbook is
displayed.
Selecting context-sensitive help from a

menu
1. Press and hold the relevant menu item.
2. "Help"
Selecting context-sensitive help from a

Check Control message
To switch directly from the Check Control mes‐
sage on the control display:
"Owner's Handbook"
24
Owner's Handbook media NOTES
25
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing Locking with the vehicle key
1. Close the driver's door.
Vehicle key
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Unlocking on the outside door handle
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Icon Meaning
Unlock.
If you are carrying the vehicle key on your per‐
son, reach into the handle recess.
Lock.
Locking on the outside door handle
Open/close the luggage compartment.
Function adjustable:
Home lights.
Pre-conditioning.
Access to vehicle interior

If you are carrying the remote control on your
Unlocking with the vehicle key person, touch the grooved surface on the out‐
Press the button on the vehicle key. side door handle of a closed vehicle door with
your finger for approx. 1 second without reaching
into the handle recess.
Depending on the settings, this will unlock the
driver's door only, or all vehicle access points.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
26
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Central locking buttons Closing the luggage compartment
Overview
▷ Press the button on the inside of the

luggage compartment.
Central locking buttons.
▷ Hold down the button on the vehicle
key until luggage compartment is
Locking the vehicle closed.
Press the button with the front doors
closed. Touchless opening and closing of the
luggage compartment
Unlocking the vehicle Touchless opening and closing of the luggage
compartment is possible when carrying the vehi‐
Press the button.
cle key on your person.
1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐
proximately an arm's length away from the
Access to the luggage compartment rear of the vehicle.
2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath
Opening the luggage compartment the vehicle and immediately pull it back. Your
leg must move across the ranges of both
sensors.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outer side of the luggage compart‐
ment.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
for approximately 1 second.
The doors are unlocked if applicable.
27
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Displays, operating elements Switch cluster
Around the steering wheel
1 Selector lever
2 Controller
1 Light switch element 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
2 Turn indicator, high-beam headlight 4 Driving Experience Control
3 Instrument cluster 5 Start/Stop button
4 Windscreen wipers 6 Park assistance systems
Indicator and warning lights iDrive

Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colours. Principle
When switching on drive-ready state, the func‐ iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐
tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐ ment system and includes a large number of
minate briefly. functions.
Driver's door Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
To go to the main menu.
To go to the Media/Radio menu.
To go to the Telephone menu.
1 Electric windows
2 Seats, comfort functions To go to the navigation map.
3 Central locking system
4 Exterior mirrors
To go to the destination entry menu of
5 Opening/closing the luggage compartment the navigation system.
28
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Button Function
Go to previous display area.
To go to the Options menu.
Voice input
Activating voice input
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Say the command.
Cancelling voice input

Press the button on the steering wheel
or say ›Cancel‹.
29
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
Adjustment and operation

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the head restraint
wheel Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
Manually adjustable seats
▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide

1 Longitudinal direction the head restraint downwards.
2 Thigh support ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
3 Seat angle After adjusting the height, make sure that the
4 Backrest width head restraint engages correctly.
5 Lumbar support
6 Height Adjusting the height: electric head
7 Backrest angle
restraints
Electrically adjustable seats
Press the switch up or down.
1 Backrest width
2 Height/longitudinal direction/seat angle
3 Head restraint/backrest angle
4 Lumbar support
30
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the distance Adjusting the steering wheel
▷ Back: press the button and push back the 1. Fold the lever down fully.
head restraint. 2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands and
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. adjust it in the longitudinal direction and
After adjusting the distance, make sure that the height of the seat position.
head restraint engages correctly. 3. Fold the lever back up.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Memory function
Principle
The memory function enables the following set‐
tings to be stored and retrieved when required:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Depending on the equipment: height of the
Head-up display.
Icon Meaning
Overview
Folding in and out.
Adjusting.
Select mirror, automatic parking func‐

tion.
The memory buttons are on the front doors.
31
Storing settings 3. To enter a new destination or start route

1. Set the desired position. guidance, tap on the search field or select an
entry from the search history.
4. Enter at least two characters.
2. Press the button. The LED is illumina‐
If necessary, start the search for point of in‐
ted.
terest categories from the Points of Interest
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the menu.
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.
If necessary, accept the suggested search
term.
Go to Settings
5. A list of results is displayed.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
6. Select the desired entry.
Infotainment Using the mobile phone
General
Entertainment
Once the mobile phone has been connected in
Buttons and functions the vehicle, it can be operated using iDrive and
the buttons on the steering wheel.
Depending on the country and equipment speci‐
fication, the following buttons are installed in the Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.
centre console or instrument panel.
Connecting via Bluetooth®
Button Function
1. "MENU"
Turn the knob to set the vol‐ 2. "All apps"
ume.
3. "Device manager"
Press the knob to switch off the
4. "Connect new device"
sound output. Pressing again
restores the previous volume. Mobile phones in range are displayed on the
control display.
Changing the entertainment
5. Select the required mobile phone
source.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
Press once: to change the sta‐ the control display with the control number in
tion/music track. the display of the mobile phone and confirm
that they match.
Press and hold: to fast forward/
rewind the music track. 7. If necessary, select the connection mode:
"Use Bluetooth"
The device is connected and displayed in the
Navigation destination entry device list.
1. "NAV"
Accepting a call
2. "Destination input"
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can
be accepted in different ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
32
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
"Accept" Mobile phones in range are displayed on the

control display.
5. Select the desired mobile phone on the con‐
▷
trol display or the Bluetooth® name of the
Press the relevant button on the steering vehicle on the display of the mobile phone.
wheel.
▷ Use the knurled wheel on the steering wheel the control display with the control number in
to select from the list in the instrument clus‐ the display of the mobile phone and confirm
ter: "Accept" that they match.
7. Select CarPlay as the connection mode:
Dialling a number
"Use Apple CarPlay"
1. "TEL"
8. Confirm the connection mode on the display
2. "More"
of the smartphone.
3. "Dial number"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
4. Enter the numbers. played in the device list.
5. Select the icon. The call is made using
the mobile phone to which the telephone Android Auto© preparation
function is assigned.
Principle
Apple CarPlay© preparation Android Auto enables selected functions of a
compatible smartphone to be operated by Goo‐
Principle gle Assistant voice control and iDrive.
CarPlay enables selected functions of a compati‐
ble Apple iPhone to be operated by Siri voice Operating requirements
control and iDrive. ▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an
Operating requirements Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with less of the manufacturer.
iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract. ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are activated on the
▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be smartphone.
activated on the iPhone. ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice control are activated on the smartphone.
activated on the iPhone. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐ hicle.
hicle. ▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi
connection.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Device manager"
33
Pairing the smartphone with Android

Auto
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Device manager"
Mobile phones in range are displayed on the
control display.
5. Select the desired mobile phone on the con‐
trol display or the Bluetooth® name of the
vehicle on the display of the mobile phone.
the control display with the control number in
the display of the mobile phone and confirm
that they match.
7. Select Android Auto as the connection mode:
"Use Android Auto"
of the smartphone.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
34
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
On the move
Driving Drive-ready state in detail
Operating requirements
Drive-ready state
Driving is possible if the following conditions are
met:
General
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
An active drive-ready state is the same as the
charged.
engine running in conventional vehicles.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
Switching on drive-ready state ▷ Charging cable is disconnected.
Driving
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Press the brake and engage selector lever
position D, B or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
2. Press the brake.
4. Drive away by applying the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
An acoustic signal sounds. Drive-ready state is Engaging selector lever position D, N, R
switched on.
Display in the instrument cluster

The READY indicator shows that
the vehicle is ready to drive.
Switching off drive-ready state

▷ D drive position.
After stopping:
▷ N Neutral.
1. Press the brake and engage selector lever ▷ R reverse gear.
position P.
Apply the brake until ready to drive off, otherwise
2. Apply the parking brake. the vehicle will move when drive position or re‐
3. Press the Start/Stop button. verse gear is selected.
The READY display is no longer illuminated With the driver's seat belt fastened, briefly tap
and an acoustic signal is heard. the selector lever in the desired direction, be‐
yond a resistance point if required. The selector
lever returns to the centre position in each case.
35
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
Before shifting out of P, disconnect the charging

cable from the vehicle, otherwise the gearshift
request is not performed.
Only engage selector lever position R when the
vehicle is stationary.
A selector lever lock prevents inadvertently shift‐
ing to selector lever position R or an inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐

Cancelling the selector lever lock sition D to the left.
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake

Pull the switch.
The LED on the switch and the indicator
light in the instrument cluster are illumi‐
nated.
Press the button.
Release the parking brake
Engaging selector lever position P With drive-ready state switched on:
Only engage selector lever position P when the Press the switch with the brake applied
vehicle is stationary. or the selector lever in position P.
The LED and the indicator light are no longer illu‐
minated.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
Press button P.
Engaging selector lever position B

Selector lever position B is the drive position with
the highest energy recovery.
36
Turn indicators, high-beam Lights and lighting

headlights, headlight flasher
Buttons in the vehicle
Turn indicators
Icon Function
Rear fog light.
Lights off.
Daytime driving lights.
Side lights.
▷ Flashing: press the lever past the resistance

Automatic driving lights control.
point.
Adaptive lighting functions.
▷ One-touch signalling: lightly tap the lever up
or down. Low-beam headlight.
▷ To indicate a turn briefly: press the lever as
far as the resistance point and hold it there
for as long as you wish to indicate a turn. Instrument lighting.
High-beam headlights, headlight flasher

Parking light, right.
Parking light, left.
Wiper system
Switching on the wiper system

Push the lever forwards or pull it back.
▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlights are illuminated
when the low-beam headlight is switched on.
▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
Press the lever upwards to the desired position.
37
▷ Rest position of the wipers: position 0. Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off the wiper system and flick

wiping
Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windscreen
Press the lever down.

▷ To switch off: press lever downwards until
position 0 is reached.
▷ To flick wipe: press the lever downwards
from position 0.
The lever returns to position 0 when re‐ Pull the lever.
leased.
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Air conditioning

Air conditioning functions
Functions in the air conditioning menu
Icon Function
AUTO programme.
To activate: press the lever upwards once from

Temperature.
position 0, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back to position 0.
Maximum cooling.
38
Icon Function Icon Function
Air recirculation function. Defrost function.
Automatic air recircula‐ Rear window heating.

tion control.
Fresh air.
Buttons, automatic rear air-conditioning
system
Amount of air.
Air distribution.
SYNC programme.
Seat heating.
Icon Function
Active seat ventilation. AUTO programme.
Temperature.
The functions can also be operated via voice, for
example, Temperature.
Air distribution.
Buttons, integrated automatic heating/air
conditioning system
Seat heating, see
page 122.
To switch off.
Pit stop
Charging vehicle
To charge the vehicle, use a mode 2 charging
cable, a mode 3 charging cable or a fixed cable of
a charging station depending on the national-
market version.
39
The charging cable may be located in the lug‐ Checking the tyre inflation pressure
gage compartment, for example under the lug‐ Check regularly and adjust as necessary:
gage compartment floor or in a bag.
▷ At least twice a month.
Before disconnecting and connecting a charging
cable, clean the area between the charging ▷ Before a long journey.
socket flap and charging socket outlet and the
charging cable plug if necessary, for example re‐
move any snow.
How to get assistance
Unlock the charging cable before disconnecting
it, if necessary. Hazard warning lights
The charging status is indicated on the indicator
light on the charging socket. Button in the vehicle
Keep the charging socket flap and, if applicable,
the charging socket cover, closed when the
charging socket is not in use.
Wheels and tyres
Tyre inflation pressure information
Hazard warning lights button
Help in case of a breakdown
BMW Emergency Service

1. "MENU"
The tyre inflation pressure information can be
found on the tyre pressure label on the body pil‐ 2. "All apps"
lar of the driver's door. 3. "Assistance"
4. If necessary, select the entry for BMW Road‐
After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure side Assistance.
For the flat tyre monitor RPA: A voice contact is established.
Reinitialise the flat tyre monitor RPA.

ConnectedDrive
For the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied Concierge Service
automatically. Make sure that the tyre settings The Concierge Service provides information
are correct. about hotels, restaurants etc. and can send an
For tyres that are not listed in the tyre inflation SMS with the required information to the vehicle.
pressure information on the control display, reset
the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
40
Addresses can also be sent directly to the navi‐

gation system.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Assistance"
4. Select the entry for the Concierge Service if
applicable.
A voice contact to the Concierge Service is es‐
tablished.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to keep the
vehicle mobile.
Teleservices may include the following services:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Your Service Partner.
41
CONTROLS Vehicle cockpit
Vehicle cockpit
Vehicle equipment a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐
This chapter describes equipment, systems and For further information:
functions which are offered or will be offered on Vehicle equipment, see page 7.
Around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch 105 To unlock
2 Seat comfort functions To lock
Memory function 121
6 Lights
3 Electric windows, individual 103 Rear fog light 183
Light switch 177
4 Exterior mirror operation 119
5 Central locking system 99
Lights off
Daytime driving lights 180
42
Vehicle cockpit CONTROLS
Side lights 178 With Steering and Lane Control As‐

sistant 241:
Cruise Control, distance control and
Automatic driving lights con‐
lane tracking on/off
trol 177
Adaptive lighting functions 180
Cruise Control: to store a speed
High-beam Assistant 182
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
Low-beam headlight 178
suggested speed 237
To interrupt or resume Cruise Con‐
Instrument lighting 184 trol
Active Cruise Control: to increase

Right parking light 178 the distance
Active Cruise Control: to reduce the

Left parking light 178 distance
Cruise Control rocker switch

7 Steering column lever, left
Turn indicator 148
9 Instrument cluster 153
10 Buttons on steering wheel, right
High-beam headlight, headlight Displaying the menu bar in the in‐
flasher 149 strument cluster 153
High-beam Assistant 182 Volume, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Trip data 171
Voice control system 61
8 Buttons on steering wheel, left

Selecting the menu contents in the
Manual Speed Limiter 224 instrument cluster 153
To change the station/music track,
Depending on the equipment: see the Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
Cruise Control on/off 226
munication 6
Depending on the equipment:

Active Cruise Control on/off 229
43
Telephone, see Owner's Handbook Windscreen wipers 149

for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
Rain sensor 150
Knurled wheel for selecting config‐
uration menus for instrument clus‐
ter and head-up display 153 To clean the windscreen 151
Operating the infotainment selec‐
tion lists in the instrument clus‐
ter 170 12 Horn, entire area
11 Steering column lever, right

13 Steering wheel heating 121
14 To adjust the steering wheel 121

15 To unlock the bonnet 352
16 Opening and closing luggage com‐

partment 91
17 Glove compartment 288
44
Vehicle cockpit CONTROLS
Around the centre console
1 Control display 57 5 Controller with buttons 58

2 Ventilation 279 6 Automatic Hold 147
3 Hazard warning lights 364
Parking brake 145
Climate control 273
Defrost function 278
7 Driving Experience Control 144
SPORT drive mode
Rear window heating 279
COMFORT drive mode
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for

ECO PRO drive mode
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Adjusting the volume 8 Turning drive-ready state on/
off 137
Station/track forward
Station/track back
4 Button for glove compartment 288
45
9 Parking assistance systems 251 10 Selector lever 137
Panorama View 257
Dynamic Stability Control 220
Around the headliner
1 Emergency call, SOS 366 4 Reading lights 185
2 To operate the electric glass sun‐ 5 Interior lights 184

roof 106
3 Front passenger airbag indicator

light 189
46
Sensors in the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment Camera behind the windscreen

a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐
Overview The camera is located near the interior mirror.
Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐

eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle:
Exterior mirror cameras
▷ Front camera.
▷ Camera behind the windscreen.
▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
▷ Reversing Assist Camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Side radar sensors, front.
▷ Side radar sensors, rear.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers. A camera is located under each exterior mirror
▷ Side ultrasonic sensors. housing.
Cameras Reversing Assist Camera
Front camera
The camera is located in the badge at the rear

end.
The front camera is in the area shown.
47
CONTROLS Sensors in the vehicle
Functional requirement of the Radar sensors

cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear. Front radar sensor
▷ Washing the vehicle, see page 373.
▷ Vehicle care, see page 374.
System limits of the cameras

The function of the cameras can be restricted or
may indicate something wrong, for example in
the following situations:
▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
The radar sensor is located in the area shown.
▷ On steep crests or dips or on tight bends.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered, for
example by a fogged up windscreen or labels. Side radar sensors, front
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ With open doors or open luggage compart‐
ment.
▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or strong
reflections, for example if the sun is low in the
sky.
▷ In the dark.
▷ The camera has overheated due to excessive The radar sensors are located in the areas
temperatures and temporarily turned off. shown.
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐
diately after vehicle delivery. Side radar sensors, rear
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
The radar sensors are located in the areas

shown.
48
Sensors in the vehicle CONTROLS
Functional requirement of the radar Ultrasonic sensors

sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and Ultrasonic sensors, front
clear.
▷ Washing the vehicle, see page 373.
System limits of the radar sensors

The function of the radar sensors can be restric‐
ted or not available, for example in the following
situations:
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assistance
▷ If the sensors are contaminated.
systems are located in the area shown.
▷ In case of iced up sensors.
▷ If the sensors are obscured, for example by
stickers, foils or a number plate holder. Ultrasonic sensors, rear
▷ If the sensors are misaligned, for example due
to parking damage.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov‐
ered, for example by protruding loads.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov‐
ered, for example by garage walls, hedges,
snow hills, vehicles or trailers.
▷ After work performed incorrectly on the vehi‐
cle paintwork near to the sensors. The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assistance
▷ At steep crests or hollows of hills. systems are located in the area shown.
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
Side ultrasonic sensors
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assistance

systems are located on the sides of the vehicle in
the area shown.
49
CONTROLS Sensors in the vehicle
Functional requirement of the ▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for

ultrasonic sensors example fences.
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean and ▷ Objects with porous surfaces.
clear. ▷ Small and low objects such as boxes.
For further information: ▷ Low objects already displayed, for example,
▷ Washing the vehicle, see page 373. kerbs, can be outside of the detection ranges
of the sensors.
▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam.
System limits of the ultrasonic ▷ Plants or shrubs.
sensors ▷ In washing bays and car washes.
The physical limits of ultrasound measurement ▷ On uneven surfaces, for example speed
may be reached when detecting objects in situa‐ bumps.
tions involving the following, for example: ▷ In the presence of dense exhaust fumes.
▷ If the sensors are contaminated. ▷ The ultrasonic sensors do not take into ac‐
▷ If the sensors are obscured, for example by count loads projecting beyond the outline of
stickers. the vehicle.
▷ If the sensors are misaligned, for example due ▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor‐
to parking damage. rectly seated.
▷ After work performed incorrectly on the vehi‐ A Check Control message may be displayed if
cle paintwork near to the sensors. the system limits are reached.
▷ Small children and animals.
▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing, for
example a coat.
▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the driv‐
ing lane.
▷ If there is external interference with the ultra‐
sonic sound, for example by passing vehicles,
loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.
▷ Certain weather conditions; for example, high
humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ Trailer drawbars and tow hitches of other ve‐
hicles.
▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ Moving objects.
▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro‐
jecting walls.
▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth sur‐
faces.
50
Vehicle operating condition CONTROLS
Vehicle operating condition

Vehicle equipment ▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
This chapter describes equipment, systems and upward or downward gradients.
functions which are offered or will be offered on ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ or downward gradients, for example with a
ded in the vehicle in question. chock.
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
General can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example by
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one the following actions:
of the three states: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Rest state. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Standby state. ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
▷ Drive-ready state. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
Rest state There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
Principle key with you and lock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off.
General Establishing the rest state

The vehicle is in rest state before you open it automatically
from outside and once you have left the vehicle The rest state is established automatically, for
and locked it. example in the following situations:
▷ After a few minutes, if no operation is per‐
Safety notes formed on the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle battery state of charge is
WARNING low.
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ ▷ Depending on the iDrive setting: one or both
ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before of the front doors is opened when leaving the
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from vehicle after a journey.
rolling away. In some situations, for example during a tele‐
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ phone call or when the low-beam headlight is
cle is secured against rolling away: switched on, the vehicle will not switch automati‐
cally to rest state.
51
CONTROLS Vehicle operating condition
Establishing rest state on opening the With button on the radio

front doors Press the button on the radio.
After a trip, the rest state can be established by The control display and instru‐
opening the front doors. For this purpose, all ment cluster illuminate.
passengers must exit the vehicle.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" With the Start/Stop button
3. "Doors and windows" Press the Start/Stop button. The
4. "Lock/unlock" control display and instrument
5. "Standby mode when doors opened" cluster illuminate.
Establishing the rest state manually

To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end of
the journey:
OFF is shown in the instrument
Press and hold the button on the
cluster. The drivetrain is switched
radio until the OFF display on the
off and standby state switched
instrument cluster turns off.
on.
Standby state Drive-ready state

General
Principle
When standby state is activated, most functions Drive-ready state is turned on or
can be operated while the vehicle is still station‐ off with the Start/Stop button.
ary. Any desired settings can be performed.
General
An active drive-ready state is the same as the
The vehicle switches to standby state after the
engine running in conventional vehicles.
front doors are opened from the outside.
Deactivating drive-ready state is the same as
To preserve vehicle battery, use the standby
switching off the engine.
state and activated power consumers only as
long as absolutely necessary. If the drive-ready state is turned
on, the vehicle ready to drive and
Manual standby state READY is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
General
All systems are operational.
The standby state can be switched on again af‐
ter the rest state has been automatically estab‐
lished.
52
Vehicle operating condition CONTROLS
To save vehicle battery power, switch off drive- There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
ready state and any unnecessary power con‐ leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
sumers when parking the vehicle. cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Safety notes
NOTE
WARNING
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
When driving using electric power, pedestrians
gaged when standby state is switched off.
and other road-users might not become aware
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
of the vehicle as they normally would due to the
switch off standby state in car washes.
lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
tively if the situation warrants it.
Switching on drive-ready state
2. Press the brake.
WARNING 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before instrument cluster illuminate for varying
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from lengths of time.
rolling away. READY is displayed in the instrument cluster
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ and an acoustic signal sounds.
cle is secured against rolling away: Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on Switching off drive-ready state
upward or downward gradients. After stopping:
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
1. Press the brake and engage selector lever
or downward gradients, for example with a
position P.
chock.
2. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING The READY display is no longer illuminated
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle and an acoustic signal is heard.
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Drive-ready state is automatically switched off if
themselves or other road users, for example by the driver's door is opened while driver's seat
the following actions: belt is unfastened.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
53
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Main menu
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Overview

Operating concept
Principle Menu
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A filter
ment system and includes a large number of
for "All apps" and "Vehicle apps" can be selec‐
functions.
ted. In the area "All apps", all apps and functions
are displayed. In the area "Vehicle apps", only
General functions for vehicle settings are filtered. The last
These functions can be operated as follows: selected filter is stored. If necessary, change to
▷ Via the Controller. the area "All apps" to display all apps and func‐
tions.
▷ Via the touchscreen.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. Media
▷ Via buttons on the steering wheel Access to functions of the entertainment sys‐
Instrument cluster, see page 153. tem, for example radio stations or connection
with external devices.
Safety note
Telephone
WARNING Access to the telephone and message func‐
tion as well as the connection and management
Operating integrated information systems and of mobile devices, for example smartphones.
communication devices during a journey may
distract you from the road. You could lose con‐
Navigation
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐ Access to navigation system, destination en‐
fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐ try and traffic information. Configurable map
sary and operate the systems or devices with views as well as other functions, for example
the vehicle at a standstill. points of interest.
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Apple CarPlay Icon Meaning

With connected function: access to Apple
Connected Music.
CarPlay. Apple CarPlay allows certain functions
of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used se‐ Apple CarPlay.
curely via iDrive.
Android Auto.
Android Auto
With connected function: access to Android Status information notifications
Auto. Android Auto enables certain functions of a
compatible Android smartphone to be used se‐ Icon Meaning
curely via iDrive. Check Control message.
Widgets Traffic information.
Widgets show real-time information and dynamic Suppress private information.

content, for example the map of the navigation
Do not disturb.
system. The widgets also serve as buttons and
allow jumping to the relevant menu.
Status information Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication, see page 6.
General
The status field is located in the top area of the Other status information
control display. Status information is displayed in
the form of icons. Icon Meaning
Sound output active.

Telephone status information
Sound output deactivated.
Icon Meaning Activation word active.
Active call. BMW ID or driver profile.
Data transfer not possible. Route guidance active.
Signal strength. Quicklist.
SIM card missing. Wireless charging active.
Entertainment status information Digit input and display

Icon Meaning
Letters and numbers
USB audio. Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller, the touchpad, touchscreen or voice
Bluetooth audio.
control.
Smartphone audio.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Icon Function Activating/deactivating pop-ups

Pop-ups are automatically shown on the control
To switch between upper and
display for some functions. Some of these pop-
lower case.
ups can be activated or deactivated.
To enter a space.
1. "MENU"
To switch between languages. 2. "Vehicle apps"
To use voice input. 3. "System settings"
To confirm your digit input. 4. "Pop-ups"

5. Select the desired setting.
Move the entry area to the left or
right.
Shortcuts
Input comparison General
When entering data from a database, for example The iDrive functions can be stored on the short‐
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed cuts and called up directly, for example, radio
down with each character entered and supple‐ stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers
mented if necessary. and menu entries.
Activating/deactivating functions Saving a function

Some menu items are preceded by an icon. Se‐ 1. Select the desired function.
lecting the menu item enables or disables the
2. "Add to shortcuts"
function.
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
Icon Meaning BMW ID or a driver profile.
Function is activated.
Performing a function
Function is deactivated.
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control dis‐
play.
Quick access 2. Tap the desired shortcut.
The quicklist provides access to the shortcuts, The function is carried out immediately. If you
certain settings and app recommendations. have selected a phone number for example, the
Digit input Operation connection will also be established.
Show Swipe from top to bottom on the Deleting shortcuts

quicklist. control display.
Tilt the Controller up. play.
Hide quick‐ Swipe from the bottom up on the 2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
list. control display. 3. "Delete shortcut"
Tilt the Controller down.
56
iDrive CONTROLS
Control display Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Adjusting the brightness

Principle
1. "MENU"
The iDrive functions are shown on the control
2. "Vehicle apps"
display.
3. "Displays"
Safety note 4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
NOTE 6. Confirm the desired setting.
Objects located in front of the control display Depending on the lighting conditions, the bright‐
may slip and damage the control display. There ness control may not be immediately apparent.
is a risk of material damage. Do not place ob‐
jects in front of the control display. System limits
If the control display is exposed to very high tem‐
peratures, for example because of strong sun‐
Overview light, the brightness may be reduced and the
control display may even switch itself off. Normal
functions will be restored when the temperature
is reduced, for example by shading or using the
air conditioning system.
Controller
General
Control display The buttons can be used to call up menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
Switching on/off automatically menu items and perform settings.
The control display is switched on automatically Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the ated with the touchpad of the Controller.
control display is required for operation.
In certain situations, the control display is Overview
switched off automatically, for example if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The control display can be turned off manually.
play.
2. "Screen off"
Controller
57
CONTROLS iDrive
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
To go to the main menu.
To go to the Media/Radio menu.
▷ Tilt in four directions to change between dis‐

To go to the Telephone menu.
play ranges, for example.
To go to the navigation map.
To go to the destination entry menu of

the navigation system.
Go to previous display area.
To go to the Options menu.

Operation using the Controller
Operation Accessing the main menu

▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ Press the button.
ample.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting menu items

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Selecting widgets
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. 1. In the main menu, tilt the Controller to the
right.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
selected.
3. Press the Controller.
58
iDrive CONTROLS
Changing between display areas Operation by touchpad

After a menu item has been selected, for exam‐
ple "System settings", a new display area will be
General
displayed.
Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
ated with the touchpad of the Controller.
The current display area closes and the previ‐
ous display area is shown. Selecting functions
1. "MENU"
▷ Press the button. 2. "Vehicle apps"
The previous display area re-opens. 3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Entering letters and numbers
Digit input
1. Turn the Controller: to select letters or num‐
bers. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
control display.
2. : to confirm your digit input.
▷ Always enter associated characters, for ex‐
Set system language, see page 63.
ample accents or dots, so that the letter can
be clearly identified.
Deleting
▷ The input options depend on the set lan‐
guage. You may need to enter special char‐
Icon Function
acters using the Controller.
Press Controller: to delete a letter or Set system language, see page 63.
number.
Press and hold the Controller: to delete Entering special characters

all letters or numbers.
Function Operation
Using alphabetical lists To delete a char‐ Swipe to the left on the

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, acter. touchpad.
the letters for which entries exist can be dis‐ To enter a space. From the centre of the
played in a letter field. touchpad, swipe to the
1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or right. right.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. To enter a hy‐ At the top of the touchpad,
The first entry for the selected letter is dis‐ phen. swipe to the right.
played in the list. To enter an un‐ At the bottom of the
derscore. touchpad, swipe to the
right.
59
CONTROLS iDrive
Using the map ▷ Tap the icon.

The navigation system's map can be moved us‐ A new widget can be selected.
ing the touchpad. Tap the map on the control ▷ Tap the icon.
display and then continue the operation using The widget is deleted.
the touchpad.
▷ Press and hold the widget and drag to the
Function Operation left or right.
To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate The widget is moved to the desired posi‐
direction. tion.
To display the Tap once.

Go to Context menu
menu.
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
Using alphabetical lists Press and hold the desired menu item.
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries per‐
The menu consists of various areas, such as:
mit a direct jump to letters for which an entry ex‐
ists. ▷ "Help": go to the Integrated Owner's
Handbook.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
▷ "Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in
shortcut.
the list.

Operation by touchscreen
Digit input
1. Tap icon or touchscreen if necessary.
General
2. Enter the required letters and numbers.
The control display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Deleting
It is possible to tap menu items and widgets.
Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not
Icon Function
use any objects.
Tap icon: to delete a letter or number.
Calling up the main menu Press and hold the icon: delete all letters
Tap the symbol. or numbers.
The main menu is displayed.
Using the map
Adapting widgets The navigation map can be moved using the
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It is touchscreen.
only possible to make adaptations with the vehi‐
cle at a standstill.
1. If necessary, tap the icon.

2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
60
iDrive CONTROLS
Function Operation ▷ Commands and numbers should be spoken

fluently, with the usual emphasis and at a nor‐
To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate mal volume and speed.
direction.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spoken.
To zoom in/out on Pinch together or move
the map. apart your fingers. Operating requirements
To display the Tap once. ▷ A system language that is supported by the
menu. Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Set system language, see page 63.
Using alphabetical lists ▷ Always say commands in the configured sys‐
tem language.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which entries exist can be dis‐ For the full range of functions, the following func‐
played in a letter field. tions should be activated, set or booked:
▷ Online speech processing, see page 64.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
▷ All settings under
A letter box is displayed.
Data protection, see page 70.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
▷ Activation word, see page 62.
The first entry for the selected letter is dis‐
played in the list. ▷ BMW ID or a driver profile.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services via the
ConnectedDrive Store.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant Activating voice input
General
Principle
Voice input can be activated in various ways:
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a per‐
sonal assistant that enables natural voice control
of various vehicle functions. The Personal Assis‐ ▷ Press the button on the steering
tant simplifies the operation of the vehicle with wheel briefly.
the automation of processes and routines.
The microphone on the driver's side is active.
▷ Say the activation word.
General
The microphones on the driver's or front pas‐
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail‐
senger's side are active with the following
able depending on the national-market ver‐
voice control, depending on where the activa‐
sion.
tion word was spoken.
▷ The system includes special microphones on
Then say the command. The activation word and
the driver's side and the passenger's side.
the command can be spoken without pause in
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. Speaking one sentence.
directly into the microphone does not im‐
prove the speech recognition.
61
CONTROLS iDrive
Button on the steering wheel Activation word from third-party providers

Depending on the national-market version, some
third-party providers provide digital voice assis‐
1. Press the button briefly.
tants, for example, Siri, Amazon Alexa or Google
2. Say the command. Assistant.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
Activation word connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addition
to the preset or personal activation word, the ac‐
General
tivation word of voice assistants from connected
Saying the activation word starts the Personal third-party providers can be used.
Assistant. The Personal Assistant listens.
1. "MENU"
Preset activation word 2. "Vehicle apps"
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can be 3. "System settings"
activated and deactivated. 4. "Third-party providers"
1. "MENU" 5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "System settings"
Cancelling voice input
4. "Personal Assistant"
5. "Activation word" ▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
6. ""Hello BMW""
▷ ›Cancel‹
Personal activation word ▷ Tilt the controller to the right or left.
In addition to the preset activation word, a per‐ ▷ Press the Controller.
sonal activation word can be set up with an ac‐
tive BMW ID or a driver profile. The personal acti‐ Possible commands
vation word can also be changed or deleted.
The activation word should consist of multiple General
syllables to ensure good detection. An addition, Most of the contents on the control display, for
such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary. example menu items and list entries, can be said
1. "MENU" as commands. Say list entries as shown.
2. "Vehicle apps" Instructions can be issued or questions can be
asked where the Personal Assistant provides
support.
5. "Activation word" Vehicle status and vehicle functions
6. "Personal activation word" ▷ ›Is my tyre pressure still OK?‹
7. "Set" ▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹
8. "Start recording" ▷ ›Open Owner's Handbook.‹
62
iDrive CONTROLS
Navigation Menu items

▷ ›Drive me to 1 High Street in Manchester.‹ Say the commands of the menu items as they
▷ ›Take me home.‹ are selected via the control display.
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹ 1. Activate the voice input.
2. ›Media‹
Communication 3. ›Saved stations‹
For example, when a mobile phone is connected,
The saved stations are displayed on the con‐
calls can be started or SMS can be sent.
trol display.
▷ ›Call John Smith on the mobile phone.‹
▷ ›Dial the number 0370 505 0160.‹ Help for voice control
▷ ›New text message to John Smith: I'm on my ▷ ›Voice commands;Sample commands‹: to
way.‹ have voice command options read aloud.
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
Entertainment information on the operating principle of the
▷ ›What song is this?‹ voice control announced.
▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley.‹ ▷ ›Help‹: have tips and example commands for
▷ ›Next track.‹ voice control announced.
▷ Additional example commands for the current
Air conditioning context are displayed in the widget of the
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ ›Turn off air conditioning.‹
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹
Settings
▷ ›I'm cold.‹
Setting the system language
Windows and light 1. "MENU"
▷ ›Open [the] windows automatically.‹
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ ›Activate the automatic driving lights.‹
Owner's Handbook by voice control 4. "Language"
It is possible to ask simple questions about the 5. Select the desired setting.
vehicle functions and about operating the vehi‐
cle. Setting the response length
The voice control system and the feedback it You can set the Personal Assistant to use the
provides are not a substitute for the printed or standard dialogue or a short version. In case of
integrated Owner's Handbook. The speech rec‐ the short version, the announcements by the
ognition function and the quality of the feedback Personal Assistant are played back in an abbrevi‐
may vary. ated version.
›How do you disable the front passenger airbag?‹ 1. "MENU"

The Personal Assistant gives a response. Where 2. "Vehicle apps"
applicable, the section of the integrated Owner's 3. "System settings"
Handbook is displayed on the control display if
the vehicle is at standstill.
63
CONTROLS iDrive
5. "Response length" The device must be connected via Apple Car‐

6. Select the desired setting. Play or Android Auto.
Saying during voice output

1. Press and hold the button on the
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Personal Assistant. The function can be deacti‐
The voice control of the smartphone is acti‐
vated if the feedback is frequently cancelled in‐
vated.
advertently, for example due to background
noise or conversations in the vehicle. If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the control display.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
wheel to cancel the voice control of the
4. "Personal Assistant" smartphone.
5. "Speaking during voice output"
Automating habits
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality General
of the speech recognition and search results for The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
points of interest. To use the function, data is for example, the automatic opening of windows
sent across an encrypted connection to a service at the same place. This involves creating rules
provider where it is then stored. that can be activated and deactivated at any
time.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Activating/deactivating routines
3. "System settings" 1. "MENU"
4. "Personal Assistant" 2. "All apps"
5. "Online speech processing" 3. "Automate habits"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume control button during the spo‐
System limits
ken instructions until the desired volume is ob‐
tained. ▷ The Personal Assistant provides information
about vehicle functions that may not be in‐
The volume setting is retained even if you
stalled in the vehicle.
change the volume of other audio sources.
This also applies to safety-relevant functions
and systems.
Using the voice control of the
smartphone ▷ Certain noises may be detected and could
cause problems. Keep doors and windows
Depending on the device, a smartphone connec‐ closed.
ted to the vehicle can be operated via voice in‐
put. ▷ Noises from the front passenger or other
passengers can impair the system. Avoid
64
iDrive CONTROLS
background noise in the vehicle while you are

speaking.
▷ Strong dialects may prevent speech recogni‐
tion from working properly.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re‐
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
65
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle equipment There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software ▷ Mobile reception.
Upgrade ▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre‐

sponding data was given in the Data Protec‐
tion menu.
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐ Search for an upgrade
date the entire software of the vehicle. This The standby state must be turned on to search
makes new functions, functional enhancements for a software upgrade.
or quality improvements available.
Automatic search
General
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the
BMW recommends carrying out the Remote background.
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes avail‐
able. Manual search
1. "MENU"
Safety note
2. "All apps"
WARNING
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger 5. "Search for upgrades"
themselves or other road users, for example by 6. Follow the instructions on the control display.
the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software Up‐
grade is automatically downloaded to the vehicle.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment. There is no need to consent to the download.
66
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Via BMW app Displaying information

If an upgrade is available, information about the Display in the vehicle:
new software version is displayed in the BMW
1. "MENU"
app.
2. "All apps"
The data for the upgrade can then be downloa‐
ded to a mobile device, for example via an exist‐ 3. "System settings"
ing Wi-Fi connection. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
The data can then be transferred from the mo‐ 5. ▷ Display currently installed version:
bile device to the vehicle. "Installed version:"
This transmission method accelerates the down‐ ▷ Display new available version:
load of the data, for example in areas with limited
mobile network availability. "Info on version"
6. Follow the instructions on the control display.
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to
the smartphone. Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal
on the Internet:
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app.
www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
3. Establish the connection to the vehicle.
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WLAN. Installing the upgrade
▷ Android: connect Bluetooth® audio and
WLAN. General
The data transfer of the upgrade from the ▷ Installing the upgrade may cause software
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the modifications not made by the vehicle manu‐
background only while driving. facturer to be deleted (increases in perform‐
4. Follow the instructions on the control display. ance, for example).
For further information: ▷ Modifications to the on-board power supply
of the vehicle, for example to control units
Connect mobile devices to the vehicle, see
that have not been made by the manufac‐
page 75.
turer of the vehicle, can cause the installation
to malfunction.
Version information
▷ Installation can take around 20 minutes.
General ▷ Installation cannot be interrupted.
The version information describes the updates ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during installa‐
contained in the Remote Software Upgrade. The tion.
version information can be shown on the control ▷ You may leave the vehicle during installation.
display during the download and following suc‐ ▷ The installation does not occur until the con‐
cessful completion of the installation. sent was given.
This information is also available in the Connect‐ ▷ The vehicle charging process is interrupted
edDrive customer portal. by the installation.
▷ Following the successful installation, charging
the vehicle may not continue automatically.
67
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Prerequisites for the installation 3. "System settings"

▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ Outside temperature is above -10 ℃/14 ℉. 5. "Start upgrade now"
▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground. 6. Follow the instructions on the control display.
▷ Hazard warning lights are turned off.
Installing with timer
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
At the end of the journey, a timer can be used to
▷ Drive-ready state is turned off.
install the upgrade automatically at a configured
If applicable, follow the notes for further prerequi‐ time, for example, during the night. A later instal‐
sites on the control display. lation may make sense to meet functional re‐
If the prerequisites are not met, for example a quirements, for example, a sufficiently charged
sufficient vehicle battery charge state, the up‐ vehicle battery.
grade will not be offered for installation.
1. "MENU"
Pay attention to an offer for installation, for exam‐
2. "All apps"
ple after extended charging of the battery.
Preparing the vehicle 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public 5. Enter the desired timer settings.
road. The installation starts automatically when:
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured ▷ All prerequisites for the installation have been
so that a fault message can be sent to the ve‐ established correctly.
hicle manufacturer, for example if the installa‐
▷ All prerequisites continue to be met at the
tion is terminated.
time of installation.
▷ Close the windows.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
▷ Close the glass sunroof. state is turned on.
▷ Closing the luggage compartment
▷ Remove devices that consume energy, for Functional limitations
example mobile phone. During the upgrade, many of the functions are
▷ Disconnect the trailer or load carrier. temporarily unavailable, for example:
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐ ▷ Hazard warning lights.
cle for the consent for installation. ▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
▷ Switch off the exterior lights. Comfort Access.
▷ Remove connected devices from the OBD ▷ Side lights.
socket. ▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
Install immediately
▷ Emergency call.
The upgrade can be installed immediately when
▷ Electric windows.
all prerequisites have been met.
▷ Glass sunroof.
1. "MENU"
▷ Operating the tailgate or boot lid.
2. "All apps"
▷ Locking the tailgate.
68
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
The driver's door can be unlocked and locked

from outside with the integrated key.
After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services, for example, RTTI or Remote
Services, will be reactivated automatically during
the next trip.
After a longer stationary period, recharge the ve‐
hicle battery with the charging cable if necessary.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the control display or in the BMW app.
If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact a
Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
shop.
Validity of Owner's Handbook
Vehicle production
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con‐
tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are up to
date.

est information.
69
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle equipment Deleting personal data in the vehicle
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Principle

functions which are offered or will be offered on Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ data such as saved radio stations. This personal
ded in the vehicle in question. data can be permanently deleted using iDrive.
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. General
Depending on the equipment, the following data
is deleted:
Data protection ▷ BMW IDs or driver profiles.
▷ Saved radio stations.
Data transfer ▷ Stored shortcuts.
▷ Navigation, for example saved destinations.
Principle
▷ Phone book.
The vehicle offers various services which require
data to be transferred to BMW or a service pro‐ ▷ Online data, for example favourites, cookies.
vider. Data transfer can be deactivated for some ▷ Office data, for example voice memos.
services. ▷ Login accounts.
▷ Linking the vehicle with the BMW Cloud.
General
It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete
If data transfer has been deactivated for a serv‐
data.
ice, then that service cannot be used.
Only perform settings with the vehicle at a stand‐ Operating requirements
still.
Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at a
standstill. The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Settings
Data transfer can be configured individually in Deleting data
various stages or for individual services.
Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when the
1. "MENU" vehicle is reset to its factory settings.
2. "Vehicle apps" For further information:
3. "System settings" Reset vehicle data, see page 71.
4. "Data privacy"
70
Personal settings CONTROLS
Resetting vehicle data The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three
driver profiles.
All individual settings can be reset to the factory If a login using the BMW ID does not occur and
settings when drive-ready state is switched off. no driver profile is activated, the vehicle is in the
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle. guest profile.
The login with the BMW ID or the activation of
1. "MENU"
the driver profile can already occur during un‐
2. "Vehicle apps" locking. For this purpose, the driver recognition
3. "System settings" via a vehicle key or a digital key must be as‐
4. "Reset vehicle data" signed to the BMW ID or the driver profile.
5. "Reset vehicle data"

When the stored settings in a BMW ID are
When a BMW ID or driver profile is created,
synchronised with the settings in the BMW
changed, deleted or edited, the vehicle must
Cloud, the settings will remain in the BMW
move at a maximum of walking speed.
Cloud.
The login in the vehicle with a BMW ID and syn‐
chronisation with the BMW Cloud are only possi‐
BMW ID/driver profiles ble when the vehicle has cellular network recep‐
tion.
Principle
Welcome window
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is the
personal login for all relevant offers for the BMW After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
brand. The BMW ID can be used in the vehicle to is shown on the control display. The type of the
store personal vehicle settings. welcome depends on the following prerequisite:
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal ▷ The vehicle does not have a stored BMW ID
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles. or driver profile:
When a person logs in with their BMW ID or the The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
driver profile in the vehicle, the stored settings BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
are activated. ▷ The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro‐
General file:
The BMW ID can be created in the vehicle, via The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW IDs
the BMW app, in the ConnectedDrive portal and or the stored driver profiles are offered for se‐
at the Service Partner. A driver profile is created lection. Additionally, it is possible to add a
in the vehicle. new BMW ID or create a new driver profile.
If a vehicle is used by multiple persons, each per‐ ▷ The vehicle key or the digital key could be as‐
son can activate their own personal settings via signed to a BMW ID or a driver profile:
the BMW ID or via the driver profile. The welcome is personalised, the stored set‐
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW tings are activated. The BMW ID or the driver
ID in the vehicle can be synchronised with the profile can be changed.
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings available As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on or
in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is used the control display is tapped outside of the wel‐
to log in. come window, the welcome will be hidden.
71
Creating a BMW ID 3. Enter the name for the driver profile.

A new BMW ID must be created in the vehicle. 4. Select the desired setting:
"Current settings"
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar. If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set‐
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. "Register now"
Specify the driver detection
4. Scan the QR code shown in the display. The
A driver detection and a PIN can be set up for a
BMW ID is created on the smartphone.
BMW ID or a driver profile.
The driver detection offers the following advan‐
Adding the BMW ID
tages:
Adding an existing BMW ID to the vehicle:
▷ The stored settings are activated automati‐
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the cally.
status bar. ▷ The settings are not accessible to other per‐
2. "Add BMW ID" sons.
3. ▷ "Log in with My BMW App" ▷ The PIN can be used to activate the BMW ID
Scan the displayed QR code to accept or the driver profile, even if the assigned vehi‐
the BMW ID from the BMW app. cle key or the assigned digital key is not avail‐
able.
▷ "Log in with BMW ID"
The driver detection is specified immediately
Enter the login data of the BMW ID.
following the addition of the BMW ID or after cre‐
4. Depending on the national-market version, ating the driver profile.
the following settings can be selected:
▷ "PIN"
▷ "Settings from BMW Cloud"
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud PIN must be created.
are applied.
▷ "Vehicle key"
▷ "Current settings"
The vehicle key that is recognised in the ve‐
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
settings of the guest profile will be ap‐ the driver profile.
plied.
▷ "Digital Key"
▷ "Synchronise BMW ID"
The digital key that is recognised in the vehi‐
Future changes to the settings are cle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or the
synchronised with the BMW Cloud. driver profile.
▷ "Continue"
Automatic driver recognition
Creating a driver profile If driver recognition has been defined, the auto‐
A driver profile must be created. matic activation of the BMW ID or the driver pro‐
file is triggered by the following activities:
status bar.
2. "ADD DRIVER PROFILE"
72
Personal settings CONTROLS
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the assigned 3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
vehicle key button. 4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an outside The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or the the stored settings are loaded.
assigned digital key must be carried.
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching Guest profile
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
The guest profile can be activated and changed
assigned digital key must be carried. De‐
by anyone.
pending on the national-market version, it
may not be possible to recognise the digital The guest profile is automatically active in the
key. following cases:
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys in ▷ A BMW ID has not yet been added or a driver
the vicinity of the vehicle, the activation of the profile has not yet been created.
BMW ID or the driver profile takes place accord‐ ▷ No BMW ID or driver profile has been as‐
ing to the following priority: signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
▷ The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers the that was used to unlock the vehicle.
activation of the assigned BMW ID or the as‐ The following limitations apply to the guest pro‐
signed driver profile. file:
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unassigned ▷ Functions that process personal data are not
key, the guest profile is activated. available to protect sensitive, personal data
▷ If a vehicle key and a digital key are detected from unauthorised access. This includes se‐
at the same time, the digital key triggers the lect functions of the navigation and the saving
activation of the assigned BMW ID or the as‐ of favourites. More information on data pro‐
signed driver profile. cessing is available in the ConnectedDrive
data protection notes / service descriptions.
▷ If another key is detected on the driver's door
after activating the BMW ID or the driver pro‐ ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
file, the BMW ID or the driver profile of the ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest
last key detected is activated. profile.
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as‐ ▷ It is not possible to assign a driver detection
signed to this key, the guest profile is activa‐ to the guest profile.
ted. ▷ In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni‐
sation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile The guest profile is selected in the welcome win‐
If detection was not possible while unlocking the dow or via iDrive:
vehicle, the BMW ID or driver profile is selected
on the welcome window. 1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed at
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"
any time via iDrive:
▷ Switch the driver profile.
status bar. 3. "Continue as guest"
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID"

▷ Switch the driver profile.
73
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile ▷ The synchronisation with the BMW Cloud.
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the ▷ The personal salutation.
status bar. The following settings are available for the driver
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID" profile:
▷ Switch the driver profile. ▷ The type of driver detection.
3. Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or the ▷ The profile picture.
desired driver profile. ▷ The profile name.
If the BMW ID was synchronised with the BMW
Cloud, the stored data in the BMW Cloud will be Selecting a profile picture
retained. The profile picture can be selected from the pre‐
After the deletion, the guest profile will be activa‐ defined profile pictures.
ted. The personal profile picture from the BMW
Cloud can be applied to a BMW ID. This requires
Transfer of the vehicle key that the synchronisation with the BMW Cloud is
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or a activated in the settings. After the profile picture
driver profile can be used to view or change the from the BMW Cloud has been applied, a selec‐
stored personal settings. tion from the predefined pictures is only possible
if the profile picture in the BMW Cloud is deleted.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per‐
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
cancelled. Changes to the driver detection can System limits
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or the
driver profile. digital key may not always be possible, for exam‐
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to ple in the following cases:
transfer a digital key to permit other persons the ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle at the outside
use of your own vehicle. door handle.
For further information: ▷ If there is a change of driver without the vehi‐
BMW Digital Key, see page 96. cle being locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digital
Settings keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver pro‐
file are located in the outer area on the driv‐
General er's side of the vehicle.
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or creat‐ ▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
ing a driver profile can be changed. BMW app.
The use of personal settings that are stored for a
1. Tap the icon or personal picture in the BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to technical
status bar. limitations. For example, there may be stored
2. "Settings" settings for a system that is not available in other
The following settings are available for the BMW vehicles, or only in an incompatible version.
ID:
▷ The type of driver detection.
▷ The profile picture.
74
Connections CONTROLS
Connections
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle General
The vehicle offers various types of connections The following list shows possible functions and
for using mobile devices. Which connection type the appropriate connection types for them. The
to select depends on the mobile device and the range of functions depends on the vehicle equip‐
function you wish to use. ment and the mobile device.
Function Connection type Icon on the control

display
Making calls using the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth.

tem.
Operating telephone functions via
iDrive or by voice control.
Other functions, for example managing
contacts or texting.
Playing music from the smartphone or Bluetooth audio.

audio system.
Internet: Internet via WiFi.

Use Internet access via the personal
hotspot.
Apple CarPlay: Apple CarPlay via Bluetooth and WiFi.

Operating iOS apps via iDrive and by
voice control.
Android Auto: Android Auto via Bluetooth and WiFi.

Operating Android apps via iDrive and
by voice control.
USB port: USB.

Playing music from a USB device.
75
CONTROLS Connections
Paired devices are then automatically recognised Displaying the device list
and connected to the vehicle.
All devices paired or connected to the vehicle are
Safety note
A maximum of four devices can be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth and ten devices via
WARNING WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices can be detec‐
Operating integrated information systems and ted.
communication devices during a journey may 1. "MENU"
distract you from the road. You could lose con‐
2. "All apps"
Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐ 3. "Device manager"
fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐ Icons to the right of the device name indicate for
sary and operate the systems or devices with which function the device can be used.
the vehicle at a standstill. Tap the desired icon to activate a function.
Icon Meaning
Compatible devices
Telephone.
General Bluetooth audio.

Information on compatible mobile devices is Apple CarPlay.
available as follows:
Android Auto.
▷ On the BMW homepage.
▷ Via the hotline/customer support.
Configuring the device
▷ A Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist Functions can be activated or deactivated on a
workshop. paired or connected device.
The range of functions depends on the mobile
device.
Managing mobile devices Observe the information on the control display.
1. "MENU"
General
2. "All apps"
▷ Following one-off pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically detected and connected again 3. "Device manager"
when standby state is switched on. 4. Select the required device.
▷ The data saved on the SIM card or in the mo‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
bile phone – for example, contacts – is trans‐
ferred to the vehicle following detection and Telephone priority
can be used via iDrive.
If several mobile phones are connected to the
▷ For some mobile devices, certain settings are vehicle, it is possible to define priorities for them.
necessary directly on the device, for example, The mobile phone with the highest priority is
authorisation, see the operating instructions
of the device.
76
preferably used, for example for outgoing calls the display of the mobile phone and confirm
and messages. that they match.
1. "MENU" 7. If necessary, select the connection mode:

"Use Bluetooth"
2. "All apps"
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
3. "Device manager"
and displayed in the device list.
4. "Settings"
5. "Telephone priorities" Frequently Asked Questions
6. Select the required device. For the mobile device to work correctly, all condi‐
7. Move to select the desired priority. tions need to be met and all the necessary steps
need to be carried out in the correct order. Even
when this is done, however, there may still be in‐
Bluetooth connection stances where the mobile device does not func‐
tion as expected.
Operating requirements In such cases, the following explanations may

provide assistance:
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.
Why was it not possible to pair or connect the
Compatible devices, see page 76. mobile phone?
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle for the Blue‐ ▷ Too many Bluetooth devices are paired to
tooth® telephony. the mobile phone or the vehicle.
▷ The device is operational. In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connection
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and with other devices.
switched on in the vehicle. Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
▷ The control display indicates that the system vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
is ready for pairing. device search.
▷ The device may require certain Bluetooth de‐ Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
fault settings, for example visibility; see the function are paired.
operating instructions of the device. ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
the battery is low.
Connecting a device Charge the mobile phone and deactivate
1. "MENU" power-save mode if necessary.
2. "All apps" Why does the mobile phone no longer respond?
3. "Device manager" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone are no
4. "Connect new device" longer functioning.
Mobile phones in range are displayed on the Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
control display. ▷ Ambient temperature too high or too low to
5. Select the required mobile phone operate the mobile phone.
6. Compare the control number displayed on Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
the control display with the control number in ambient conditions.
77
Why is it not possible to operate the telephone If all the points on the list have been reviewed
functions via iDrive? and the desired function cannot be performed,
▷ No telephone functions are configured for the contact the Hotline, a Service Partner of the
mobile phone. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner
or a specialist workshop.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone function.
Why are no phone book entries, not all entries or Vehicle WiFi
incomplete entries being displayed?
▷ The transfer of the phone book entries is not General
yet completed.
The vehicle WiFi can be used for data exchange
▷ It's possible that only the phone book entries between mobile devices and the vehicle.
from the mobile phone or the SIM card have
been transferred.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
▷ Standby state is switched on.
entries containing special characters.
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
▷ It may not be possible to transfer contacts
terface.
from social networks.
▷ The BMW app is installed on the mobile de‐
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
vice.
transferred is too high.
▷ The volume of data for a particular contact is
Activating vehicle WiFi
too large, for example due to saved informa‐
tion such as memos. 1. "MENU"
Reduce the data volume for the contact. 2. "All apps"
▷ The mobile phone has only been connected 3. "Wi-Fi connections"

as an audio source. 4. "Settings"
Configure the mobile phone and connect it to 5. Activate WiFi.
the telephone function.
▷ A contact was created in the telephone con‐ Connecting a mobile device
tact list after the last synchronisation. 1. "MENU"
Re-synchronise the contacts: "Reload 2. "All apps"
contacts"
3. "Wi-Fi connections"
How can the telephone connection quality be
improved?
5. To pair a mobile device to the vehicle WiFi:
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone; the procedure varies de‐ ▷ Scan the QR code shown in the display.
pending on the mobile phone. ▷ Enter the displayed login data on the mo‐
▷ Insert the mobile phone in the wireless charg‐ bile end device.
ing tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
rately in the sound settings.
78
Personal eSIM Personal eSIM login

Before the Personal eSIM is used in the vehicle,
it is necessary to log in with it once.
Principle
The Personal eSIM is a digital SIM card that is 1. Log in to the vehicle with the desired BMW
permanently installed in the vehicle. ID.
The Personal eSIM enables making phone calls 2. "MENU"
or the use of mobile data without having a mobile 3. "All apps"
phone in the vehicle. 4. "Device manager"
5. "PERSONAL eSIM"
General
Depending on the country of registration and
If necessary, scan the displayed QR code
service provider, the Personal eSIM may not be
with a smartphone and start the activation.
available. Information on availability can be found
online, on the BMW website or in the BMW app. 7. Follow the instructions on the smartphone
and, if applicable, on the control display.
The use of the mobile radio aerials in the vehicle
improves the call quality and the reception of Alternatively, it is also possible to log in with the
mobile data. Personal eSIM once via the BMW app.
The Personal eSIM can be used for the following
functions: Settings
▷ Making a phone call. It is, for example, possible to specify if the Per‐
sonal eSIM will be used as a telephone or as a
▷ Using the Internet via a personal hotspot. personal hotspot.
It may be necessary to extend a corresponding Roaming can be activated or deactivated for use
mobile phone contract for this purpose. in other countries.
Operating requirements 1. "MENU"

▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract. 2. "All apps"
▷ The service provider supports the function of 3. "Device manager"
the Personal eSIM. 4. "PERSONAL eSIM"
▷ The Personal eSIM is linked to the desired 5. "Settings"
BMW ID. 6. Select the desired settings.
▷ The BMW ID is entered in the vehicle, driver
identification is defined and synchronisation Linking a mobile phone to the
is activated. Personal eSIM
▷ The Personal eSIM is logged into the vehicle.
▷ A mobile phone has been linked for the tele‐ General
phone function. By linking the desired mobile phone, its contacts
For further information: in the vehicle can be used.
BMW ID, see page 71
79
Linking a phone 3. "Personal Hotspot"

1. "MENU" 4. "Connect new device"
2. "All apps" 5. "Activate internet access"
3. "Device manager" 6. Logging the desired mobile device into the
4. "Personal eSIM" personal hotspot:
5. To activate the eSIM telephone function: ▷ Scan the QR code shown in the display.
"Telephone functions via eSIM" ▷ Enter the displayed login data on the mo‐
bile end device.
6. "Link telephone"
All devices connected via the hotspot use the
7. link the desired phone. data volume of the Personal eSIM.
For further information, see the integrated Own‐
er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for Activating/deactivating Internet usage
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for example.
Personal hotspot 1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Principle 3. "Personal Hotspot"
Compatible devices with WLAN interface can 4. "Settings"
use the Internet connection with the data volume
5. "Internet access for mobile devices"
of the Personal eSIM via the personal hotspot.
General
Up to ten devices can be connected to the per‐ Apple CarPlay© preparation
sonal hotspot simultaneously.
Operating requirements Principle

CarPlay enables selected functions of a compati‐
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
ble Apple iPhone to be operated by Siri voice
terface.
control and iDrive.
Compatible devices, see page 76.
▷ The Personal eSIM is set up and active. Operating requirements
▷ The mobile data setting for the Personal ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
eSIM has been activated. iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle. Compatible devices, see page 76.
▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice control are
Activating the personal hotspot and activated on the iPhone.
connecting the device ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
1. "MENU" activated on the iPhone.
2. "All apps" ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐
hicle.
80
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay ▷ Change the connection type of the already
connected device, for example using as tele‐
1. "MENU"
phone.
2. "All apps"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
3. "Device manager" list.
4. "Connect new device" ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
Mobile phones in range are displayed on the from the list of saved connections under
control display. Bluetooth and under WLAN.
5. Select the desired mobile phone on the con‐ ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
trol display or the Bluetooth® name of the If the steps listed have been carried out and the
vehicle on the display of the mobile phone. desired function still cannot be performed: con‐
6. Compare the control number displayed on tact the hotline, a Service Partner of the manu‐
the control display with the control number in facturer, another qualified Service Partner or a
the display of the mobile phone and confirm specialist workshop.
that they match.
7. Select CarPlay as the connection mode:
"Use Apple CarPlay"
Android Auto© preparation
of the smartphone.
Principle
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ Android Auto enables selected functions of a
played in the device list. compatible smartphone to be operated by Goo‐
gle Assistant voice control and iDrive.
Operation
er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for ▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication. or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an
Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐
less of the manufacturer.
Frequently Asked Questions
▷ Compatible devices, see page 76.
For the mobile device to work correctly, all condi‐
tions need to be met and all the necessary steps ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
need to be carried out in the correct order. Even ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are activated on the
when this is done, however, there may still be in‐ smartphone.
stances where the mobile device does not func‐ ▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi
tion as expected. connection.
In such cases, the following explanations may ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
provide assistance: activated on the smartphone.
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐
CarPlay. When a new connection setup is estab‐ hicle.
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
81
Pairing the smartphone with Android ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the
Auto device list.
1. "MENU" ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐

cerned from the list of saved connections un‐
2. "All apps" der Bluetooth and under WLAN.
3. "Device manager" ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.
4. "Connect new device" If the steps listed have been carried out and the
Mobile phones in range are displayed on the desired function still cannot be performed: con‐
control display. tact the hotline, a Service Partner of the manu‐
5. Select the required mobile phone. facturer, another qualified Service Partner or a
the control display with the control number in
the display of the mobile phone and confirm
that they match.
USB connection
7. Select Android Auto as the connection mode:
Principle
"Use Android Auto"
USB ports with data transfer can be used to play
music files.
of the smartphone.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and General
The following mobile devices can be connected
to the USB port with data transfer:
Operation
▷ Mobile phones.
er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for ▷ Audio devices.
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication. ▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. Formats
Frequently Asked Questions FAT32 and exFAT are recommended.
For the mobile device to work correctly, all condi‐ A connected USB device is charged via the USB
tions need to be met and all the necessary steps port if the device supports this. Pay attention to
need to be carried out in the correct order. Even the maximum charge current of the USB port.
when this is done, however, there may still be in‐ For further information:
stances where the mobile device does not func‐
tion as expected. USB port, see page 284.
In such cases, the following explanations may

provide assistance:
Compatible device with USB port.
The smartphone has already been paired with
Android Auto. When a new connection setup is For further information:
established, Android Auto can no longer be se‐ Compatible devices, see page 76.
lected.
Connecting a device
Connect the USB device to a USB port using a
suitable adapter cable.
82
When connecting, bear the following in mind:

▷ Do not use force when inserting the connec‐
tor into the USB port.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device from mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices avail‐
able on the market, it is not possible to guar‐
antee that every device can be operated via
the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose the USB devices to extreme
environmental conditions, for example very
high temperatures; see the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
▷ Due to the large variety of different compres‐
sion techniques, correct playback of the me‐
dia stored on the USB device cannot be
guaranteed in every case.
▷ To ensure correct transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB device from the
12 V power socket in the vehicle when the
device is also connected to the USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may need to be performed on
the USB device; see the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
The connected USB device is displayed on the
control display in the MEDIA menu.
Unsuitable USB devices

▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with several slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
83
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment button cell has been swallowed or is located in
any part of the body.
Overview
Vehicle key
General
The delivery specification includes two vehicle Buttons on the vehicle key.
keys, each containing an integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery. Icon Meaning
Various settings are possible for the button func‐ Unlock.
tions, depending on the equipment and the na‐
tional-market version.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set‐ Lock.
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
Open/close the luggage compartment.
ment, the service data is saved in the vehicle key.
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in,
take it with you whenever you leave the vehicle. Function adjustable:
Home lights, see page 179.
Safety note
Pre-conditioning, see page 280.
WARNING
Additional vehicle keys
The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐
Additional vehicle keys are available from a Serv‐
teries or button cells can be swallowed and
lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours,
for example due to internal burns or chemical
burns. There is a danger of injury or danger to
life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of Loss of vehicle keys
reach of children. Immediately seek medical A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced
help if there is any suspicion that a battery or by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
84
Opening and closing CONTROLS
If a BMW ID or driver profile has been assigned 5. Press the cover back into position and close
to the lost vehicle key, the connection to this ve‐ it.
hicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can 6. Insert the integrated key into the vehicle key
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver profile. until the integrated key engages.
Dispose of old batteries at a Service
Replacing the battery
Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist
NOTE workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐ lecting point.
age the vehicle key. There is a risk of material
damage. Always replace the discharged battery Integrated key
with a battery with the same voltage, the same
size and the same specification.
General
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle With the integrated key, the driver's door can be
key. unlocked without the vehicle key.
2. Position the integrated key under the battery Depending on the national-market version, the
compartment lid, arrow 1, and pry off the lid integrated key fits the glove compartment.
with a lever movement of the integrated key, Depending on the model and equipment, the key
arrow 2. switch for the front passenger airbag can be op‐
erated with the integrated key.
Safety note
WARNING
On some national-market versions, unlocking
from the inside is only possible with special
knowledge.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐
3. Use a pointed object to press the battery in sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods
the direction of the arrow and lift it out. and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a
result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3 V battery with the

positive side facing up.
85
Removing the integrated key Unlocking via the door lock

1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the 1. Pull the door handle outwards with one hand
integrated key, arrow 2. and hold it.
2. Pull off frame from integrated key. 2. Unlock the door lock by turning it anti-clock‐
wise using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked using the

central locking system button or manually from
the inside.
Locking the vehicle from the interior
General
The vehicle can be locked manually from the in‐
side.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key into the vehicle.
86
Overview If this happens, proceed as follows:
1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against

the mark on the steering column. Pay atten‐
tion to the display in the instrument cluster.
2. ▷ If the vehicle key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
▷ If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehicle
Door pin for manual locking of the driver's door. key and repeat the procedure.
Locking the vehicle

Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown where appli‐
cable.
2. Press the door pin in the driver's door down
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the ve‐
from the inside.
hicle key in some conditions, including the
3. Lock rear doors from the inside. following:
4. Open the front passenger door and lock it ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
manually.
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission
5. Close the front passenger door from the out‐ masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐
side. erful signals.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob‐
Alarm system jects.
The activated alarm system is triggered when
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
the door is opened after being unlocked via the
metallic objects.
door lock.
▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile phones
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
or other electronic devices in the immediate
cle is locked with the integrated key.
vicinity of the vehicle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
Emergency detection of the vehicle
electronic devices.
key
▷ Interference with the radio transmission
caused by the charging process of mobile
devices, for example a mobile phone.
▷ The vehicle key is located in the immediate
vicinity of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key somewhere else.
▷ Radio link fault while the vehicle is charging.
If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be un‐
locked and locked from the outside with the
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the integrated key. Use the emergency detection of
vehicle key has not been detected. the vehicle key to turn on the drive-ready state.
87
Access to vehicle interior Actions during unlocking

The behaviour of the vehicle during unlocking
depends on the following settings:
Safety notes
▷ Only the driver's door and the charging
socket flap will be unlocked or all access to
WARNING the vehicle will be unlocked.
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐ ▷ The unlocking of the vehicle can be con‐
side can lock the doors from the inside and lock firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
▷ The welcome light can be turned on when
be opened from the outside. There is a danger
the vehicle is being unlocked.
of injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that
you can open the vehicle from the outside. ▷ After opening a vehicle door, the window can
be lowered more to make it easier to enter
the vehicle.
WARNING The following functions are also carried out:
On some national-market versions, unlocking ▷ If a BMW ID or driver profile was assigned to
from the inside is only possible with special the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver profile
knowledge. will be activated.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐ ▷ The interior lights are switched on unless
sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods they were switched off manually.
and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a ▷ Depending on the equipment, folded exterior
result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside mirrors are folded out.
when there is someone inside it. If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the
button inside the vehicle, they are not folded
out when the vehicle is unlocked.
WARNING ▷ The anti-theft security system is switched off.
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle ▷ The alarm system is switched off.
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example by
the following actions: ▷ For settings, see page 100.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Welcome light, see page 179.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 71.
Actions during locking
The behaviour of the vehicle during locking de‐
pends on the following settings:
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
▷ The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
key with you and lock the vehicle. ▷ Depending on the equipment, the exterior
mirrors can be folded in automatically during
locking. If the hazard warning lights are
88
switched on, the exterior mirrors are not fol‐ Locking the vehicle
ded in. 1. Close the driver's door.
▷ Home lights can be activated during locking.
The following functions are carried out:
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
▷ All the doors, the tailgate and the charging
socket flap are locked.
On the outside door handle
▷ The anti-theft security system is switched on.
This prevents the doors from being unlocked Principle
using the locking buttons or the door han‐
This feature allows you to access the vehicle
dles.
without having to use the vehicle key.
▷ The alarm system is switched on.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
If drive-ready state is still switched on when lock‐ the vehicle.
ing, the vehicle horn sounds twice. If this hap‐
pens, switch off drive-ready state using Start/ General
Stop button.
The function is available with Comfort Access.
For settings, see page 100. Operating requirements
▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, for example, in
With the vehicle key your pants pocket.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
Unlocking the vehicle located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of
Press the button on the vehicle key. the doors.
▷ After locking, approx. 2 seconds must elapse
before unlocking is possible.
If only the driver's door and the charging socket
flap have been unlocked in accordance with the
Unlocking the vehicle
settings, press the button on the vehicle key
again to unlock the other vehicle access points.
The vehicle is operational after one of the front
doors is opened.
The lighting functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Comfort entry
Press the button on the vehicle key twice
in immediate succession to activate Reach into the handle recess of a vehicle door.
comfort entry.
Depending on the settings, the window is low‐
Locking the vehicle
ered further when a door is opened.
2. Touch the grooved surface on the outside
door handle of a closed front door with your
89
finger for approx. 1 second without reaching If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking
into the handle recess. zone without moving for a prolonged period of
time, the vehicle is locked automatically.
If a person is detected on the front passenger
seat during locking and if the front passenger's
seat belt is in the seat belt buckle during locking:
▷ The vehicle is locked, but not protected
against theft.
▷ The charging socket flap remains unlocked.
Actions during unlocking

If the settings specify that only the driver's door
Malfunction
and the charging socket flap will be unlocked,
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking note the following:
request detection on the outside door handles.
The driver's door and the charging socket flap
If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle with will only be unlocked when the driver approaches
the buttons on the vehicle key or with the the vehicle on the driver's side.
integrated key.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the For settings, see page 100.
vehicle
Principle ▷ Carry the vehicle key with you, for example, in
your pants pocket.
The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key. ▷ Automatic unlocking and locking must be ac‐
tivated in the settings.
If the driver moves away from the unlocked vehi‐
cle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked. ▷ Drive-ready state must be switched off.
▷ To lock the vehicle contactlessly, there must
General not be a second vehicle key within a radius of
The function is available with Comfort Access. six metres of the vehicle.
The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised ve‐ ▷ If the vehicle has been in rest state for several
hicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. days, contactless unlocking/locking is not
possible until the vehicle has been driven.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 1 m, 3 ft around the side and rear of the For further information:
vehicle. For settings, see page 100.
The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone. With the Key Card
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 2 m, 6 ft around the side and rear of the ve‐ Principle
hicle. The Key Card is a chip card on which a digital
key is installed. It can be used to unlock and lock
the vehicle.
90
Key Card, see page 95. Locking/unlocking the vehicle
General
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di‐

rectly and centrally up against the outside door
handle on the driver's door. The position of the
NFC antenna will depend on the smartphone
model.
Hold the activated Key Card directly and centrally When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
up against the outside door handle on the driv‐ make sure that all doors and the luggage com‐
er's door. partment are closed.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,

make sure that all doors and the luggage com‐ Frequently Asked Questions
partment are closed. What measures can be taken to enable a vehicle
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change to be opened if the vehicle key has accidentally
the position of the Key Card and repeat the pro‐ been locked inside the vehicle?
cedure. ▷ The Remote Services of the BMW app can
be used to lock and unlock a vehicle.
With the BMW Digital Key This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐
Principle stalled on a smartphone.
Depending on the national-market version and ▷ Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested via
equipment, a digital key can be installed on a the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre.
compatible smartphone and used to unlock and This requires an active BMW Connected‐
lock the vehicle. Drive contract.
BMW Digital Key, see page 96.
Access to the luggage
compartment
General
The luggage compartment will be opened to the
configured opening height.
91
Safety notes Opening the luggage compartment

Press the button on the vehicle key for
WARNING approximately 1 second.
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of in‐ Closing the luggage compartment
jury. When opening and closing, make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is kept Hold down the button on the vehicle key
clear. until luggage compartment is closed.
Releasing the button stops the move‐
ment.
WARNING If the doors were not unlocked, the luggage
The tailgate swings outwards when opened. compartment is locked again as soon as it
There is a risk of injury or material damage. closes.
When opening and closing, make sure that the
area of movement of the tailgate is kept clear. On the luggage compartment
General
NOTE With Comfort Access, the luggage compartment
Pointed or angular objects can strike the win‐ can be accessed without activating the vehicle
dows and the heating conductors during the key.
journey. There is a risk of material damage. Simply having the vehicle key with you, for exam‐
Cover edges and make sure that pointed ob‐ ple in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.
jects cannot strike the windows.
The key is automatically detected near the vehi‐
cle.
With the vehicle key
Opening the luggage compartment
General
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in,
do not place it in the luggage compartment.
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
ket versions, it is possible to select whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
vehicle key.
Functional prerequisites
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button
To open the luggage compartment with the ve‐
on the luggage compartment.
hicle key, the trailer socket must not be occu‐
pied. ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the luggage
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
compartment.
open the luggage compartment with the vehicle
key. Locked doors are not unlocked.
92
Closing the luggage compartment ▷ If the vehicle begins to move.

▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
luggage compartment. Pressing it again
closes the luggage compartment again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
luggage compartment. Pressing it again
closes the luggage compartment again.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing again resumes the opening proce‐
dure.
▷ Press the button on the luggage Pressing and holding the button will close the
compartment. luggage compartment again.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐
▷ Press the button on the luggage
er's door. Pressing again resumes the open‐
compartment.
ing procedure.
The vehicle is locked after the lug‐
gage compartment has been closed. For this
to happen, the driver's door must be closed
Cancelling the closing operation
and the vehicle key must be outside the vehi‐ The closing operation is interrupted in the
cle in the vicinity of the luggage compart‐ following situations:
ment. ▷ When driving off suddenly.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
In the interior luggage compartment. Pressing it again
opens the luggage compartment again.
Operating requirements ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
In order to be able to open the luggage compart‐ luggage compartment. Pressing it again
ment with the button in the vehicle interior, the opens the luggage compartment again.
trailer socket must not be occupied. ▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling and holding the button again resumes
Opening the luggage compartment the closing operation.
Press the button in the driver's door stor‐ ▷ By releasing the button on the vehicle key.
age compartment. Pressing and holding it again resumes the
closing operation.
Closing the luggage compartment

Touchless opening and closing of the
Pull and hold the button in the driver's luggage compartment
door storage compartment.
The vehicle key or the digital key must be loca‐

Principle
ted in the vehicle interior for this function. Touchless opening and closing of the luggage
compartment is possible when carrying the vehi‐
Cancelling the opening procedure cle key on your person.
The opening procedure is interrupted in the

following situations:
93
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot Operating requirements

movement in the central rear area and the lug‐ ▷ To enable the touchless opening of the lug‐
gage compartment is opened and closed. gage compartment, the trailer socket must
not be occupied.
General
▷ Selector lever position P must be engaged
The function is available with Comfort Access. for touchless opening of the luggage com‐
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the partment.
luggage compartment may open or close inad‐ ▷ Contactless opening and closing of the lug‐
vertently if you unintentionally move your foot or gage compartment must be activated in the
if a foot movement is detected. settings.
The sensor range extends to approximately For further information:
1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area.
For settings, see page 100.
If you open the luggage compartment with no-
touch activation, locked doors will not be un‐ Opening the luggage compartment
locked.
1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap‐
proximately an arm's length away from the
Safety notes
rear of the vehicle.
2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath
WARNING the vehicle and immediately pull it back. Your
Parts of the body can become trapped when leg must move across the ranges of both
the tailgate is operated. There is a danger of in‐ sensors.
jury. When opening and closing, make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is kept
clear.
WARNING
The tailgate swings outwards when opened.
There is a risk of injury or material damage.
When opening and closing, make sure that the
area of movement of the tailgate is kept clear. Before the luggage compartment opens, the
hazard warning lights will flash.
Moving the foot again will stop the opening pro‐
NOTE cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
Pointed or angular objects can strike the win‐ close the luggage compartment again.
dows and the heating conductors during the
journey. There is a risk of material damage. Closing the luggage compartment
Cover edges and make sure that pointed ob‐ Perform the foot movement for opening the lug‐
jects cannot strike the windows. gage compartment.
The hazard warning lights flash and an acoustic
signal sounds.
94
Moving the foot again will stop the closing opera‐ General
tion. The subsequent foot movement will open
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
the luggage compartment again.
Depending on the national-market version, the
Key Card may not be available.
System limits
A digital key that has already been paired with
Detection of foot movement may be restricted the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The digi‐
by the following external circumstances: tal key must be activated via iDrive.
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle. When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can be
Movement in the vicinity of the sensors may used to start the vehicle when activated. Always
cause the luggage compartment to open unin‐ take the vehicle key with you to a service ap‐
tentionally, for example if water flows underneath pointment.
the vehicle during cleaning or in heavy rain. To
prevent the luggage compartment from opening Safety note
unintentionally, make sure that the vehicle key is
far enough away from the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE
Malfunction If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the

wireless charging tray at the same time, the
In the event of an electrical fault, operate the un‐
Key Card could become damaged. There is a
locked luggage compartment manually with a
risk of material damage. Do not place the Key
slow and smooth motion.
Card in the wireless charging tray at the same
time as a mobile device.
Luggage compartment emergency
release
Activating/deactivating the Key Card
in the vehicle
General
To activate the Key Card, it must be in the
smartphone tray and there must be a vehicle key
in the vehicle.
To deactivate the Key Card, there must be a ve‐
hicle key in the vehicle.
Pull the handle in the luggage compartment. If BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle, a
The luggage compartment is unlocked. digital key can be used instead of the vehicle
key.
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
Key Card registered digital keys.
Principle
The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and
start the vehicle.
95
Activating the Key Card 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle of
the smartphone tray.
After turning on the drive-ready state, the Key
Card can be taken out of the storage tray.
Malfunction
Objects between the sensors and the Key Card,
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray. for example a purse or wallet, may prevent the
vehicle from detecting the Key Card.
2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the
smartphone tray.
3. Follow instructions on the control display. BMW Digital Key
Deactivating the Key Card Principle
1. "MENU"
BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compatible
2. "Vehicle apps" smartphone to lock, unlock and start the vehicle.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Key Card" General
5. "Deactivate Key Card" Availability and range of functions of the BMW
Digital Key depend on the equipment and na‐
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
tional-market version.
registered digital keys.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible
smartphone or other compatible end devices.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with the
smartphone, this function must be offered by the
activated Key Card.
smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app pro‐
For further information: vides a check to determine if the smartphone
Access to the vehicle interior, see page 88. and the vehicle are compatible and which func‐
tions are supported.
Switching on drive-ready state A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual set‐
tings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al‐
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you too. This will mean that you can
still access the vehicle even if the smartphone is
not working. It is also useful to have the vehicle
key or Key Card about your person if the vehicle
has to be handed over to another person. The
vehicle key or Key Card can then be handed
over, instead of the smartphone. Always take the
vehicle key with you to a service appointment.
96
For further information: Limiting the range of functions

▷ BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 71. Certain functions of the digital key can be limited
▷ www.bmw.com/digitalkey. before handing it over. For example, if the digital
key is handed over to a novice driver, the switch-
Operating requirements off of driving stability control systems may be ex‐
cluded. For more information, refer to the Con‐
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW nectedDrive portal and the BMW app.
Digital Key.
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐ Authentication
Drive account of the registered keeper.
Depending on the recipient's smartphone model,
▷ The smartphone battery is sufficiently authentication may be required for security rea‐
charged. The minimum battery charge re‐ sons.
quired depends on the smartphone in ques‐
An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key or
tion.
another method can be used to perform the au‐
thentication. Corresponding information is dis‐
Enabling the main digital key played for your attention on the smartphone or
The registered keeper's smartphone is enabled control display.
as the main digital key in the vehicle. To do so,
the registered keeper must provide proof of au‐ Deleting digital keys
thorisation for their vehicle.
Proof of authorisation can be started via the General
BMW app or the activation code in the corre‐ Deleted digital keys are removed from the list of
sponding smartphone function, for example in enabled digital keys.
the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be in the
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
vehicle during enabling.
Follow the enabling instructions in the Digital Key Deleting the digital master key
menu within the BMW app or on the control dis‐
play. The digital master key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
Sharing digital keys The deletion of the digital master key is comple‐
ted immediately.
General
Deleting a shared key
Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared with
other people. This option is provided via the Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone
smartphone enabled as the main digital key. associated with the main digital key, via the
smartphone associated with a shared key or in
Passing on authorisation iDrive.
To share the digital key, select the correspond‐ A shared key will only be deleted via the smart‐
ing function on the smartphone, for example in phone associated with the main digital key if the
the Wallet app. vehicle is being used with a key other than the
one that is to be deleted.
As soon as a digital key is shared with a person,
this person receives an invitation. If the invitation If the smartphone associated with a shared key
is accepted, the digital key is activated on the re‐ or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it will be
cipient's smartphone. deleted immediately.
97
Deletion in iDrive Switching on drive-ready state

To enable a digital key to be deleted in iDrive,
there must be an authorised vehicle key in the Using the smartphone tray
vehicle or the main key must be in the smart‐
phone tray.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Digital Key"
5. Select a digital key as necessary.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
Resetting the function 2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the
To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must smartphone tray.
be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle. Make sure that the display is pointing up‐
All digital keys, including the main key, are de‐ wards.
leted when the BMW Digital Key function is re‐ 3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
set. 4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
Following the reset, it will no longer be possible drive-ready state.
to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a digital
key. Selling the smartphone
The main digital key must be enabled again in or‐ Delete all digital keys from the smartphone be‐
der to be able to use BMW Digital Key again. fore selling it. This ensures that the smartphone
can no longer be used for the vehicle.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Selling the vehicle
Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key
4. "Digital Key" function or remove the vehicle from the Con‐
5. "Reset function" nectedDrive account of the current registered
keeper.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle If the vehicle is removed from the Connected‐
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle are
the outside door handle. deleted.
Malfunction
Access to the vehicle interior, see page 88.
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
digital key in some circumstances, including the
following:
98
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors Unlocking the vehicle

in the vehicle by an unsuitable smartphone
cover. Press the button.
▷ There are objects between the smartphone

and its cover, for example a card with a chip
or the Key Card. To open the door
▷ Fault of the connection from transmission ▷ Press the button to unlock all the
towers or other equipment with high trans‐ doors together.
mitting power. Pull the door handle above the arm‐
▷ Shielding of the smartphone due to buildings rest.
or metal objects. ▷ Pull the door handle on the door being
opened. The other doors remain locked.
Central locking buttons

Parking service mode
General
The vehicle is automatically locked when moving Principle
off. The control display is disabled in parking service
If an accident of appropriate severity occurs, the mode.
vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard This mode can be used, for example, if the vehi‐
warning lights and interior lights are switched on. cle is to be handed over to a parking service.
Overview General
parking service mode may not be available.
In parking service mode, the vehicle settings
cannot be changed via iDrive. Settings stored in
a BMW ID or a guest profile cannot be changed.
Personal data cannot be displayed.
In addition, the following actions are performed:
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
Central locking buttons. ▷ The integrated universal remote control is de‐
activated.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be
Locking the vehicle
turned off.
Press the button with the front doors ▷ The availability of certain settings of the drive
closed. modes is restricted.
Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-theft For further information:
protection system. BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 71.
99
Operating requirements 3. "Doors and windows"

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a 4. "Lock/unlock"
BMW ID. 5. "Unlock"
6. Select the desired setting:
Activating parking service mode ▷ "Driver's door only"
1. "MENU"
Only the driver's door and charging
2. "Vehicle apps" socket flap are unlocked. Pressing again
3. "System settings" unlocks the entire vehicle.
4. "Valet parking mode" ▷ "All doors"
5. If necessary, "PIN" The entire vehicle is unlocked.
If the active BMW ID does not have an as‐ ▷ "Lower window"
signed PIN, enter this PIN now. The PIN is The entire vehicle is unlocked.
needed to deactivate the parking service
Pressing the button on the vehicle key
mode.
twice in immediate succession causes the
6. If necessary, enter the PIN. window to be lowered further when the
7. "Activate valet parking mode" door is subsequently opened.
Deactivating parking service mode Touchless unlocking/locking

1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock 1. "MENU"
screen. 2. "Vehicle apps"
2. ▷ Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID. 3. "Doors and windows"
If PIN was forgotten: enter access data for 4. "Comfort access"
the BMW ID. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ If the selected BMW ID does not have an ▷ "Unlock when approaching"
assigned PIN: enter access data for the
BMW ID. ▷ "Lock when walking away"
Automatic unlocking
Settings 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
General 3. "Doors and windows"
Various settings are possible for opening and 4. "Lock/unlock"
closing, depending on the equipment and the 5. Select the desired setting:
national-market version.
▷ "Unlock doors at end of journey"
Unlocking and locking ▷ "Unlock doors when in Park"
After drive-ready state has been switched off
Doors by pressing the Start/Stop button or by en‐
1. "MENU" gaging the selector lever position P, the
locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.
2. "Vehicle apps"
100
Automatic locking locked when the luggage compartment is un‐

1. "MENU" locked.
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. "MENU"

3. "Doors and windows" 2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Lock/unlock" 3. "Doors and windows"
5. "Lock after a short time" 4. "Tailgate"
The vehicle is automatically locked again after 5. Select the desired setting:
a short while if no doors are opened after un‐ ▷ "Tailgate"
locking.
Depending on the equipment, the lug‐
gage compartment will be unlocked or
Vehicle acknowledgement signals opened.
1. "MENU" ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
2. "Vehicle apps" Depending on the equipment, the lug‐
3. "Doors and windows" gage compartment will be unlocked or
4. "Lock/unlock" opened and the doors are unlocked.
5. To deactivate or activate desired acknowl‐ ▷ "Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
edgement signals: already unlocked"
▷ "Flash on lock/unlock" The vehicle must be unlocked before the
tailgate can be operated with the vehicle
Unlocking is acknowledged by two
key.
flashes, locking by one flash.
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
▷ With alarm system:
Operation of the tailgate with the vehicle
"Sound on lock/unlock"
key is disabled.
Unlocking is acknowledged by two acous‐
tic signals, locking by one acoustic signal. Adjusting the opening height
It is possible to specify how far the tailgate
Automatic folding of the mirrors
should open.
1. "MENU"
When setting the opening height, make sure that
2. "Vehicle apps" there is a clearance of at least 10 cm, 4 in above
3. "Doors and windows" the tailgate.
4. "Lock/unlock" 1. "MENU"
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock" 2. "Vehicle apps"
Luggage compartment
4. "Tailgate"
Luggage compartment and doors 5. "Opening height"
You can set up if only the luggage compartment 6. Watch the tailgate and set the desired open‐
will be unlocked or if the doors will also be un‐ ing height.
101
Opening/closing the luggage To safeguard operation of the alarm system, do

compartment with no-touch activation not modify the system.
1. "MENU"
Turning the alarm system on/off
2. "Vehicle apps"
The alarm system is turned off or on as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked or locked.
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting: Opening the doors when the alarm
▷ "Open with foot movement" system is switched on
▷ "Close with foot movement" The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if it has been unlocked via the door lock
using the integrated key.
Alarm system
Opening the luggage compartment
Principle with the alarm system turned on
The alarm system visually and acoustically sig‐ The luggage compartment can be opened even
nals when someone attempts to open the locked when the alarm system is turned on.
vehicle. After closing the luggage compartment, the lug‐
gage compartment will be locked and monitored
General again. The hazard warning lights flash once dur‐
The alarm system responds to the following ing closing.
changes in a locked vehicle:
▷ Opening a door, the bonnet or the luggage Indicator light on the interior mirror
compartment.
▷ Movements inside the vehicle interior.
▷ A change in the vehicle's angle of inclination,
for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to tow‐
ing away.
▷ An interruption in the battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the OBD diagnostic socket.
▷ Locking of the vehicle while a device is con‐ ▷ Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:
nected to the OBD diagnostic socket.
The alarm system is switched on.
The alarm system indicates these changes visu‐
▷ Indicator light flashes for approximately
ally and audibly:
10 seconds then switches to flashing every
▷ Acoustic alarm: 2 seconds:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic The interior movement detector and tilt alarm
alarm may be suppressed. sensor are not active because the doors,
▷ Optical alarm: bonnet or tailgate are not closed correctly.
Correctly closed access points are secured.
By flashing of the hazard warning lights and, if
applicable, the headlights.
102
Once the remaining open access points have Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
been closed, the interior movement detector interior movement detector
and tilt alarm sensor are switched on.
Within 10 seconds of locking the vehicle,
▷ The indicator light extinguishes after the vehi‐ press the button on the vehicle key.
cle has been unlocked:
The indicator light illuminates for approxi‐
This means that the vehicle is not being tam‐ mately 2 seconds and then flashes again.
pered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐ The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
til drive-ready state is switched on, but for no detector are switched off until the next time the
longer than approximately 5 minutes: vehicle is locked.
The alarm has been triggered.
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
Tilt alarm sensor
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated key,
The vehicle's angle of inclination is monitored. the drive-ready state must subsequently be
The alarm system responds, for example when turned on via the emergency detection of the ve‐
there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the hicle key.
vehicle away.
Interior movement detector Window

The vehicle interior is monitored.
The alarm system responds when movement is General
detected in the vehicle interior. If a window is often opened at the same place,
To ensure perfect functioning, the windows must this task can be carried out by the BMW Intelli‐
be closed. gent Personal Assistant. For example, if you of‐
ten use the same multi-storey car park.
Avoiding false warnings For further information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see
General page 61.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector may trigger an alarm even though no Safety note
unauthorised activity is taking place.
Situations where false warnings may occur: WARNING
▷ In washing bays or car washes. Parts of the body can become trapped when
▷ In two-level garages. the windows are operated. There is a risk of in‐
▷ When transporting the vehicle via motorail, jury or material damage. When opening and
car ferry or trailer. closing, make sure that the area of movement
of the windows is kept clear.
▷ When there are pets in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement de‐
tector can be switched off for such situations.
103
With the vehicle key Close windows
Opening windows
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after unlocking.
The windows open for as long as the button on

the vehicle key remains pressed.
Close windows
Keep the button on the vehicle key Touch the grooved surface on the outside door
pressed after locking. handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the handle re‐
The windows close for as long as the button on cess.
the vehicle key remains pressed.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir‐
sunroof with sun protection are closed.
rors are folded in provided that they were not fol‐
ded in when the vehicle was locked. If the hazard Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir‐
warning lights are switched on, the exterior mir‐ rors are folded in provided that they were not fol‐
rors are not folded in. ded in when the vehicle was locked. If the hazard
warning lights are switched on, the exterior mir‐
rors are not folded in.
On the outside door handle
Principle In the interior

The windows can be closed via the outside door
Overview
handle without operating the vehicle key.
the vehicle.
General
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for example, in
your trouser pocket.
Electric windows
The windows can be operated under the
following conditions.
104
▷ Standby state is switched on. Safety note

▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ For a short while after rest state has been es‐ WARNING
tablished. Accessories on the windows, for example aer‐
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside of ials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism. There
the vehicle. is a danger of injury. Do not attach any acces‐
sories within the area of movement of the win‐
Opening windows dows.
▷ Press the switch as far as the resist‐
ance point.
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
The window opens for as long as the
If an external hazard or ice prevents you from
switch is held.
closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐
▷ Press the switch past the resistance lows:
point.
The window is opened automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move‐ 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
ment. point and hold it in this position.
The window is closed but with restricted anti-
Close windows trap mechanism. If the closing force exceeds
▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist‐ a certain level, the closing operation is inter‐
ance point. rupted.
The window closes for as long as the
switch is held. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance
▷ Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approximately 4 seconds
point. and hold it in this position.
The window closes automatically. The window is closed with no anti-trap mech‐
Pulling the switch again stops the movement. anism.
Anti-trap mechanism
Safety switch
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or Principle
parts of the body from becoming trapped be‐ The safety switch can be used to prevent chil‐
tween the door frame and window while a win‐ dren from opening and closing the rear windows
dow is being closed. with the switches in the rear, for example.
If an accident of appropriate severity occurs, the
General safety function is automatically switched off.
If resistance or an obstruction is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing operation is
interrupted.
105
Overview Closing the glass sunroof

pressed after locking.
The electric glass sunroof with sun protection is

closed for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir‐
ded in when the vehicle was locked. If the hazard
warning lights are switched on, the exterior mir‐
Safety switch
rors are not folded in.
Via the outside door handle

Turning the safety functions on/off
Principle
Press the button.
The glass sunroof can be closed with the outside
The LED is illuminated when the safety
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
function is switched on.
the vehicle.
Glass sunroof General

Safety note
Functional prerequisite
WARNING Carry the vehicle key with you, for example, in
Parts of the body may become trapped when your trouser pocket.
the glass sunroof is operated. There is a danger
of injury. When opening and closing, make sure Closing the glass sunroof
that the area of movement of the glass sunroof
is kept clear.
With the vehicle key
Opening the glass sunroof

pressed after unlocking.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
The electric glass sunroof with sun protection is
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle
there without grasping the handle recess.
key is pressed.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof with sun protection are closed.
106
Depending on the equipment, the exterior mir‐ Raising/closing the glass sunroof
Press the switch briefly up.
ded in when the vehicle was locked. If the hazard
warning lights are switched on, the exterior mir‐ ▷ The closed glass sunroof is
rors are not folded in. raised and the sun protection
opens slightly.
In the interior ▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes to the raised position.
General The sun protection does not
move.
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
erated using the same switch. ▷ The raised glass sunroof is closed.
Overview Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sun protection separately
Button in the vehicle
▷ Slide the switch backwards as
far as the resistance point and
hold.
The sun protection opens for
as long as the switch is
pressed. If the sun protection
is already fully open, the glass
sunroof is opened.
▷ Slide the switch forwards as far as the resist‐
ance point and hold.
To open/close the glass
sunroof/sun protection. The glass sunroof closes for as long as the
switch is held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or is in the raised position, the sun
protection is closed.
▷ Slide the switch backwards beyond the re‐
Operating requirements sistance point.
The glass sunroof can be operated under the The sun protection is opened automatically. If
following conditions. the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof is opened automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move‐
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
ment.
▷ For a short while after rest state has been es‐
▷ Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐
tablished.
ance point.
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
The glass sunroof is closed automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or is in the
raised position, the sun protection is closed
automatically.
107
Pressing the switch again stops the move‐ field may be obscured by a car port or bridge,
ment. for example.
▷ Vehicle must be in rest state.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and ▷ The function must be activated in the set‐
sun protection together tings.
▷ Slide the switch back beyond For settings, see page 100.
the resistance point twice in
quick succession. Malfunctions
The glass sunroof and the sun The open glass sunroof is not moved to the
protection open together. raised position under the following circumstan‐
ces:
Pressing the switch again
stops the movement. ▷ The glass sunroof is blocked.
▷ Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐ ▷ The anti-trap mechanism cannot be guaran‐
ance point twice in quick succession. teed.
The glass sunroof and the sun protection ▷ There is a system error, for example due to a
close together. temporary open circuit. In this case, initialising
the glass sunroof can help.
Pressing the switch again stops the move‐
ment. An error message is shown on the control dis‐
play. No further closure is attempted.
If rain detection is not possible due to the sys‐
Comfort position tem, the open glass sunroof is immediately
In some models, wind noise levels inside the ve‐ moved to the raised position. An error message
hicle are lowest when the glass sunroof is not is shown on the control display.
fully open. On these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof as far as Anti-trap mechanism
this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again in the interior opens Principle
the electric glass sunroof fully.
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
parts of the body from becoming trapped be‐
Closing the glass sunroof tween the roof frame and glass sunroof while the
automatically glass sunroof is being closed.
Principle General
An open electric glass sunroof is automatically If resistance or an obstruction is detected while
moved to the raised position when it starts to rain the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing op‐
or six hours after the vehicle was locked. eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position or when closing from the
Operating requirements raised position.
▷ Rain must be able to reach the sensor field in
the area of the interior mirror. The sensor
108
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism The system can be initialised if the following
from an open position conditions are met:
If an external hazard or ice prevents you from ▷ The vehicle is parked on level ground.
closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐ ▷ The vehicle does not move until initialisation
lows: is complete.
▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
▷ The outside temperature is above 5 ℃/41 ℉.
During initialisation, the glass sunroof closes with
no anti-trap mechanism.
1. Close all doors. Ensure that the closing range is clear.
2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐

Initialising the system
ance point and hold it in this position.
The glass sunroof is closed with restricted Press the switch up and hold until
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force ex‐ initialisation is complete:
ceeds a certain level, the closing operation is
interrupted.
3. Slide the switch forwards once again beyond
the resistance point and hold until the glass Initialisation begins within 15 seconds.
sunroof closes with no anti-trap mechanism. ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens, then
Ensure that the closing range is clear. closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism then opens and closes again.
from a raised position Initialisation is complete once the glass sunroof
If an external hazard or ice prevents you from and sun protection have opened then closed
closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐ again.
lows:
1. Close all doors.

2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the resist‐
ance point and hold it in this position.
Initialising after an open circuit
General
If a open circuit occurs while the glass sunroof is
opening or closing, it may only have restricted
functionality afterwards. In this case, initialising
the system can help.
109
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes equipment, systems and If the backrest is angled too far back, the pro‐
functions which are offered or will be offered on tective function of the seat belt will no longer
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding under
ded in the vehicle in question. the seat belt in the event of an accident. There
is a risk of injury or even death. Adjust the seat
before starting the journey. Adjust the backrest
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. to the most upright position possible, and do
not change it during the journey.
Safe seating position

A seat position that suitably meets the needs of WARNING
the occupants is essential for relaxed driving with There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
minimum fatigue. are moved. There is a risk of injury or material
In an accident, the correct seat position plays an damage. Before making any adjustment, make
important role. Pay attention to the notes in the sure that the area of movement of the seat is
following chapters. clear.

▷ Seats, see page 110. Manually adjustable seats
▷ Seat belts, see page 113.
▷ Head restraints, see page 116. Overview
▷ Airbags, see page 186.
Seats
Safety notes
WARNING
Adjusting the seat during a journey could cause The levers for the seat settings are located at the
the seat to move unexpectedly. You could lose front seats.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when at a standstill.
110
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Adjusting the forward/back position Adjusting the height
WARNING
If the seat is not locked, it could move unex‐
pectedly during a journey. You could lose con‐
After making an adjustment, move the seat for‐
wards and backwards slightly to ensure that it is
properly engaged.
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐

edly until the seat reaches the desired height.
Adjusting the backrest angle
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐
rection.
Adjusting the seat angle

Pull the lever and add or remove pressure on the
backrest as required.
Electrically adjustable seats
General
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored in
the active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐
a later time, the stored position is called up auto‐
edly until the seat reaches the desired angle.
matically.
The current seat position can be saved using the
memory function.
111
Overview Adjusting the seat angle
The switches for the seat settings are located at Tilt the switch up or down.
the front seats.
Adjusting the backrest angle

Adjusting the forward/back position
Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.

Press the switch forwards or backwards.
Thigh support
Adjusting the height
Sport seat
Press the switch up or down.

Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support forwards or backwards.
112
Lumbar support Before each journey, always make sure that all
occupants have fastened their seat belts. The
Principle airbags supplement the seat belts as an addi‐
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
The curvature of the backrest can be changed to
tute for the seat belts.
provide support for the lumbar region, or lordo‐
sis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal All belt fastening points are designed to achieve
column are supported to encourage an upright the best possible protective effect of the seat
sitting posture. belts with proper use of the seat belts and cor‐
rect seat setting.
Adjusting the lumbar support The two outer seat belt buckles on the rear seats
are intended for those sitting on the left and
▷ Press the button at the front/rear:
right.
The curvature is increased/
The inner seat belt buckle on the rear seats is in‐
decreased.
tended for the person sitting in the middle.
▷ Press the button at the top/bottom:
The curvature is shifted upwards/downwards.
Notes on sitting safely, see page 110.
Backrest width Safety notes
Principle WARNING
The backrest width can be adjusted to improve
If a seat belt is used by more than one person
lateral support when cornering.
at the same time, the protective function of the
seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There is a
General risk of injury or even death. Only one person
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the should use each seat belt at any one time. Do
side sections of the backrest. not allow infants and children to travel on the
lap of another occupant. Instead, secure the in‐
Adjusting the backrest width fant or child in a child restraint system intended
for this purpose.
▷ Press the button at the front:
Backrest width is reduced.
▷ Press the button at the rear: WARNING
Backrest width is increased. The protective function of the seat belts may
be limited or may even fail completely if the
seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is
Seat belts not worn correctly, additional injuries can be
caused, for example in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive action. There is a risk of in‐
General jury or even death. Make sure that all vehicle
For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the vehi‐ occupants have fastened their seat belts cor‐
cle is equipped with five seat belts. However, rectly.
they can only provide protective effect when
worn correctly.
113
WARNING WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony The protective effect of the seat belts may be
structure of the body and should be worn low restricted or may even fail completely in the
across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, following situations:
chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the ▷ If the seat belts or seat belt buckles are
lap section of the belt across the abdominal damaged, dirty or have been modified in
area must be avoided. another way.
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos‐ ▷ The seat belt tensioners or belt retractors
sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the have been modified.
protection for which they have been designed.
Seat belts can be damaged in an accident with‐
A slack seat belt will greatly reduce the protec‐
out the damage necessarily being apparent.
tion afforded to the wearer.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life. Do
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of not modify seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals belt tensioners, belt retractors and belt anchor
and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may points and ensure that they are kept clean. Af‐
safely be carried out using a mild soap and wa‐ ter an accident, have the seat belts inspected
ter solution. The seat belt should be replaced if at a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
the seat belt strap becomes frayed, contamina‐ other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
ted or damaged. Seat belts should not be worn workshop.
with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly
must only be used by one occupant; it is forbid‐
den to put a belt around a child being carried Correct seat belt use
on the occupant's lap.
▷ Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis and
It is essential to replace the entire assembly af‐ shoulder, close to the body and without twist‐
ter it has been worn in a severe impact even if ing.
damage to the assembly is not obvious.
▷ Make sure that the seat belt is positioned low
at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The seat
belt must not press on the abdomen.
WARNING
▷ The seat belt must not be allowed to rub
No modifications or additions should be made against sharp edges, be routed over solid or
by the user that will either prevent the seat belt breakable objects or be trapped.
adjusting devices from operating to remove
▷ Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from
being adjusted to remove slack. ▷ Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pulling
upwards on the upper body area.
▷ Centre seat belt in the rear: after buckling the
WARNING seat belt, pull the seat belt buckle to the re‐
sistance out of the mount.
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the middle seat belt is not en‐
sured. There is a risk of injury or even death.
Lock the wider rear seat backrest when using
the middle seat belt.
114
Setting for automatic retracting seat Acoustic seat belt warning

belts
▷ Draw the seat belt tongue attached to the General
seat belt across the body and press it into the Check whether the seat belts are fastened cor‐
seat belt buckle until a 'click' is heard. rectly.
▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very impor‐ The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
tant. To adjust the lap belt and check following situations:
whether the seat belt buckle has locked cor‐ ▷ When the seat belt on the driver's side or on
rectly, pull upwards on the shoulder strap un‐ the passenger's side is not fastened.
til the lap belt fits tightly.
▷ When the seat belt is unfastened while driv‐
▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap ad‐ ing.
justs itself automatically to allow freedom of
▷ When objects are present on the front pas‐
movement.
senger seat.
▷ To release the seat belt, press the button on
the seat belt buckle. Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
Fastening the seat belt minates after turning on the drive-ready state
1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it slowly and the seat belt reminder is active.
over the shoulder and pelvis. A Check Control message is shown where appli‐
2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the seat belt cable. Check whether the seat belt has been fas‐
buckle. The seat belt buckle must be heard tened correctly.
to engage. The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment and national-market version.
Icon Meaning
Seat belt is not buckled.
Seat belt is only buckled on the

corresponding seat.
If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's Seat belt on the corresponding
seat belt strap is automatically tensioned once seat is not buckled.
when driving off.
This seat is not affected by the
seat belt reminder.
Unfastening the seat belt
1. Hold the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button on the seat belt buckle. Safety function
3. Guide the seat belt back up to the automatic In critical driving situations, for example full brak‐
reel. ing, the front seat belts are tensioned automati‐
cally.
115
If the driving situation passes without an acci‐ ▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head
dent, the belt tension is slackened again. restraints.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, ▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers
stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat belt by directly on the head restraint.
pressing the red button in the seat belt buckle. ▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐
Fasten the seat belt again before continuing driv‐ sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐
ing. straint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for example
Front head restraints cushions, during the journey.
Safety notes Adjusting the height
WARNING
If the head restraints are removed or incorrectly
adjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and head and neck injuries may result.
There is a danger of injury.
▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraints on all occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
supports the back of the head at eye level the head restraint downwards.
where possible.
▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
After adjusting the height, make sure that the
straint is as close as possible to the back
head restraint engages correctly.
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
Adjusting the height: M sports seat
WARNING
the head restraints are moved. There is a dan‐
ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
make sure that the area of movement is kept
clear.
WARNING Press the switch up or down.

Objects on the head restraint impair the protec‐
tive function of the head restraint in the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
116
Adjusting the distance Rear head restraints

Safety notes
WARNING
If the head restraints are removed or incorrectly
adjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and head and neck injuries may result.
There is a danger of injury.
▷ Back: press the button and push back the ▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraint. head restraints on all occupied seats.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre
After adjusting the distance, make sure that the supports the back of the head at eye level
head restraint engages correctly. where possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
Adjusting the distance: M sports seat of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐
The distance from the back of the head is adjus‐ tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
ted by the seat backrest angle.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head. WARNING
Removing the head restraints the head restraints are moved. There is a dan‐
Only remove the head restraint if no-one is in‐ ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
tending to sit in the seat in question. make sure that the area of movement is kept
clear.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint impair the protec‐
tive function of the head restraint in the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head
restraints.
1. Push the head restraint up until resistance is ▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers
felt. directly on the head restraint.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head ▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐
restraint fully out. sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐
straint.
Installing head restraints ▷ Do not use any accessories, for example
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head cushions, during the journey.
restraint.
117
Folding down the head restraints Integrated key, see page 84.
General
Head restraints can be folded back to improve
rear visibility. Only fold back the head restraint if
no one is sitting on the seat in question.
Folding down the head restraints
3. Press and hold the integrated key and the

button simultaneously, arrows 1, and pull the
head restraint fully out.
▷ Backwards: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold back the head restraint.
▷ Forwards: fold the head restraint forwards as
far as it will go. Ensure that the head restraint
engages correctly.
Removing the middle head restraint

Removing the outer head restraint Only remove the head restraint if no one is sitting
Only remove the head restraint if no-one is in‐ on the middle seat.
tending to sit in the seat in question.
1. Push the head restraint up until resistance is
1. Fold down the respective rear seat backrest. felt.
To enlarge the luggage compartment, see 2. Press the buttons, arrows 1, and pull the
page 294. head restraint fully out.
2. Insert the integrated key.
Installing head restraints

To install, insert the head restraint into the mount
and push down until resistance is felt.
118
After installation, make sure that the head re‐ Icon Meaning
straint engages correctly.
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
Exterior mirrors
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
General
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the Select mirror, automatic parking func‐
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If the tion.
BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at a
later time, the stored position is called up auto‐
matically. Adjusting the exterior mirrors
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be Press the button.
stored using the memory function.
The selected exterior mirror moves along
with the button movement.
Safety note
Selecting the exterior mirror
WARNING
To switch to the other mirror:
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance from road users be‐ Push the switch.
hind the vehicle could be incorrectly estimated,
for example when changing lane. There is a risk
Malfunction
of accident. Look over your shoulder to esti‐
mate the distance from following traffic. In case of an electrical failure, adjust the exterior
mirror by pressing on the edges of the mirror
glass.
Overview
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirror
NOTE
Because of its width, the vehicle could sustain
damage in car washes. There is a risk of mate‐
rial damage. Before washing, fold the mirrors in
manually or with the button.
Press the button.
The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds

up to approx. 20 km/h/15 mph.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is helpful
in the following situations:
119
▷ In car washes.
Interior mirror, manual dim
▷ In narrow streets.
Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold out
when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi‐
mately 40 km/h/25 mph.
Automatic heating
When required, both exterior mirrors are auto‐
matically heated when drive-ready state is
switched on.
Reduce dazzling effect from the interior mirror by

Automatic dimming
tilting the lever forward.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dimmed
automatically. Photocells in the interior mirror are
used to control this function.
Rear-view mirror with automatic
Automatic parking function anti-dazzle function
Principle General
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
on the passenger's side is tilted downwards.
When parking, for example, this gives the driver a The function is controlled by photocells:
better view of the kerb or other objects near the ▷ In the mirror glass.
ground. ▷ On the back of the mirror.
Activating the automatic parking function Overview

1. Push the switch to the driver's side exterior
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.

The automatic parking function is deactivated
when the trailer socket is occupied.
Deactivating the automatic parking

function Operating requirements
Push the switch to the front passenger's side ex‐ ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
terior mirror position. ▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the interior
mirror and the windscreen.
120
Steering wheel Turning the steering wheel heating on/off

Press the button.
Safety note A Check Control message is shown.
If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes
after a temporary stop, steering wheel heating
WARNING
switches on automatically provided that the func‐
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving may tion had been active at the end of the previous
cause the steering wheel to move unexpect‐ journey.
edly. You could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the
steering wheel when the vehicle is at a stand‐ Memory function
still.
Principle
Manual steering wheel adjustment The memory function enables the following set‐
tings to be stored and retrieved when required:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror adjustment.
▷ Depending on the equipment: height of the
Head-up display.
General
For each driver profile, two memory slots can be
assigned with different settings.
1. Fold the lever down fully.
The following settings are not saved:
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands and
adjust it in the longitudinal direction and ▷ Backrest width.
height of the seat position. ▷ Lumbar support.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Safety notes
Steering wheel heating
WARNING
Overview Using the memory function while driving may
cause the seat or steering wheel to move unex‐
pectedly. You could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident. Only call up the
memory function when the vehicle is at stand‐
still.
Button for steering wheel heating
121
Seat heating
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a risk of injury or material
General
damage. Before making any adjustment, make If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes
sure that the area of movement of the seat is after a temporary stop, the functions are auto‐
clear. matically switched on at the last temperature
setting.
Overview Automatic air conditioning
Overview
The memory buttons are on the front doors.
Storing settings Turning the seat heating on/off

1. Set the desired position. 1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air
conditioning bar.
2. Press the button. The LED is illumina‐ 2. Seat heating.
ted. 3. Select the desired setting.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the If ECO PRO is activated, the heater output is re‐
LED is illuminated. A signal sounds. duced.
Go to Settings
ECO PRO, see page 310.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The saved position is retrieved.
The operation is halted when you press a seat
setting switch or press one of the memory but‐
tons again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the driv‐
er's side is interrupted after a short time while
driving.
122
Automatic rear air-conditioning

system
Overview
Turning on the seat heating

Press the button once for each tempera‐
ture stage.
The highest temperature if the three
LEDs are illuminated.
Turning off the seat heating

Press and hold the button until the LEDs
are extinguished.
Active seat ventilation

Principle
Fans integrated into the seat cushion and back‐
rest ensure a pleasant seating climate.
Turning active seat ventilation on/off

1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air
conditioning bar.
2. Seat ventilation.
123
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Carrying children safely

Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Child restraint systems and their parts can get
functions which are offered or will be offered on very hot when exposed to direct sunlight. Con‐
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ tact with hot parts can cause burns. There is a
ded in the vehicle in question. danger of injury. Do not expose the child re‐
straint system to direct sunlight; cover the child
restraint system if necessary. If necessary, al‐
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. low the child restraint system to cool down be‐
fore transporting a child. Do not leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Important considerations
Safety notes Children on the rear seat
General
WARNING
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
themselves or other road users, for example by Wherever possible, children younger than
the following actions: 12 years old or shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft should
be transported only on the rear seats in child re‐
straint systems appropriate for their age, weight
▷ Releasing the parking brake. and stature. Children aged 12 years and older
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. must be secured with a seat belt once a suitable
child restraint system is no longer an option due
to their age, weight or stature.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not Safety note
key with you and lock the vehicle. WARNING
Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without using additional
WARNING child restraint systems. The protective effect of
the seat belts may be restricted or may even
Hot vehicles can have fatal consequences, in fail completely if the seat belts are worn incor‐
particular for children or pets. There is a risk of rectly. If a seat belt is not worn correctly, addi‐
injury or even death. Do not leave anyone unsu‐ tional injuries can be caused, for example in the
pervised in the vehicle, especially children or event of an accident, braking or avoidance ma‐
pets. noeuvre. There is a danger of injury or danger
124
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
to life. Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft must Safety notes

be secured in suitable child restraint systems.
WARNING
Not for Australia: Children on the front If child restraint systems and their attachment
passenger seat systems have been damaged or subjected to
stresses in an accident, their protective func‐
General tion may be limited or may fail completely. A
child might not be adequately restrained, for ex‐
When using a child restraint system on the front
ample in the event of an accident, braking or
passenger seat, make sure that the front and
evasive action. There is a risk of injury or even
side airbags on the front passenger's side are
death.
deactivated. Airbags on the front passenger side
can only be deactivated with the key switch for Do not continue to use child restraints which
front passenger airbags. are damaged or have been subjected to
stresses in an accident.
If the front passenger airbags cannot be deacti‐
vated, do not carry children on the front passen‐ If attachment systems have been damaged or
ger seat, even in suitable child restraint systems. subjected to stresses in an accident, have them
checked and replaced by a Service Partner of
the manufacturer, another qualified Service
Key switch for front passenger airbags, see Partner or a specialist workshop.
page 188.
Safety note WARNING

If the seat is not set properly or the child seat
WARNING has been installed incorrectly, the child restraint
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child system may have restricted or no stability at all.
in a child restraint system when they deploy. There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
There is a danger of injury. Make sure that the Make sure that the child restraint system rests
front passenger airbags are deactivated and the firmly against the seat backrest. Wherever pos‐
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ sible, adapt the backrest angle of all relevant
luminated. seat backrests and adjust the seats correctly.
Make sure that the seats and their backrests
are correctly engaged or locked. If necessary,
adjust the height of the head restraints, or re‐
Fitting child restraint systems move them.
General
For Australia: installation of child
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐
structions provided by the child restraint system
restraint systems
manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐ Please note the following warning because your
ing child restraint systems. vehicle has been equipped with a front airbag for
the front passenger seat that cannot be deacti‐
vated:
125
It is recommended not to use any kind of

child restraint system on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Extreme hazard
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
Follow the note on the sun visor on the passeng‐

Not for Australia: On the front er's side.
passenger seat Never use a rearward-facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an active front airbag, as death
Deactivating airbags or serious injury to the child can occur.
WARNING Seat position and height

Active front passenger airbags can injure a child After installing a universal child restraint system,
in a child restraint system when they deploy. move the front passenger seat as far back as it
There is a danger of injury. Make sure that the will go and adjust it to the highest position. This
front passenger airbags are deactivated and the seat position and height provides the best possi‐
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ ble belt routing and protection in the event of an
luminated. accident.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is in
Before fitting a child restraint system on the front front of the child seat's seat belt guide, carefully
passenger seat, make sure that the front and move the front passenger seat forwards until the
side airbags on the front passenger's side are best possible seat belt guide is achieved.
disabled. If the airbag cannot be deactivated, do
not fit child restraint systems. Backrest width
For further information: With adjustable backrest width: before fitting a
Key switch for front passenger airbags, see child restraint system on the front passenger
page 188. seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not
change the backrest width from this point on and
Rearward-facing child restraint systems do not retrieve a seat position from the memory.
DANGER
ISOFIX or i-Size child safety
If triggered, active front passenger airbags can
fatally injure a child in a child restraint system
seat fasteners
which is mounted facing backwards. There is a
danger of injury or danger to life. Make sure General
that the front passenger airbags are deactiva‐ Please comply with the operating and safety in‐
ted and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica‐ structions provided by the, child restraint system
tor light is illuminated. manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐
ing ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems.
126
i-Size child restraint systems The total weight of the child and child restraint
system must not exceed 33 kg, 73 lbs.
General
i-Size is a legal regulation for child restraint sys‐
Safety notes
tems which is used for the approval of child re‐
straint systems. WARNING
The system represents a further development of If the child restraint system lower anchors are
the ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners. not engaged correctly, the protective effect of
ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be at‐ the child restraint system will be restricted.
tached to anchors with i-Size markings. There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Make sure the lower anchor points have en‐
Icon Meaning gaged correctly and the child restraint system
If this icon is seen in the vehicle, rests firmly against the backrest.
the vehicle has also been ap‐
proved in accordance with i-
Size. The icon shows the WARNING
mounts for the system's lower The mounts for the lower anchors and the at‐
anchors. The lower anchors tachment points for child restraint systems are
meet the European i-Size re‐ intended for attaching child restraint systems
quirements. only. The mounts or attachment points can be
The corresponding icon shows damaged if other objects are attached. There is
the top tether eyelet. a danger of injury or material damage. Only at‐
tach child restraint systems to the correspond‐
ing mounts for the lower anchors or the attach‐
ment points.
Suitable ISOFIX or i-Size child Position

restraint systems
Only certain ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys‐ Icon Meaning
tems are permitted to be used on the designated
The corresponding icon shows
seats. The associated size class and size cate‐
the fixtures for the lower ISOFIX
gory are denoted by a letter or ISO reference on
anchors or i-Size mounting.
a plate on the child seat.
Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see
page 129.
Fixtures for lower anchors
General
Observe the following when attaching child re‐
straint systems with an integrated strap to the at‐
tachments for the lower anchors:
127
WARNING
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system will
be limited or lost. The rear seat backrest can
fold forward in certain situations, for example
when braking or in the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Make
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
The fixtures for the lower ISOFIX anchors are lo‐
cated behind the marked covers.
WARNING
Before fitting child restraint systems The mounts for the lower anchors and the at‐
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the child tachment points for child restraint systems are
seat mountings. intended for attaching child restraint systems
only. The mounts or attachment points can be
damaged if other objects are attached. There is
Fitting child restraint systems
a danger of injury or material damage. Only at‐
1. Install child restraint system, see the manu‐ tach child restraint systems to the correspond‐
facturer's instructions. ing mounts for the lower anchors or the attach‐
2. Make sure that the child restraint system at‐ ment points.
tachment correctly engages in the lower an‐
chor on both sides.
Attachment points for upper retaining
strap
Child restraint systems with
upper restraint strap Icon Meaning
The corresponding icon shows

Safety notes the top tether eyelet.
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect will be reduced. There is a danger of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
twisted and is not routed to the upper mount‐
ing point over sharp edges.
128
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the attachment point
1. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the head restraint mounts
to the attachment point.
2. Guide the retaining strap between the seat
backrest and the luggage compartment
cover.
Depending on the equipment, there are two or 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
three attachment points for the upper retaining securing eye.
strap of child restraint systems. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it firmly
down.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook of the upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Suitable seats for child restraint systems

General
The legal provisions determining which child seat For detailed information about using child re‐
is permitted for which age and body size may straint systems:
vary from country to country. Please comply with Seats for child restraint systems, see page 381.
the relevant national legal provisions.
Additional information is available from a Service
Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
129
Seats and child restraint systems

The following section provides information on
which child restraint system is suitable for which
seat in the vehicle.
Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:
Seat Airbag, Mounting

front pas‐
senger
3 a) ON
OFF
4, 6 - b)
e)
5 - c, d)
a) Adapt the forward/back position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the high‐
est position to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child seats on the rear seats, if necessary adjust the forward/back position of the front
seat and, if necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child seats with a support stand.
e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Right-hand drive vehicle, seats:
130
Seat Airbag, Mounting

front pas‐
senger
1 a) ON
OFF
4, 6 - b)
e)
5 - c, d)
a) Adapt the forward/back position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the high‐
est position to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child seats on the rear seats, if necessary adjust the forward/back position of the front
seat and, if necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child seats with a support stand.
e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
131
Icon Meaning Icon Meaning
Not suitable for child restraint systems. Suitable for ISOFIX child re‐
straint systems.
Suitable for Universal-category child restraint sys‐ Suitable for ISOFIX and i-
tems approved for use in this weight group. Size child restraint systems.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi-Uni‐ Suitable for child restraint
versal category if the vehicle and the seat location are systems with an upper re‐
listed in the list of vehicle types from the manufac‐ taining strap.
turer of the child restraint system.
Recommended child seats Safety notes
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐ WARNING

structions provided by the child restraint system
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐
withstand only those loads imposed by cor‐
ing child restraint systems.
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends stances are they to be used for adult seat belts,
the following child restraint systems: harnesses or for attaching other items or equip‐
▷ Maxi-Cosi CabrioFix. ment to the vehicle. After using and removing
▷ Maxi-Cosi EasyFix Base. child restraints, fold away the anchor brackets if
necessary.
▷ Römer TRIFIX 2.
▷ Römer KIDFIX series.
WARNING
For Australia: Child restraint If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system will
systems be limited or lost. The rear seat backrest can
fold forward in certain situations, for example
General when braking or in the event of an accident.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Make
In accordance with ADR 34/03, provisions have
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
been made to allow installation of a child restraint
system at each rear seat position.
The anchoring hooks which belong to the upper
restraining strap of the child restraint system - WARNING
AS 1754, can be applied immediately to the rele‐ If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
vant mount. on the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
Please refer strictly to the installation instructions fect will be reduced. There is a danger of injury.
supplied with the child restraint system. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
twisted and is not routed to the upper mount‐
Each seat position is fitted with a head restraint. ing point over sharp edges.
132
Attachment points Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the attachment point
Icon Meaning
1. Outer seats: guide the upper retaining strap
The corresponding icon shows between or along both sides of the head re‐
the top tether eyelet. straint mounts to the attachment point.
Middle seat: raise the head restraint if neces‐
sary by pressing the button on the brackets.
Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the head restraint mounts
to the attachment point.
2. Guide the retaining strap between the seat
backrest and the luggage compartment
cover.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
securing eye.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it firmly
down.
Depending on the equipment, there are two 5. Middle seat: push the head restraint down if
outer attachment points or three other attach‐ necessary and engage it in place.
ment points for child restraint systems with
tether straps.
Securing doors and windows in
Routing the retaining strap the rear
General
In certain situations, for example when carrying
children, it may be advisable to secure the rear
doors and windows.
Doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook of the upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Unlock or lock the safety switches on the rear
doors with the integrated key.
133
Icon Function
Child locks are unlocked.
Child locks are locked.
The respective door can now only be opened

from the outside.
Rear safety switch
Press the button on the driver's door.

Different functions are locked and cannot
be operated in the rear, for example the
window lifters.
134
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle equipment netic energy released into electric energy.
The electrical energy partially recharges the
high-voltage battery to increase the range.
functions which are offered or will be offered on ▷ The rear electric motor powers the rear
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ wheels.
ded in the vehicle in question. With xDrive, the vehicle has an electrical all-
For further information: wheel drive. The front wheels are powered by
the second electric motor.
Overview
BMW eDRIVE
Principle
BMW eDRIVE refers to the electric drive technol‐
ogy. The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage
system consisting of an electric motor on the
rear axle and a high-voltage battery. With xDrive,
a second electric motor is located on the front
axle.
1 High-voltage cables, orange
General 2 High-voltage charging socket
The eDRIVE system has the following special 3 Drive unit, rear
features: 4 High-voltage battery
▷ The vehicle is driven emission-free using its 5 With xDrive: drive unit, front
electric drivetrain.
▷ The special high-voltage battery supplies the
electric motors as well as the comfort func‐
Functions
tions with power.
Electric driving: eDRIVE
▷ The high-voltage battery is charged when
parked using a charging cable, for example, or The vehicle is driven by electric power.
when driving by energy recuperation. The accelerator pedal can be used not only for
▷ Charging can be carried out particularly accelerating but also for decelerating.
quickly at special charging stations. Charging During deceleration, the electric motors act as al‐
at domestic electric sockets is also possible. ternators and charge the high-voltage battery.
▷ While driving, energy recuperation ensures When an anticipatory driving style is adopted,
that as little energy as possible is lost from this function offers very efficient energy recuper‐
braking. ation and the comfort and convenience of driving
using only the accelerator.
▷ When the vehicle decelerates, the electric
motors act as alternators and convert the ki‐
135
CONTROLS Driving
Acoustic pedestrian protection ing driving style. The eDRIVE functions assist in
Depending on the national-market version, the controlling the range and increase it, if neces‐
acoustic protection for pedestrians generates a sary. The following descriptions provide an over‐
continuous driving noise. view of the functions available and the individual
measures that can be taken:
▷ With a stationary vehicle and turned on drive-
ready state as soon as the selector lever po‐
Before a journey
sition P is exited.
eDRIVE allows pre-conditioning of the vehicle
▷ When driving up to 30 km/h/20 mph.
before start of a journey. The pre-conditioning
A loudspeaker system plays the noise outside provides greater range than with complete air
the vehicle. conditioning while the vehicle is in motion.
As a result, other road users, for example pedes‐ Depending on the equipment: pre-temperature
trians or cyclists, can detect the vehicle better. setting while charging ensures that the maximum
range is available at the start of the journey.
Energy recuperation: CHARGE For further information:
When driving, the high-voltage battery is charged Pre-conditioning, see page 280.
by energy recuperation.
The electric motors act as alternators and con‐ Journey planning and special functions of
vert the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐ the navigation system
cal energy.
The navigation system offers special functions
The high-voltage battery can be charged while which take the electric range into account when
driving in different situations: planning a trip:
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐ ▷ Range map: displays the operating radius in
pressed. the navigation map, see integrated Owner's
▷ The accelerator pedal not depressed. Handbook.
▷ The pressure on the accelerator pedal is re‐ ▷ Charging station assistant under the Points of
duced. Interest in the navigation system helps in
finding and, if necessary, scheduling a stop at
Display a public charging station along the desired
route, see integrated Owner's Handbook.
The displays provide information about the drive
system's current status and illustrate how it is
being used. When driving
For further information: ▷ "ECO PRO": activate drive mode to increase
the range.
Displays, see page 153.
Energy-saving driving and maximising ▷ Information on the current driving condition.
range Displays in the Live Vehicle menu, driving
condition, see page 173.
General ▷ Follow notes to increase the range.
Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite for Increasing the range, see page 309.
as large a range as possible. eDRIVE provides ▷ Follow the notes for optimising driving style.
various functions that assist with an energy-sav‐
136
Driving CONTROLS
To use the eDRIVE system efficiently, see Service life of the high-voltage battery, long sta‐
page 311. tionary periods, see page 325.
▷ For efficient driving style, activate adaptive re‐
cuperation
For adaptive recuperation, recuperation, see
Start/Stop button
page 313.
Principle
After driving Drive-ready state is switched on and off by
▷ Charge the vehicle and plan the next trip. pressing the Start/Stop button.
Charging the vehicle, see page 316. Drive-ready state is switched on by pressing the
Start/Stop button with the brake applied.
▷ Follow preparations for long stationary peri‐
ods. Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state off again and standby state is
Service life of the high-voltage battery, long
switched on.
stationary periods and putting the vehicle out
of use, see page 325. Drive-ready state cannot be switched on when
the charging cable is connected.
BMW app For further information:
The BMW app provides mobility-based services ▷ Drive-ready state, see page 52.
and applications. ▷ Standby state, see page 52.
▷ Charging cable, see page 318.
Safety of the high-voltage system
Follow the information on the safety of the high-
voltage system. Drive-ready state in detail
Safety of the high-voltage system, see page 21. Safety note
Operating noises WARNING

Operating noises may arise due to the electrical An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
system. These operating noises can occur in the ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
following situations: leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
▷ When the high-voltage battery is being rolling away.
cooled during the charging process. Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
▷ When the high-voltage battery is being cle is secured against rolling away:
cooled when drive-ready state is switched on. ▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ When climate control is being used. ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
upward or downward gradients.
High-voltage battery, long stationary ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
periods or downward gradients, for example with a
Follow notes on laying up the vehicle and exten‐ chock.
ded stationary phases.
137
CONTROLS Driving
Switching on drive-ready state Selector lever positions

2. Press the brake.
Display
The engaged selector lever position is shown in
the instrument cluster and on the selector lever.
An acoustic signal sounds. Drive-ready state is
switched on. D drive position
Selector lever position for all normal driving.
When the brake pedal is released, the vehicle
The READY indicator shows that drives off slowly.
the vehicle is ready to drive.
R reverse gear
Only engage selector lever position R when the
vehicle is stationary.
Starting to drive
N neutral
Operating requirements In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be
pushed or can roll without drivetrain, for example
Driving is possible if the following conditions are
in car washes.
met:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently P Park
charged.
Selector lever position for parking the vehicle. In
▷ The driver's door is closed. selector lever position P, the drivetrain is
▷ Charging cable is disconnected. blocked.
Only engage selector lever position P when the
Driving vehicle is stationary.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
2. Press the brake and engage selector lever gaged in situations such as the following:
position D, B or R. ▷ After switching off drive-ready state when se‐
3. Release the parking brake. lector lever position D, R or B is engaged.
4. Drive away by applying the accelerator pedal. ▷ While drive-ready state is switched on and
selector lever position D, R or B is selected,
Charge state with widely fluctuating the driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driv‐
temperatures er's door is opened and neither the brake
pedal nor the accelerator pedal is pressed.
If there are significant temperature fluctuations
and the charge level of the high-voltage battery ▷ When standby state is switched off.
is low, it might no longer be possible to start the Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
vehicle for the next trip. Recharge the vehicle in tor lever position P is engaged and the parking
good time if the charge state is low. brake is engaged. The vehicle could otherwise
start to move.
Parking brake, see page 145.
138
Driving CONTROLS
B drive position with highest energy ▷ Inadvertent shifting to selector lever posi‐
recovery tion R.
▷ Inadvertent change from selector lever posi‐
Principle tion P to another selector lever position.
Selector lever position B is the drive position with 1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
the highest energy recovery. 2. Press and hold the button to cancel the se‐
lector lever lock.
General
Selector lever position B offers the following
characteristic:
▷ High level of energy recuperation when the
accelerator pedal is released.
▷ Major deceleration when releasing the accel‐
erator pedal, if necessary to a standstill of the
vehicle.
▷ The vehicle does not drive off when the brake
pedal is released. 3. Briefly tap the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if required.
Engaging selector lever positions The selector lever returns to the centre posi‐
tion when released.
General
Keep the brake applied until you are ready to
drive off, otherwise the vehicle will move when a
drive position is selected.
▷ The selector lever will only move from posi‐
tion P to another selector lever position if
drive-ready state is switched on and the
brake is pressed.
▷ It may not be possible to move out of selector
Engaging selector lever position P
lever position P until all technical conditions
are met.
▷ Before shifting out of selector lever position
P, remove the charging cable from the vehi‐
cle; otherwise, the gearshift request will not
be executed.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R

A selector lever lock prevents the following incor‐
rect operation: Press button P.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging selector lever position B Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General
In some situations, the vehicle may need to roll a
short distance without drivetrain, for example in a
car wash, or when being pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTE
Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐
sition D to the left.
When stopping the vehicle switch off standby state in car washes.
Selector lever position D or R 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

the brake.
On uphill gradients, the system prevents the ve‐
hicle from rolling against the selected direction of 2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
travel and provides assistance when driving off. 3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
4. Press the brake.
Selector lever position B
5. Operate the selector lever lock and engage
The system prevents the vehicle from rolling selector lever position N.
when it has come to a standstill and the acceler‐
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
ator pedal is not pressed.
Standby state then remains switched on and
Automatic parking brake a Check Control message is shown.
The parking brake is automatically applied when The vehicle can now roll.
the vehicle is stationary in the following condi‐ Irrespective of standby state, selector lever posi‐
tions: tion P is engaged automatically after approxi‐
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. mately 35 minutes.
▷ The driver's door is opened. If there is a fault, it may not be possible to
change the selector lever position.
Driving off Unlock the parking lock electronically if neces‐
Engage a drive position and step on the acceler‐ sary.
ator pedal to drive off.
The parking brake is automatically released.
Unlocking the parking lock
electronically
General
Unlock the parking lock electronically to ma‐
noeuvre the vehicle out of danger.
140
Driving CONTROLS
Before unlocking the parking lock, secure the ve‐ Service life of the high-voltage battery, long sta‐
hicle to prevent it from rolling away, for example tionary periods and putting the vehicle out of
with a chock. use, see page 325.
Engaging selector lever position N

1. Press the Start/Stop button three times; do
Driving in detail: eDRIVE
not press the brake when doing so.
2. Press the brake. Safety notes
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
row 1, and press the selector lever to posi‐ DANGER
tion N. The brake effect of the electric motor may be
A corresponding Check Control message is stronger than the effect in a vehicle with inter‐
shown. nal combustion engine. A sudden decrease in
Position N is displayed on the selector lever. speed can lead to a hindrance to other road
users. There is a risk of accident. Gently release
the accelerator pedal. Adapt your driving style
to the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic sit‐
uation and intervene actively if the situation
warrants it.
WARNING
When driving using electric power, pedestrians
and other road-users might not become aware
4. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and
of the vehicle as they normally would due to the
then secure it against rolling away.
lack of engine noise. There is a risk of accident.
Switching off drive-ready state Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
When shutting down the vehicle, electrical sys‐ tively if the situation warrants it.
tem operating noises may be heard, for example
if the high-voltage battery is being cooled.
After stopping: WARNING
1. Press the brake and engage selector lever Without energy recuperation, the braking effect
position P. of the electric drivetrain is not available. The ve‐
2. Apply the parking brake. hicle may roll further than usual. There is a risk
of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traf‐
3. Press the Start/Stop button. fic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
The READY display is no longer illuminated intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
and an acoustic signal is heard.
For longer stationary periods, follow the notes in
the mobility chapter.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Accelerator pedal positions, displays Energy recuperation: CHARGE

With the CHARGE energy recovery, the electric
motors acts as alternators when decelerating and
convert the kinetic energy of the vehicle to elec‐
trical energy.
Energy recuperation partially re-charges the
high-voltage battery.
Energy can be recuperated if the following con‐
ditions are met:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
1 Deceleration and recuperation, CHARGE
▷ Selector lever position B, D or R is engaged.
2 Rolling
▷ The accelerator pedal not depressed or only
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER slightly depressed.
Energy recuperation is shown in the instrument
Deceleration and energy recuperation cluster.
Deceleration Power display, see page 163.
The intensity of the deceleration depends on the Energy cannot be recovered, for example in the
selector lever position, energy recuperation set‐ following situations:
ting and the driving situation.
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.
Depending on the intensity of the deceleration,
▷ While driving stability control systems are ac‐
the brake lights illuminate, without the brake
tive or controlling the vehicle, even though
pedal being applied.
this is not indicated by an indicator light.
Powerful deceleration is achieved in selector
▷ The high-voltage battery is completely
lever position B.
charged.
During deceleration, the energy is recuperated
▷ When the temperature of the high-voltage
and the high-voltage battery charged.
battery is very low or very high.
Reduced deceleration In winter, it is possible that energy recupera‐

tion is temporarily not available after starting.
WARNING Examples of driving situations

Without energy recuperation, the braking effect If a deceleration process is anticipated while driv‐
of the electric drivetrain is not available. The ve‐ ing, this can be used for energy recuperation.
hicle may roll further than usual. There is a risk
The following examples of driving situations may
of accident. Adapt your driving style to the traf‐
be suitable for this:
fic conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ Deceleration on a downhill gradient.
▷ Deceleration before a red light.
If there is a risk, for example, of locking wheels, Avoid late or heavy braking. Instead, decelerate
energy recuperation – and hence deceleration – the vehicle by energy recuperation.
is reduced to prevent unstable driving conditions.
142
Driving CONTROLS
Level of energy recuperation side temperatures and direct sunlight. If the high-
High energy recuperation and powerful decelera‐ voltage battery overheats, drive-ready state can‐
tion are achieved in selector lever position B. not be switched on.
For driving in selector lever position D, the A Check Control message is shown.
strength of energy recovery can be adjusted via A message is also shown when drive-ready state
iDrive. is available again.
▷ Depending on the equipment, adaptive en‐
ergy recovery: energy recovery and decelera‐ While the vehicle is moving
tion are automatically adapted to the respec‐ If the high-voltage battery overheats during the
tive driving situation. journey, the drive power is reduced in steps to
Adaptive recuperation, recuperation, see cool down the high-voltage battery. The ePO‐
page 313. WER power display in the instrument cluster
drops. If the temperature continues to rise, stop
▷ High energy recuperation: the vehicle decel‐
the vehicle until the high-voltage battery has
erates powerfully, more energy is fed back
cooled down. If the power display falls to 0, drive-
into the high-voltage battery.
ready state is switched off and the vehicle comes
▷ Medium energy recuperation. to a standstill.
▷ Low energy recuperation: the vehicle decel‐
erates less powerfully, less energy is fed back
into the high-voltage battery. i4 M50: Launch Control
Setting the strength of energy recovery Principle
1. "MENU" When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch
2. "Vehicle apps" Control permits optimised acceleration on a road
3. "Driving settings" surface that offers plenty of grip.
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

General
5. "Energy recovery in D"
Use of Launch Control causes premature com‐
6. Select the desired setting. ponent wear, as the function subjects the vehicle
to very high stresses and loads.
Heavily discharged high-voltage Do not use Launch Control when running in.
battery
When starting with Launch Control, do not turn
If the high-voltage battery is heavily discharged the steering wheel.
during driving, the drive power and some comfort
functions are reduced gradually in order to ex‐
tend the range. Running in, see page 298.
Overheated high-voltage battery Driving off with Launch Control

When the vehicle is stationary 2. Activate SPORT BOOST with Driving Experi‐
In exceptional cases it is possible that the high- ence Control.
voltage battery overheats significantly when the 3. Press the brake firmly with the left foot.
vehicle is stationary, for example in extreme out‐
143
CONTROLS Driving
4. Depress the accelerator pedal all the way Displays in the instrument cluster
down and hold it.
The selected drive mode is
A destination flag is shown in the instrument shown in the instrument cluster.
cluster.
5. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the
destination flag illuminating.
The vehicle accelerates.
Launch Control remains active as long as the Drive modes
destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐
tor pedal remains depressed. Button Drive mode
SPORT SPORT
Driving Experience Control SPORT INDIVIDUAL

SPORT BOOST
Principle COMFORT COMFORT

Driving Experience Control influences the driving ECO PRO ECO PRO
dynamics characteristics of the vehicle.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Various drive modes allow the vehicle to be
adapted to suit the situation.
Activating/deactivating the drive mode
General Press the button of the desired drive mode re‐
peatedly until the desired drive mode is dis‐
The following systems are influenced, for exam‐
played in the instrument cluster.
ple:
When the drive mode is changed, the current
▷ Drivetrain.
drive mode is deactivated.
▷ Suspension.
▷ Steering. Drive modes in detail
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise Control. COMFORT
The COMFORT drive mode is a balanced set‐
Overview ting between sporty and consumption-optimised
driving.
Depending on the equipment: SPORT

The SPORT drive mode is a dynamic setting for
greater agility with an optimised suspension.
Depending on the equipment: SPORT

BOOST
If available, the electric motor provides additional
output in the SPORT BOOST drive mode. Dy‐
namic setting for maximum agility with an adap‐
ted drivetrain.
144
Driving CONTROLS
The additional output is accessed via the accel‐ Safety notes

erator pedal while SPORT BOOST is active. A
display in the instrument cluster indicates the
availability of the BOOST output. WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
ECO PRO ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
The ECO PRO drive mode provides a consump‐ leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
tion-optimised setting. rolling away.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
INDIVIDUAL configuration cle is secured against rolling away:
General ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
The most recent custom configuration is activa‐ upward or downward gradients.
ted when the drive mode is called up again. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
Configuring and resetting chock.
For example, ECO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:
1. "MENU" WARNING
2. "Vehicle apps" Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
3. "Driving settings" can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
4. "Drivetrain and chassis" themselves or other road users, for example by
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default
setting: ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD" ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Activating the drive mode configuration There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
Press the button of the desired drive mode sev‐ leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
eral times. cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
145
CONTROLS Driving
Overview With Emergency Stop Assistant

Briefly press the switch to activate the
Button in the vehicle emergency stop function.
Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 210.
Release the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually

Parking brake
2. Press the switch with the brake ap‐
plied or the selector lever in position P.
The LED and indicator light are extinguished.
Applying the parking brake The parking brake is released.
When the vehicle is stationary Releasing the parking brake automatically

Pull the switch. The parking brake is automatically released on
The LED is illuminated. driving off.
The LED and indicator light are extinguished.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated red. Malfunction
The parking brake is engaged. If the parking brake has failed or malfunctioned,
secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away
While the vehicle is moving before leaving the vehicle.
The parking brake can be used as an emergency A Check Control message is shown.
braking function while driving: After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent it
from rolling away, for example with a chock.
Pull and hold the switch. The vehicle
brakes hard for as long as the switch is
pulled. After an open circuit
To restore the operability of the parking brake af‐
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter a power failure, an initialisation may be re‐
ter is illuminated red, a signal sounds and quired.
the brake lights illuminate.
1. Switch on standby state.
Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is sta‐ 2. Pull the switch with the brake applied
tionary. or the selector lever in position P and then
press it.
The procedure can take a few seconds. Any
sounds that occur are normal.
146
Driving CONTROLS
The indicator light is extinguished once

the parking brake is operational again. WARNING
Automatic Hold themselves or other road users, for example by
Principle ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Automatic Hold provides assistance by automati‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.

cally applying and releasing the brake, for exam‐ ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
ple in stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
The vehicle is held automatically when at a ▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
standstill.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
from rolling back when driving off. cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
General
The parking brake is automatically applied in the
following conditions: NOTE
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. Automatic Hold applies the parking brake when
▷ When the driver's door is opened while the the vehicle is stationary and will prevent the ve‐
vehicle is stationary. hicle from rolling in car washes. There is a risk
of material damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold
▷ If the moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
before driving into the car wash.
with the parking brake.
Safety notes Overview
WARNING Button in the vehicle

ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
rolling away.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
cle is secured against rolling away:
upward or downward gradients.
Automatic Hold
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
chock.
147
CONTROLS Driving
Activating the Automatic Hold Deactivating operational readiness

function Press the button.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. The LED is extinguished.
The indicator light extinguishes.

2. Press the button.
The LED is illuminated.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
The indicator light illuminates green.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
Automatic Hold is ready to operate.
also depress the brake when deactivating.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last se‐
lected setting is retained.
Turn indicator
Automatic Hold holds the vehicle
The function is activated and the driver's door is Turn indicator in exterior mirror
closed. Do not fold in the exterior mirrors while driving or
Once the vehicle has stopped, it is auto‐ while operating the turn indicators or hazard
matically secured from rolling once the warning lights to ensure that the indicator lamps
indicator light illuminates green. in the exterior mirrors are well recognisable.
Indicating
Driving off
To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.
The brake is released automatically and the park‐
ing brake indicator light is extinguished.
Automatic activation of the parking

brake
The parking brake is applied automatically if
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited while Automatic Hold is holding the vehi‐ Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
cle.
The indicator light changes from green One-touch signalling
to red. Briefly tap the lever up or down.
The parking brake is not applied automatically if The duration of the one-touch signalling can be
drive-ready state was switched off while the ve‐ set.
hicle was rolling to a stop. Automatic Hold is 1. "MENU"
temporarily deactivated in this case.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
148
Driving CONTROLS
5. "One-touch indicator" Safety notes

WARNING
Indicating a turn briefly
If the wipers start moving when they are folded
Press the lever as far as the resistance point and away from the windscreen, parts of the body
hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a may become trapped or the vehicle may be
turn. damaged. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched
off when the wipers are folded away from the
High-beam headlight, headlight windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact
flasher with the windscreen when switching on.
Press the lever forwards or pull it back.

NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper blades
to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat.
There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the
windscreen before switching on the wipers.
Switching on the wiper system

▷ High-beam headlight on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlight is illuminated when
the low-beam headlight is switched on.
▷ High-beam headlight off/headlight flasher, ar‐
row 2.

ter is illuminated when the high-beam
headlight is switched on.
Press the lever upwards to the desired position.
▷ Rest position of the wipers, position 0.
Wiper system ▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
General When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers
Do not use the wipers on a dry windscreen, oth‐ switch to intermittent mode.
erwise the wiper blades will wear or become ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
damaged more quickly. When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers
switch to normal speed.
If a journey is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when the journey is resumed, the
149
CONTROLS Driving
wipers continue operating at the previous set‐ Activating the rain sensor
ting.
Switching off the wiper system and

flick wiping
Press the lever upwards once from position 0, ar‐

row 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Press the lever down.
If there is frost, wiping may not start.
▷ To switch off: press lever downwards until
position 0 is reached.
▷ To flick wipe: press the lever downwards
Deactivating the rain sensor
from position 0. Press the lever back to position 0.
The lever returns to position 0 when re‐
leased. Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper
operation depending on the rain intensity.
General
The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di‐ Turn the knurled wheel to set the sensitivity of
rectly in front of the interior mirror. the rain sensor.
Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Safety note
Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sensor.
NOTE
In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently
start moving if the rain sensor is activated.
There is a risk of material damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.
150
Driving CONTROLS
Window washer system Safety notes
Safety notes WARNING

If the wipers start moving when they are folded
WARNING away from the windscreen, parts of the body
At low temperatures, the washer fluid can may become trapped or the vehicle may be
freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visibil‐ damaged. There is a risk of injury or material
ity. There is a risk of accident. Only use the damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched
washer systems if there is no possibility of the off when the wipers are folded away from the
washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze if required. windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
NOTE
NOTE
If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
washer pump cannot operate as intended. If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
There is a risk of material damage. Do not use switching them on may cause the wiper blades
the washer system with the washer fluid reser‐ to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat.
voir empty. There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the
windscreen before switching on the wipers.
Cleaning the windscreen
Pull the lever.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windscreen di‐
rectly in front of the wiper blade as the wipers
move up.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
The wipers can be folded out from the wind‐
screen in the fold-out position. This is necessary
for example when replacing the wiper blades or
to keep them away from the windscreen when
there is frost.
151
CONTROLS Driving
Folding out the wipers

1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until the
wipers stop in an approximately vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Lift the wipers completely away from the

windscreen.
Folding in the wipers

1. Fold the wipers fully down onto the wind‐
screen.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
The wipers move back to the rest position
and are operational once again.
152
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle equipment 5 Power display 163
6 Range 165
This chapter describes equipment, systems and 7 Selector lever position 137
Outside temperature 165
ded in the vehicle in question. 8 Central display area, configurable 153
For further information: Navigation display
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. Charge display 155
Digital speed
Trip odometer, see Trip data 171
Instrument cluster
9 Drive mode 144
10 Speed Limit Assist 237
Principle
Speed Limit Info 167
The instrument cluster is a variable display. The
displays and the layout adjust to the respective 11 Time 165
drive mode. 12 Charging status display of the high-voltage
battery 163
General
The displays in the instrument cluster can some‐ Operating elements on the steering
times differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
wheel
Handbook.
Operating Function
Overview element
Display menu bar in the instru‐

ment cluster: press button.
Selection to the left or right:

press the corresponding arrow
key.
Selection up or down: turn

knurled wheel.
1 Speedometer Confirm selection: press knurled
wheel.
2 Driver assistance systems 224
3 Driver Attention Camera 218
4 Selection lists 170
Configuring the central display area
The contents for the central display area in the
Using eDRIVE efficiently 311.
instrument cluster can be individually configured
Check Control 156
153
CONTROLS Displays
and displayed, for example, the display of trip Settings

data.
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
be adjusted individually via iDrive, for example, a
second actual speed.
wheel. 1. "MENU"
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument 2. "Vehicle apps"
cluster. 3. "Displays"
2. "CONTENT" 4. "Instrument cluster"
If applicable, select the menu via the arrow 5. Select the desired setting.
buttons.
3. Using the knurled wheel, select the desired
setting: Assisted View
▷ Reduced display.
▷ Trip data. Principle
▷ Assisted View. Depending on the equipment and if driver assis‐
▷ With navigation system: route preview. tance is active, information about the driver as‐
sistance systems appears in an animated vehicle
▷ With navigation system: map view.
environment.
▷ Entertainment.
Some contents for the central display area can General
also be configured as a view in the Head-up dis‐ Depending on the settings, information on active
play. Driver Assistance can be displayed permanently
For further information: or temporarily in the instrument cluster.
Head-up display, see page 174.
Safety note
Configuring the layout
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout can be in‐ WARNING
dividually configured and displayed in the instru‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐
ment cluster. sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐
ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
1. Press the button on the steering traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
wheel. and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "LAYOUT" Permanent display
If applicable, select the menu via the arrow The information for the driver assistance can be
buttons. configured permanently in the central display
area of the instrument cluster.
3. Select the required setting via the knurled
wheel. For further information:
154
Displays CONTROLS
Configuring the central display area, see System limits

page 153.
The detection capability of the system is limited.
Only objects detected by the system are taken
Temporary display
into account.
1. "MENU"
The system may indicate something wrong.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
▷ Cameras, see page 47.
4. "Instrument cluster"
▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
5. "Display Assisted View when driver
assistance is active"
Charge display
Display
Principle
The charging screen displays information about
the charging process in the instrument cluster.
General
The displays in the instrument cluster can some‐
times differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Handbook.
An example with active driver assistance: the in‐ For further information:
dicator and warning lights for the distance con‐ Charging the vehicle, see page 316.
trol and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a
lane change to the next lane. At the same time,
the lane change to the next lane is shown with
animation in the Assisted View.
155
CONTROLS Displays
Overview
1 Current charging power 324 5 Current range 324

2 Set target charge 324 Current state of charge 324
3 Set departure time 325 6 Range when reaching the charging destina‐
Time for end of charging 324 tion 324
4 Air conditioning 325 7 Set or maximum current limitation 316
Check Control Hiding Check Control messages

To hide Check Control messages, press
Principle the left arrow button on the steering
wheel.
Check Control monitors vehicle functions and
alerts you to any faults in the monitored systems.
Continuous display
General Some Check Control messages are displayed
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ permanently and remain until the fault has been
bination of indicator or warning lights and text repaired. If a number of malfunctions have occur‐
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ red at the same time, the messages are dis‐
cable, in the Head-up display. played in succession.
An acoustic signal may also be output and a text The messages can be hidden for approximately
message shown on the control display. 8 seconds. Afterwards they are displayed again
automatically.
156
Displays CONTROLS
Temporary display 5. "Vehicle status"

Some Check Control messages are automati‐ 6. "Check Control"
cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds. The 7. Select the required text message.
Check Control messages remain stored and can
be displayed again.
Messages displayed at the end of the

Displaying saved Check Control journey
messages
Certain messages displayed when driving are
1. "MENU" displayed again when drive-ready state is
2. "Vehicle apps" switched off.
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
Indicator and warning lights
5. "Vehicle status"
6. "Check Control" Principle
7. Select a text message. Indicator and warning lights in the instrument
cluster display the status of some functions in
Display the vehicle. Indicator and warning lights indicate
faults in monitored systems.
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is General
displayed or saved. Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colours.
Text messages When switching on drive-ready state, the func‐

tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐
Text messages and an icon in the instrument
minate briefly.
cluster explain what a Check Control message
means and what the indicator and warning lights
signify.
Red lights
Supplementary text messages Acoustic seat belt warning

Additional information, for example the cause of Seat belt is not buckled.
the fault and any action required, can be called For further information:
up via Check Control. Acoustic seat belt warning, see
With urgent text messages, the added text will be page 115.
automatically displayed on the control display.
It is possible to select additional assistance de‐ Airbag system
pending on the Check Control message.
The indicator light illuminates briefly: this
1. "MENU" indicates that the entire airbag system
2. "Vehicle apps" and seat belt tensioners are operational
3. "Live Vehicle" when the vehicle is switched on.
4. "Content"
157
CONTROLS Displays
The indicator light illuminates continuously: there Indicator light illuminates: risk of collision
is a malfunction. Have the vehicle checked im‐ with a vehicle with unidentifiable direc‐
mediately by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ tion of travel or advance warning of vehi‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a cles crossing your own direction of travel.
specialist workshop. The driver must intervene personally, for exam‐
For further information: ple by braking.
Airbags, see page 186. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
sounds: acute warning of vehicles crossing your
own direction of travel.
Parking brake
Brake and take avoidance manoeuvre if neces‐
The parking brake is engaged. sary.
Parking brake, see page 145.
Crossroads Warning with city braking function,
see page 197.
Brake system
Fault in the brake system, braking power Pedestrian Warning with city braking
assistance may be faulty. Continue driv‐ function
ing at moderate speed. Avoid abrupt Indicator light is illuminated and an
braking, take longer stopping distance into ac‐ acoustic signal sounds: imminent colli‐
count. sion with a detected pedestrian or a cy‐
Have the vehicle checked immediately by a Serv‐ clist.
ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ Take action yourself immediately by braking or
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. swerving.
Collision Warning with braking function Pedestrian Warning with city braking function,
Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐ see page 196.
ing. Brake and increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic Cruise Control with distance control
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and take
avoidance manoeuvre if necessary. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
signal sounds: brake and take avoidance
For further information: manoeuvre, if necessary.
Collision Warning with braking function, see For further information:
page 195.
Active Cruise Control with distance control, see
page 229.
Crossroads Warning with city braking
function
Steering and Lane Control Assistant
Risk of collision with crossing vehicle
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
from right.
signal sounds: the system is switching
off.
from left. For further information:
158
Displays CONTROLS
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability
page 241. Control malfunction or initialising. No driving sta‐
bilisation.
Yellow lights Have the system checked immediately by a

Steering and Lane Control Assistant
shop.
Indicator light illuminates and an acoustic For further information:
signal may sound: a system interruption
is imminent. Dynamic Stability Control, see page 220.
Indicator light flashing: lane boundary has been

driven over. Dynamic Stability Control deactivated or
For further information: Dynamic Traction Control activated
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
page 241. or Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS ▷ Dynamic Stability Control, see page 220.
Avoid sudden braking. Bear in mind that ▷ Dynamic Traction Control, see page 222.
stopping distances will be longer.
System failure. Ease of steering is re‐ Flat tyre monitor (RPA)
stricted during emergency braking.
Flat tyre monitor (RPA) reports a tyre
Have the vehicle checked immediately by a Serv‐ pressure loss in a tyre.
Reduce your speed and carefully stop
the vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden
steering manoeuvres.
Front-collision warning For further information:
Depending on the national-market ver‐ Flat tyre monitor (RPA), see page 345.
sion: the system is restricted or failed.
Tyre Pressure Monitor

Depending on the national-market ver‐
sion: the system is deactivated. Indicator light illuminates: the Tyre Pres‐
sure Monitor is reporting a low tyre infla‐
For further information: tion pressure or a flat tyre. Note the infor‐
Front-collision warning, see page 192. mation in the Check Control message.
Indicator light flashes and then illuminates con‐
Dynamic Stability Control tinuously: the system is unable to detect flat
tyres or tyre pressure losses.
Indicator light flashes: Dynamic Stability
Control controls the drive and brake ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
forces. The vehicle is being stabilised. same radio frequency: the system is auto‐
Decrease speed and adjust driving style to the
road conditions.
159
CONTROLS Displays
matically reactivated upon leaving the field of Lane Change Warning, see page 202.
interference.
▷ For tyres with special approval: the Tyre Rear fog light
Pressure Monitor was unable to complete the Rear fog light is switched on.
reset. Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐
Rear fog light, see page 183.
ted: if necessary have it checked by a Service
Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. Acoustic pedestrian protection
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Acoustic protection for pedestrians has
Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ failed. Increased caution when manoeu‐
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist vring.
workshop.
In case of repeated malfunctions, have the sys‐
For further information: tem checked by a manufacturer Service Partner
Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 338. or another qualified Service Partner or specialist
workshop.
Steering system For further information:

Acoustic pedestrian protection, see page 136
The steering system may be faulty.
Have the system checked by a Service
Partner of the manufacturer or another Charging capacity restricted
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ For further information:
shop.
Charging the vehicle, see page 316.
Lane Departure Warning

Green lights
sion: the system is restricted, deactivated Turn indicators
or has failed.
The turn indicator is switched on.
For further information: If the indicator light flashes more rapidly
Lane Departure Warning, see page 199. than usual, a turn indicator bulb has
failed.
Lane Change Warning For further information:
Depending on the national-market ver‐ Turn indicators, see page 148.
sion: the indicator light illuminates, if ap‐
plicable, in combination with a Check
Control message: the system is restricted or has
Side lights
failed. The side lights are switched on.
sion: the system is switched off. Side light, low-beam headlight and park‐
ing light, see page 178
160
Displays CONTROLS
Low-beam headlight The function is activated and the driver's

door is closed. The vehicle is automati‐
The low-beam headlight is switched on.
cally secured against rolling after stop‐
For further information: ping.
Side light, low-beam headlight and park‐
ing light, see page 178 For further information:
Automatic Hold, see page 147.
High-beam Assistant Manual Speed Limiter

Low-beam headlight is switched on and
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
the High-beam Assistant is activated.
switched on.
The high-beam headlight is switched on
Indicator light flashes: set speed limit is
and off automatically according to traffic situa‐
exceeded.
tion.
Manual Speed Limiter, see page 224.
High-beam Assistant, see page 182.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
sion: indicator light illuminates: a lane For further information:
boundary has been detected on at least Cruise Control, see page 226.
one side of vehicle and warnings can be issued.
Indicator light flashes: the vehicle is going to Cruise Control with distance control
drive across the lane boundary.
Indicator light illuminates: system has de‐
For further information: tected a vehicle ahead. The vehicle icon
Lane Departure Warning, see page 199. goes out if no vehicle in front is detected.
Indicator light flashes: vehicle in front has driven
Lane Change Warning off.
Depending on the national-market ver‐ For further information:

sion: the system is switched on. Warn‐ Active Cruise Control with distance control, see
ings and, if necessary, steering interven‐ page 229.
tions can occur within the system limits.
For further information: Speed Limit Assist
Lane Change Warning, see page 202.
The detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button. As soon as the
Automatic Hold speed limit has been adopted, a green
tick is displayed.
Automatic Hold is ready to operate. The
vehicle is held automatically when at a For further information:
standstill. Speed Limit Assist, see page 237.
161
CONTROLS Displays
Steering and Lane Control Assistant Grey lights

The system is activated and assists in
keeping the vehicle in the driving lane. Cruise Control with distance control
For further information: Indicator light flashes: the requirements
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see for operation of the system are no longer
page 241. being met. The system has been deacti‐
vated but will continue to brake until you actively
take over by depressing the brake or accelerator
Lane Change Assistant pedal.
Green arrow icon for lane-changing: the For further information:
system is carrying out a lane change. Active Cruise Control with distance control, see
page 229.
Grey line for lane marking on the appro‐
priate side: the system has detected the
lane change request. Lane change not Steering and Lane Control Assistant
currently possible. System is on standby and does not make
any steering wheel movement.
The system activates automatically when
sion:
all operating requirements are met.
Grey arrow icon for lane-changing: lane
change not possible; operating requirements not
met. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 241.
Lane Change Assistant, see page 246. Assisted Driving Plus
Assisted Driving Plus The system is interrupted and activates
automatically as soon as all functional re‐
The system is active. quirements are met.
For further information: For further information:
Assisted Driving Plus, see page 244. Assisted Driving Plus, see page 244.
Blue lights White lights

High-beam headlight Cruise Control with distance control
The high-beam headlight has been No display of distance control as the ac‐
switched on. celerator pedal is being pressed.
For further information: For further information:
▷ High-beam headlight, see page 149. Active Cruise Control with distance control, see
page 229.
▷ High-beam Assistant, see page 182.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Assisted Driving Plus General

The system is ready. The available drive power may be reduced due
For further information: to the following factors:
Assisted Driving Plus, see page 244. ▷ Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.
▷ Extreme outside temperatures.
▷ Prolonged or high-power driving, for example,
Charging status display with a sporty driving style or uphill driving.
▷ Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: drive power limitation is de‐
Safety note
fined with the BMW Digital Key.
The grey ePOWER area is automatically adjus‐
WARNING ted.
Even when the display shows that the high- Icons in the power display indicate if the drive
voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage power has been reduced.
system will still be carrying high-voltage. There
is a risk of injury or fire. Do not touch or modify Example Description
live parts, for example orange high-voltage ca‐ icon
bles, even if the batteries are empty.
Reduced drive power due to
cold drivetrain.
Display Reduced drive power due to in‐

With turned on standby state and creased drive temperature.
drive-ready state, the available A Check Control message is
battery charge state of the high- shown where applicable.
voltage battery is continuously
displayed in percent in the instru‐
The intensity of the energy recuperation de‐
ment cluster.
pends on the energy recuperation settings.
An arrow next to the battery icon indicates the
vehicle side on which the charging socket flap is
located. ▷ BMW Digital Key, see page 96.
In case of temperature fluctuations, the battery ▷ Increasing the range, see page 309.
charge state may change. ▷ Driving in detail: eDRIVE, see page 141.
Power display
Principle
The power display indicates the currently drawn
drive power as a percentage of the overall power.
163
CONTROLS Displays
Display SPORT BOOST display

In SPORT BOOST drive mode,
increased power can be tempora‐
rily accessed, for example for very
fast acceleration during overtak‐
ing.
The availability of the increased power, Boost, is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Display Meaning
In COMFORT and ECO PRO drive modes:
White More power is available but has
Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ not yet been accessed.
ergy recuperation achieved when rolling to a stop
or or when decelerating. Blue More power is being accessed.
Pointer in the area of arrow 2: power as a per‐ When accessed, the Boost dis‐
centage. play empties accordingly.
Grey More power is not available, for

Recuperation display example if the drivetrain is cold.
Depending on the setting for the recuperation,

the display in the power display will change. For further information:
Driving Experience Control, see page 144.
Icon Meaning
Low energy recuperation.

Selector lever position D is en‐
Standby state and drive-ready
gaged. state
Medium energy recuperation.
OFF in the instrument cluster in‐
Selector lever position D is en‐ dicates that drive-ready state is
gaged. switched off and standby state is
High energy recuperation. switched on.
Selector lever position D or B is

engaged. READY indicates drive-ready
state.
Adaptive recuperation is activa‐
ted.
Adaptive recuperation, see
page 313. For further information:
Vehicle operating condition, see page 51.
164
Displays CONTROLS
Date and time Safety note
Various settings can be configured for the dis‐ WARNING

play of date and time, for example the date for‐
Even at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉
mat.
there may be an increased risk of black ice, for
Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ example on bridges or on shaded sections of
ket version, the time zone can be set and the au‐ road. There is a risk of accident. At low temper‐
tomatic time setting can be activated. The auto‐ atures, adjust driving style to the weather con‐
matic time setting automatically updates the ditions.
time, date and, if necessary, the time zone.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Range
4. "Date and time" General
5. Select the desired settings. The anticipated range for the energy stored in
the high-voltage battery is permanently displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Selecting the units of Always ensure that the range is sufficient for the
measurement planned trip. The range is dynamic and may
change abruptly.
Depending on the national-market version, it is The range can be reduced or increased based
possible to select the units of measurement for on the following factors:
various values, for example, consumption, distan‐
▷ Driving style.
ces and temperature.
▷ Traffic conditions.
1. "MENU"
▷ Driving mode change.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Climate and terrain conditions.
▷ Settings of the automatic air conditioning.
4. "Units"
▷ After a route has been calculated by the navi‐
5. Select the desired menu item. gation system, depending on the route pro‐
6. Select the desired setting. file, the route length and the selected speed.
▷ When leaving a route or recalculating a route.
Information about the current range can be dis‐
Outside temperature played in the instrument cluster.
Check Control messages alert you when the
General range is low.
If the display drops to +3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, a
signal sounds.
There is an increased risk of black ice.
165
CONTROLS Displays

Service requirements
▷ Increasing the range, see page 309.
Principle
Display
The function shows the current service require‐
The range is continuously dis‐ ments and related maintenance jobs.
played in the instrument cluster.
General
The distance or time remaining until the next
service is displayed briefly in the instrument clus‐
ter after drive-ready state is switched on.
Range with active route guidance
The current service requirements can be read
The icon is displayed next to the range when
out from the vehicle key by a service advisor.
a route guidance was started in the navigation
system. Information from the navigation system
is taken into account for the calculation of the Display
current range.
Detailed information on service
Heavily discharged high-voltage requirements
battery More detailed information on the maintenance
work required can be displayed on the control
High-voltage battery is heavily display.
discharged. The drive power is re‐
duced. Heating and air condition‐ 1. "MENU"
ing functions are disabled. 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
In this state, an exact calculation of the range is
4. "Content"
no longer possible. A low range may be available
depending on the environmental conditions. 5. "Vehicle status"
Re-activating the drive-ready state can help to 6. "Service requirements"
increase the range slightly, for example to move Maintenance routines and any statutory in‐
the vehicle from a danger area. spections required are displayed.
7. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐
Charge state with widely fluctuating mation.
temperatures
If there are significant temperature fluctuations
and the charge level of the high-voltage battery
is low, it might no longer be possible to start the
vehicle for the next trip. Recharge the vehicle in
good time if the charge state is low.
166
Displays CONTROLS
Icons Displays
1. "MENU"
Icon Description
2. "Vehicle apps"
No service is currently needed. 3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
Maintenance or a statutory in‐ 5. "Vehicle status"
spection is due soon. 6. "Service requirements"
Essential maintenance routines and any stat‐
Service interval has been excee‐ utory inspections required are displayed.
ded.
7. "Service history"
8. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐
Entering deadlines mation.
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can be
entered. Icons
Ensure that the date and time are set correctly in
Icon Description
the vehicle.
Maintenance has been carried
1. "MENU"
out on time.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle" Maintenance has been carried
4. "Content" out later than scheduled.
5. "Vehicle status"
Maintenance has not been car‐
6. "Service requirements" ried out.
7. "Vehicle inspection"
8. "Date:"
9. Select the desired setting. Speed Limit Display with no-
overtaking indicator
Service history
Principle Speed Limit Info

Completed maintenance work can be displayed
Principle
on the control display.
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
General limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up display and possibly supplementary
Have maintenance work performed by a Service
signs.
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The
General
maintenance work carried out is entered in the
vehicle data. The function is available as soon as The camera located near the interior mirror de‐
a maintenance visit has been logged in the vehi‐ tects road signs at the edge of the road as well
cle data. as variable overhead signs.
167
CONTROLS Displays
Depending on the national-market version, road overtaking restriction but which are not sign‐
signs with supplementary signs, for example, for posted to this effect.
wet road conditions, are considered and com‐ Overtaking restrictions for trailer operation are
pared with the vehicle's onboard data, for exam‐ not shown.
ple, the windscreen wiper signal. The road sign
Depending on the equipment, an additional icon
and associated supplementary signs are then
with distance information may also be displayed
displayed in the instrument cluster and the
to indicate the end of the no-overtaking indicator.
Head-up display, if applicable, or ignored, de‐
pending on the situation. Some supplementary
signs are taken into account in the speed limit Safety note
evaluation, but are not displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. WARNING
If a navigation system is installed, the system The system does not relieve you of your per‐
takes the information saved in the navigation sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐
system into account where applicable and also ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
displays the speed limits for sections of road with risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
no road signs. traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
Speed limits for trailer operation are displayed and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
when the trailer socket is occupied or when the
trailer operation has been activated via iDrive.
For further information: Sensors
Trailer operation, see page 303. The system is controlled by the camera behind
the windscreen.
No-overtaking indicator
Displaying Speed Limit Info
Principle
General
Overtaking restriction signs and end of restriction
signs which have been detected by the camera The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden via
are indicated by corresponding icons in the in‐ iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending on
strument cluster and, if applicable, the Head-up the national-market version, Speed Limit Info is
display. continuously displayed in the instrument cluster.
General Displaying Speed Limit Info

The system considers overtaking restrictions and 1. "MENU"
ends of restrictions that are indicated by means 2. "Vehicle apps"
of road signs. 3. "Driving settings"
It will not display anything in the following situa‐ 4. "Driver assistance"
tions:
5. "Driving"
▷ In countries where overtaking restrictions are
6. "Speed Assistant"
primarily shown by road markings.
7. "Speed limits"
▷ On routes without road signs.
8. "Show current limit"
▷ In the case of railway crossings, lane mark‐
ings and other situations which indicate an
168
Displays CONTROLS
Display Icon Description
Speed limit only applies in foggy

General
conditions.
Depending on the national-market version, sup‐
plementary signs and no-overtaking indicators Speed limit applies to exit on
are displayed together with Speed Limit Info. left.
Speed limit applies to exit on

Speed Limit Info right.
Icon Description Speed limit only applies when

towing a trailer.
Present speed limit.
Speed Limit Display with Anticipatory

The display may vary depending Indicator
on the equipment. Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
No data for the current speed ket version, an additional icon with distance infor‐
limit available. mation may indicate that a change in speed limit
is ahead. The Anticipatory Indicator must be acti‐
vated for Speed Limit Assist.
Speed Limit Info unavailable. Temporary speed limits may also be displayed,
for example at construction sites. Temporary
speed limits can only be displayed if the following
services are selected in the data protection
No-overtaking indicator
menu for the navigation system:
Icon Description ▷ "Learning map"
▷ "Map update"
No overtaking.
▷ Speed Limit Assist, see page 237.
End of overtaking restriction. ▷ Data protection, see page 70.
Settings
Supplementary signs 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Icon Description
3. "Driving settings"
Speed limit with time limit. 4. "Driver assistance"
Speed limit only applies in wet 5. "Driving"
conditions. 6. "Speed Assistant"
Speed limit only applies in 7. Select the desired setting:
snowy conditions. ▷ "Warning when speeding": activate or de‐
activate the flashing of the Speed Limit
Info display in the instrument cluster and,
169
CONTROLS Displays
if applicable, the Head-up display when

the currently applicable speed limit is ex‐
Selection lists
ceeded. The warning given when a speed
limit is exceeded may depend on the Principle
Speed Limit Assist settings. The instrument cluster or the Head-up display
▷ "Show excess speed": the speed limit de‐ can show lists for certain functions and can be
tected by the Speed Limit Info is indicated used for operation where applicable.
by a mark on the speedometer. ▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
System limits
▷ Recent calls list.
System limits of the sensors If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on the
control display.
▷ Camera, see page 47. Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and oper‐
Functional limitations
ated using the operating elements on the steer‐
Functionality may be restricted or incorrect infor‐ ing wheel.
mation may be displayed in some situations such
as: Operating Function
elements
▷ Road signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint. To display the entertainment list:
▷ Road signs do not correspond to the stand‐ turn the knurled wheel.
ard. To select up or down in the list:
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ turn the knurled wheel.
tem. Confirm selection: press knurled
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, wheel.
outdated or not available.
To change the entertainment
▷ If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex‐ source: press the corresponding
ample due to changes in road layout. arrow key.
▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.
Display last calls list: press the
▷ When overtaking buses or trucks with road button.
sign stickers.
▷ If there are electronic road signs.
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a par‐
allel road.
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
170
Displays CONTROLS
Display ▷ Vehicle status, see page 174.

▷ Current driving condition, see page 173.
▷ Sport displays, see page 174.
▷ Driving style analysis, see page 312.
▷ Trip data, see page 171.
Static content
The following content can be displayed continu‐
ously on the control display regardless of the
driving situation and set drive mode
An example:
▷ Vehicle status.
To change the track or entertainment source af‐
ter calling up the entertainment list, use the ar‐ ▷ Trip data.
row keys on the steering wheel. Press the
knurled wheel to confirm the selection. Configuring the display
Turn the knurled wheel up or down to select the 1. "MENU"
desired entry in the list. Press the knurled wheel 2. "Vehicle apps"
to confirm the selection.
3. "Live Vehicle"
Depending on the equipment, the list in the in‐
4. "Content"
strument cluster may differ from the illustration.
▷ "Adaptive content": different contents are
Live Vehicle displayed in varying order.
▷ "Journey data": trip data is permanently
displayed.
Principle
▷ "Vehicle status": vehicle status is perma‐
In the Live Vehicle menu, appropriate information
nently displayed.
is shown on the control display depending on the
driving situation and drive mode set.
Trip data
General
The centre of the display is the virtual picture of
Principle
your own vehicle, which shows the current state
of the vehicle, for example, an open door. Fault Values for the trip, for example, the average con‐
statuses are not taken into account. sumption or trip distance, are displayed.
In the Live Vehicle menu, it is possible to choose

between an adaptive display with changing con‐ General
tent and static content. The trip data can be shown on the control dis‐
play and in the instrument cluster.
Adaptive content Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
The following is displayed in alternating order menu, the trip data is shown dynamically or con‐
and, if applicable, depending on the selected tinuously on the control display.
drive mode:
171
CONTROLS Displays
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ ▷ Distance covered depending on the config‐
ing on different intervals. ured interval, arrow 3.
▷ Total kilometres, arrow 4.
Display on the control display
Overview Average consumption

Depending on the equipment, the following infor‐ The average consumption is calculated on the
mation is shown as a function of the set interval basis of various distances.
and drive mode:
▷ Set interval for displaying the trip data.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
▷ Average consumption, depending on the set
energy consumption. It is possible to check how
interval.
efficiently the vehicle is being driven.
▷ Driving time depending on the configured in‐
terval.
Configuring the trip data display
▷ Route covered, depending on the set interval.
The intervals for displaying the trip data in the in‐
▷ Counter for energy recovery depending on strument cluster and on the control display can
the configured interval. be configured.
Use the key on the left steering column lever:
Displaying trip data continuously
1. "MENU" 1. Press the key.
2. "Vehicle apps" The trip data is displayed.
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Journey data"

Information on consumption and distance cov‐
ered can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
2. Press the key repeatedly until the desired

setting is displayed.
Via iDrive:
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
4. "Time period for journey data"
▷ Current consumption, arrow 1. 5. "Values"
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2. 6. Select the desired setting:
172
Displays CONTROLS
▷ "Since start of journey ( )": the values are

reset automatically if the vehicle is at a
Current driving condition
standstill for approximately four hours.
▷ "Since last charge ( )": the values are au‐
General
tomatically reset after charging. The current driving condition is displayed dy‐
▷ "Since factory": the values since leaving namically while driving in the Live Vehicle menu
the factory are displayed. on the control display.
▷ "Since Individual ( )": the values since the The following conditions are displayed:
last manual reset are displayed. The val‐ ▷ Driving.
ues can be reset at any time. ▷ Efficient rolling.
▷ Battery is charging.
Resetting average values manually
▷ Adaptive recuperation is active.
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Since Individual ( )".
Adaptive recuperation, see page 313.
Use the key on the left steering column lever:
1. Press the key. Operating requirements

The trip data is displayed. ▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode must
be selected.
▷ The following settings must be selected for
Live Vehicle: "Adaptive content"
Display
2. Press and hold the key to reset the average

values.
Via iDrive:
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
4. "Time period for journey data"
The high-voltage battery is charged when the
5. "Reset Individual" vehicle is decelerating, arrow 2.
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automatically
activated: "Since Individual ( )".
173
CONTROLS Displays
Sport displays Overview
Icon Description
Principle
The sport displays primarily assist a sporty driv‐ "Flat Tyre Monitor": status of the
ing style. flat tyre monitor RPA, see
page 345.
Operating requirements "Tyre Pressure Monitor": status
▷ Drive mode SPORT must be selected. of the Tyre Pressure Monitor,
see page 338.
▷ The following settings must be selected for
Live Vehicle: "Adaptive content" "Check Control": to display
saved Check Control messages,
Display see page 156.
The sport displays are displayed in the Live Vehi‐ "Service requirements": to dis‐
cle menu on the control display. play service requirements, see
The following information is displayed: page 166.
▷ Torque.
▷ Power.
Head-up display
▷ Electric motor rotational speed.
▷ Electric motor temperature.
Principle
The driver is able to read and understand this in‐
Vehicle status formation without having to divert attention from
the road.
General The Head-up display projects important informa‐

tion in the driver's field of view, for example the
The status can be displayed and actions per‐ speed.
formed for several systems, such as for Check
Control.
General
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
Follow the instructions on cleaning the head-up
menu, the vehicle status is shown dynamically or
display in the Care chapter.
continuously on the control display.
Displaying the vehicle status

continuously
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Vehicle status"
174
Displays CONTROLS
Overview Overview
The following information is displayed in the
Head-up display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Lists and messages.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only shown briefly
The protective glass of the head-up display is lo‐ when needed.
cated between the steering wheel and the wind‐
screen. Visibility of the display
The visibility of the information shown on the
Configuring a view Head-up display can be affected by the
following:
Regardless of the display in the instrument clus‐
ter, different views can be set up for the Head-up ▷ Seat position.
display, for instance a reduced view. ▷ Objects on the protective glass of the head-
up display.
▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
1. Press the button on the steering head-up display.
wheel.
▷ Dirt on the inside or outside of the wind‐
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument screen.
cluster.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
2. "HEAD-UP"
▷ Wet roads.
If applicable, select the menu via the arrow
▷ Adverse lighting conditions.
buttons.
If the image is distorted, have the default settings
3. Select the required setting via the knurled
checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
wheel.
Display
Settings
Turning the Head-up display on/off
Individual settings can be entered for the Head-
1. "MENU"
up display, for example for the height, brightness
2. "Vehicle apps" or illustration. In addition, individual displays in
3. "Displays" the Head-up display can be set up separately, for
4. "Head-up display" instance information on driver assistance.
5. "Head-up display" 1. "MENU"

2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Displays"
175
CONTROLS Displays
4. "Head-up display"
Special windscreen
The windscreen is an integral part of the system.
The shape of the windscreen enables a sharp
image to be projected.
A foil in the windscreen prevents the projection
of double images.
Therefore if the special windscreen needs to be
replaced, it is strongly recommended that this be
carried out by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
176
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle equipment Icon Function
Instrument lighting.
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ Parking light, right.
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. Parking light, left.
Lights and lighting

Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview Icon Function
Buttons in the vehicle Interior lighting.

Parts of the exterior lights.
Home lights.
Automatic driving lights control

Principle
Icon Function Depending on ambient brightness, the system
switches the low-beam headlight on or off auto‐
Rear fog light.
matically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight and
in rain or snow.
Lights off.
General
Daytime driving lights.
The headlights may also come on when the sun
Side lights. is low against a blue sky.
If the low-beam headlights are switched on man‐
ually, the automatic driving lights control is deac‐
Automatic driving lights control. tivated.
Adaptive lighting functions.
Low-beam headlight.
177
CONTROLS Lights
Activating the automatic driving lights Do not leave the side lights on for extended peri‐
control ods of time, as this could drain the vehicle bat‐
tery and it may no longer be possible to switch
Press the button on the light switch ele‐ on drive-ready state.
ment.
Switching off the side lights
The LED in the button illuminates.
The side lights can be switched off as follows:
ter is illuminated when the low-beam
headlight is switched on. ▷ Press the button on the light switch
element.
▷ Switch on drive-ready state.
System limits
After switching on drive-ready state, the auto‐
The automatic driving lights control is no substi‐
matic driving lights control is activated.
tute for using your own judgement to assess the
light conditions.
Low-beam headlight
The sensors are unable to recognise fog or hazy
weather, for example. In such situations, switch
on the lights manually.
Switching on the low-beam headlight
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
Side lights, low-beam
The low-beam headlight illuminates if drive-
headlights and parking lights ready state is switched on.
General ter is illuminated.
If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready
state is switched off, the exterior lights are To switch on the low-beam headlight as soon as
switched off automatically after a given time. the standby state is switched on, press the but‐
ton again.
Side lights
Switching off the low-beam headlight
General Depending on the national-market version, the
The side lights can only be switched on in the low-beam headlight may be switched off in the
low speed range. low speed range:
Switching on the side lights ▷ Press the button on the light switch
Press the button on the light switch ele‐ element.
ment.
Parking light
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ When parking the vehicle, it is possible to switch
ter is illuminated. on a parking light on one side.
The vehicle is illuminated all round.
178
Lights CONTROLS
Button Function Turning on the welcome light

Parking light, right on. ▷ Automatically on approach.
▷ During unlocking.
Parking light, left on.

▷ With the vehicle locked, press the
button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, the interior light‐
To switch off parking light: ing and parts of the exterior lighting will be
Press the button on the light switch ele‐ turned on.
ment or switch on drive-ready state. The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
Welcome light Welcome Light Carpet
Principle
The exterior lights are turned on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or un‐
locking the vehicle.
General
Depending on the equipment, the exterior lights
of the vehicle can be individually adjusted. The light source is located in the position indica‐
ted.
Activating/deactivating welcome light Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Exterior lighting" Home lights
5. Depending on the equipment, select the de‐ Principle
sired setting: The exterior lights can be switched on for a cer‐
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" tain period of time to illuminate the surroundings
after exiting the vehicle.
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
Switching on the home lights
▷ After switching off drive-ready state, press
the turn indicator lever forwards briefly.
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐

hicle key for approximately 1 second.
179
CONTROLS Lights
Activate the home lights function for the button

of the vehicle key:
Dynamic ECO lighting function
1. "MENU" General
2. "Vehicle apps" The brightness of the low-beam headlight is re‐
3. "Doors and windows" duced, depending on the speed and distance
4. "Vehicle key" from the vehicle in front.
Activating the dynamic ECO light
Setting the duration function
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" 1. If necessary, press the button on the
light switch element to activate driving lights
automatic.
5. "Home lights"
2. Activate ECO PRO drive mode.
Daytime running lights Adaptive lighting functions

General
Principle
The daytime running lights illuminate when
Adaptive lighting functions makes it possible to
drive-ready state is switched on.
illuminate the road responsively.
ter is illuminated when the rear daytime General
running lights are switched on.
The adaptive lighting functions consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
Activating/deactivating daytime equipment:
driving lights ▷ Adaptive Headlights.
In some countries, daytime driving lights are ▷ Variable light distribution.
compulsory, in which case the daytime driving ▷ Cornering light.
lights cannot be deactivated.
▷ Roundabout light.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Activating the adaptive light functions
3. "Exterior lighting" Press the button on the light switch ele‐
4. If necessary, "Additional settings" ment.
5. Depending on national-market version:
"Daytime driving lights" or "Rear daytime
driving lights" The adaptive lighting functions are active when
drive-ready state is switched on.
180
Lights CONTROLS
Adaptive Headlights Urban lights

The light beam from the low-beam headlight is
extended at the sides.
General
The headlight beams follow the road ahead in re‐
Motorway beam pattern
sponse to the steering wheel angle and other pa‐
rameters. The range of the low-beam headlight is in‐
creased.
To prevent dazzling oncoming vehicles, the
Adaptive Headlights do not swivel to the oppo‐
site side of the road when the vehicle is at stand‐
still.
Cornering light
Depending on the equipment: if the headlights
are converted, the availability of the Adaptive Principle
Headlights may be limited. When turning off or on tight bends, for example
For further information: hairpin bends, up to a certain speed, a cornering
light is added to illuminate the inside area of the
Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 184. bend.
Anticipatory Adaptive Headlights General

The beams are adapted to the direction of travel The cornering light is switched on automatically
ahead even before entering or leaving a bend. depending on the steering wheel angle or, where
applicable, activation of the turn indicators.
S-bend lights When reversing, the cornering light is activated
The beams are kept as straight as possible when automatically as appropriate, irrespective of the
driving around S-bends. steering wheel angle.
Hairpin lights
The cornering light is also switched on before Roundabout light
entering hairpin bends.
Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the
cornering light is activated on both sides. The
Variable light distribution edge of the road is illuminated more effectively.
Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the corner‐
ing light is switched off again on both sides.
Principle
The variable light distribution enables better illu‐
mination of the road. Adaptive headlight range
control
General
The light distribution is adjusted automatically Adaptive headlight range control compensates
depending on speed and navigation data, if nec‐ for acceleration and braking manoeuvres and ve‐
essary. hicle load conditions to prevent oncoming vehi‐
cles from being dazzled.
181
CONTROLS Lights
High-beam Assistant Activating High-beam Assistant
Principle
High-beam Assistant detects other road users in
good time and activates or deactivates the high
beam according to traffic situation.
General
High beam assistant ensures that the high-beam
headlights are switched on when the traffic situa‐
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
tion allows. The system does not switch on the
high-beam headlights at low speeds. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
The system responds to the lights from oncom‐ ter is illuminated when the low-beam
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to headlight is switched on.
ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.
The system will switch automatically between
The high-beam headlights can be switched on
low-beam headlight and high-beam headlight.
and off manually at any time.
If Selective Beam is installed, the high-beam The blue indicator light in the instrument
headlights are not switched off for oncoming ve‐ cluster illuminates if the high-beam
hicles or vehicles driving ahead of you. Instead, headlight is switched on by the system.
the system masks only those areas of the beam
If a journey is interrupted with High-beam Assis‐
which would otherwise dazzle oncoming traffic or
tant activated: when the journey is resumed,
traffic driving ahead. In this case, the blue indica‐
High-beam Assistant remains activated.
tor lamp continues to illuminate.
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated by
Depending on the equipment: if the headlights
switching the high beams on and off manually.
have been converted, High-beam Assistant may
only function to a limited extent. To reactivate High-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn indicator lever.
Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 184. Deactivating High-beam Assistant
▷ Automatic driving lights control is activated.
▷ Low-beam headlight is switched on.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
182
Lights CONTROLS
System limits Safety notes

High beam assistant cannot replace the driver's
own judgement as to when to use the high-
beam headlights. Therefore activate the dipped
headlights manually if the situation requires it.
In the following situations, the system will not op‐
erate or its operation will be impaired and your
intervention may be required:
▷ In extremely adverse weather conditions such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly lit road users such as Laser class 1.
pedestrians, cyclists, horse riders or carriages The sign is located in or on the headlight and is
and when trains or ships are close to the visible from the outside or when the bonnet is
road, or when animals are crossing the road. open.
▷ On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows of
hills, when there is crossing traffic or if the
view of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is Fog lights
partly obstructed.
▷ In poorly lit towns or where there are highly Rear fog light
reflective signs.
▷ If the area of windscreen in front of the inte‐ Operating requirements
rior mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,
The low-beam headlight must be switched on
stickers, labels, etc.
before the rear fog light can be activated.
Laser high-beam headlight Switching the rear fog light on/off

Press the button.
Principle
The headlight range of the high-beam headlight The yellow indicator lamp in the instru‐
is increased and provides better illumination of ment cluster illuminates when the rear
the road. fog light is switched on.
General If automatic driving lights control has been acti‐

vated, the low-beam headlights switch on auto‐
The high-beam laser light is integrated into the
matically when the rear fog light is switched on.
headlight and is emitted there.
When the high-beam headlight is switched on,
Bad weather light
the laser high-beam headlight is switched on au‐
tomatically in addition to LED high-beam head‐
light from a speed of approximately 60 km/h,
Principle
37 mph. The bad weather light provides optimised illumi‐
nation of the road when visibility conditions are
Depending on the national-market version, addi‐
poor, for example in fog or rain. The light distribu‐
tional information may be found on the laser sign
on the headlight.
183
CONTROLS Lights
tion from the low-beam headlight is adapted to Adjusting the brightness

the visibility conditions.
The brightness can be adjusted
using the knurled wheel.
Activating/deactivating the bad weather
light
The bad weather light is activated when the au‐
tomatic driving light system or the rear fog light is
switched on.
Interior lighting
Left-hand/right-hand traffic General
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights,
General the footwell lights, door entry lighting, ambient
When driving in countries where vehicles drive lighting and loudspeaker lighting are controlled
on the opposite side of the road to your vehicle's automatically.
country of registration, you will need to prevent
your headlights from dazzling oncoming vehicles. Overview
Converting the headlights Buttons in the vehicle
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Right/left-hand traffic"
Depending on the national-market version,
the parking brake must be applied.
Reading lights
System limits
High-beam Assistant may only function to a re‐
stricted extent. Interior lights
The availability of the adaptive lighting functions
might be restricted.
Turning interior lights on/off
Instrument lighting Press the button.
Operating requirements To switch off permanently: press and hold the

The brightness can only be adjusted when the button for approximately 3 seconds.
side lights or low-beam headlight are switched
on.
184
Lights CONTROLS
The interior lights in the rear can be switched on Adjusting the brightness
and off independently. The button is located on
1. "MENU"
the headliner in the rear.
2. "Vehicle apps"
Turning reading lights on/off 3. "Interior lighting"
Press the button. 4. If necessary, "Ambience"

5. "Brightness"
Depending on the equipment, there are reading
lights located at the front and in the rear beside
the interior lights.
Dynamic light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls or
open doors, are indicated by light effects.
Ambient lighting 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
General 3. "Interior lighting"
Depending on the equipment, the lighting for
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
some of the interior lights can be adjusted.
5. "Dynamic light"
Activating/deactivating ambient light 6. Select the desired setting.
1. "MENU"
Reduced for journey at night
2. "Vehicle apps"
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
3. "Interior lighting"
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
1. "MENU"
5. "Ambient lighting"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Turning ambient lighting on/off 3. "Interior lighting"
The ambient lighting is switched on when the 4. If necessary, "Ambience"
vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the 5. "Reduced for night driving"
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient lighting was deactivated using
iDrive, it is not switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Selecting the colour

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Interior lighting"
5. "Colour"
185
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Head airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Side airbag
Front airbags Head airbag

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ The head airbag protects the head in the event
senger in the event of a head-on collision where of a side-on crash.
the protection of the seat belts alone would no
longer be sufficient. Protective effect
Side airbag General

In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the Airbags are not activated in every collision situa‐
side of the body in the chest and pelvic area. tion, for example, in minor accidents.
186
Safety CONTROLS
Information for optimum airbag protective specifically suited for seats with integrated
effect airbag versions.
▷ Do not hang items of clothing, for example
coats or jackets, over the backrests.
WARNING
▷ Do not modify individual components of the
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
system or its wiring. This also applies to the
ment area of the airbag is restricted, the airbag
covers of the steering wheel, the dashboard
system cannot provide the intended level of
and seats.
protection or may cause additional injuries
when it deploys. There is a risk of injury or even ▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system.
death. Observe the following to achieve opti‐ Even if all this information is observed, injuries re‐
mum protective function. sulting from contact with the airbag cannot be
entirely ruled out in every situation.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐
▷ Always grip the steering wheel at the steering bag may lead to temporary hearing loss in vehi‐
wheel rim. Place your hands in the 3 o'clock cle occupants sensitive to noise.
and 9 o'clock positions to minimise the risk of
injury to hands or arms when the airbag de‐ Operational readiness of the airbag
ploys.
system
▷ Adjust the seat and steering wheel so the
driver can reach over the steering wheel diag‐ Safety notes
onally. Select the settings so that, when
reaching over, the shoulders stay in contact
with the backrest and the upper body stays WARNING
as far away from the steering wheel as possi‐ Individual components of the airbag system
ble. may be hot after airbag deployment. There is a
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting danger of injury. Do not touch individual com‐
correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in the ponents.
footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep their
head away from the side airbag. WARNING
▷ Do not place any other persons, pets or ob‐ Work carried out incorrectly can cause the air‐
jects between the airbags and occupants. bag system to fail, malfunction or deploy acci‐
dentally. If there is a malfunction, the airbag
▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen area on
system might not deploy as intended in an ac‐
the passenger's side clear, for example do
cident, even if the impact is of the appropriate
not attach adhesive foil or covers and do not
severity. There is a risk of injury or even death.
fit brackets for navigation device or mobile
Have the airbag system tested, repaired or re‐
phone, for example.
moved and disposed of by a Service Partner of
▷ Do not glue the airbag covers and do not the manufacturer or another qualified Service
cover or modify them in any way. Partner or a specialist workshop.
▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the pas‐
senger's side as a tray.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front seats that are not
187
CONTROLS Safety
Display in the instrument cluster If the message is still displayed, repeat the cali‐
bration.
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument clus‐ If the message still does not go out after repea‐
ter illuminates briefly to indicate that the ted calibration, have the system checked as soon
entire airbag system and the seat belt tensioners as possible.
are operational.
Key switch for front passenger

Malfunction
airbags
▷ The warning light does not illuminate
after drive-ready state is switched on.
Principle
▷ The warning light is permanently illu‐
minated. When a child restraint system is used on the
front passenger seat, the front and side airbags
Have the system checked. on the passenger's side can be deactivated us‐
ing the key switch for front passenger airbags.
Setting the front seat positions
General
General The front and side airbags for the front passen‐
In order to maintain the accuracy of the seat po‐ ger can be deactivated and reactivated using the
sition permanently, calibrate the front seats as integrated key from the vehicle key.
soon as a corresponding message is displayed
on the control display. Overview
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Before making any adjustment, make
sure that the area of movement of the seat is
clear.
The key switch for front passenger airbags is lo‐
A corresponding message is displayed on the cated on the outside of the dashboard.
control display.
1. Press switch and move seat forwards until it
stops.
2. Press switch forwards again. Seat moves a bit
further forwards.
3. Readjust the desired seat position.
The calibration is concluded when the message
on the control display disappears.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Deactivating the front passenger the stop position has been reached, remove
airbags the key.
3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end
position so that the airbags are activated.
The front passenger airbags are reactivated and
can deploy correctly when required to do so.
Indicator light for front passenger

airbags
The indicator light for the front passenger air‐
bags in the headliner shows the operating status
1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐ of the front passenger airbags.
essary. After switching on drive-ready state, the light illu‐
2. With the key pressed inwards, turn the switch minates briefly and then shows whether the air‐
to the OFF position as far as it will go. Once bags are activated or deactivated.
the stop position has been reached, remove
Display Function
the key.
3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end If the front passenger airbags
position so that the airbags are deactivated. are activated, the indicator light
illuminates for a short period
The front passenger airbags are deactivated.
and then extinguishes.
The driver's airbags remain active.
If a child restraint system is removed from the
front passenger seat, reactivate the front passen‐ When the front passenger air‐
ger airbags so that they can deploy as intended bags are deactivated, the indi‐
in the event of an accident. cator light remains illuminated.
The airbag status is shown by the indicator light

on the headliner.
Activating the front passenger airbags Active pedestrian protection

Principle
The active pedestrian protection raises the bon‐
net if the front of the vehicle collides with a pe‐
destrian.
General
When triggered, the pedestrian protection sys‐
1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐ tem creates deformation space underneath the
essary. front flap in readiness for the subsequent head
impact. Sensors underneath the bumper are
2. With the key pressed inwards, turn the switch used for detection.
to the ON position as far as it will go. Once
189
CONTROLS Safety
Safety notes
NOTE
WARNING Opening the front flap when the pedestrian

protection system has triggered may damage
The system may trigger inadvertently if contact the front flap or the pedestrian protection sys‐
is made with individual components of the tem. There is a risk of material damage. Do not
hinges and front flap locks. There is a risk of in‐ open the front flap after the Check Control
jury or material damage. Do not touch individual message is displayed. Have checks performed
components of the hinges and front flap locks. by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
workshop.
WARNING
Modifications to the pedestrian protection sys‐
tem can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci‐ System limits
dental triggering of the pedestrian protection The active pedestrian protection system is only
system. There is a risk of injury or even death. triggered at speeds between approximately
Do not modify the pedestrian protection sys‐ 30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph.
tem, its individual components or its wiring. Do For safety reasons, the system may also trigger
not dismantle the system. in rare instances where impact with a pedestrian
cannot be excluded beyond all doubt, for exam‐
ple in the following situations:
WARNING ▷ Collision with objects such as a skip or a
Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐ boundary post.
ure, malfunction or accidental triggering of the ▷ Collision with animals.
system. If there is a malfunction, the system
▷ Stone impact.
might not trigger as intended in an accident,
even if the impact is of the appropriate severity. ▷ Driving into a snow drift.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Have the
system tested, repaired or removed and dis‐ Malfunction
posed of by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
specialist workshop. The system has been triggered or is
faulty.
Immediately drive at moderate speed to a Serv‐
WARNING ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop to
If the system has been deployed or is dam‐ have the system checked and repaired.
aged, its functionality will be limited or it may no
longer work at all. There is a risk of injury or
even death.
If the system has been triggered or is damaged,
have it checked and renewed at a Service Part‐
ner of the manufacturer or another qualified
190
Safety CONTROLS
Collision warning systems Turning on/turning off collision

warning systems
General Depending on the national-market version, some
of the systems are automatically active after ev‐
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
ery driving off.
different systems that can help prevent an immi‐
nent collision. The following functions are adjustable.
▷ Front-collision warning, see page 192. 1. "MENU"
▷ Lane Departure Warning, see page 199. 2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Lane Change Warning, see page 202. 3. "Driving settings"
▷ Side collision warning, see page 205. 4. "Driver assistance"
▷ Road Priority Warning, see page 207. 5. "Safety and warnings"
▷ Wrong-way Warning, see page 209. 6. Select the desired settings.
▷ Rear Collision Prevention, see page 206.
▷ Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 210. Resetting settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
Safety notes can be reset to the default settings for vehicle
delivery.
WARNING 1. "MENU"
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ 2. "Vehicle apps"
sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ 3. "Driving settings"
ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a 4. "Driver assistance"
risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
5. "Safety and warnings"
traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. 6. "Reset to recommended settings"
System limits
WARNING
Safety note
Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
your personal responsibility. System limitations
can mean that warnings or system responses WARNING
are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ accident or material damage. Observe the in‐
vene actively if the situation warrants it. formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
Detection capability
The detection capability of the system is limited.
191
CONTROLS Safety
Only objects within the detection range of the in‐ As soon as the speed drops below these values
stalled sensors and that are detected by the sys‐ again, the system will respond again according to
tem are taken into account. its settings.
Depending on the equipment, the area is moni‐
tored by cameras or radar sensors. Safety notes
For this reason, the system may fail to respond
or only respond after a delay. WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per‐
System limits of the sensors sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐
For further information: ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Front-collision warning
Principle WARNING
The front-collision warning can help prevent ac‐ Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
cidents. If an accident cannot be avoided, the your personal responsibility. System limitations
system may help reduce the severity of the acci‐ can mean that warnings or system responses
dent. are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly
or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐
The system can issue a warning of a possible
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
risk of collision and may activate the brakes inde‐
ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
pendently.
vene actively if the situation warrants it.
General
Depending on the equipment version, the front- WARNING
collision warning includes the following functions:
Due to system limits, individual functions can
▷ Collision Warning with braking function, see malfunction during tow-starting/tow-away when
page 195. the front-collision warning is activated. There is
▷ Pedestrian Warning with city braking function, a risk of accident. Turn the front-collision warn‐
see page 196. ing off prior to tow-starting/towing.
▷ Crossroads Warning with city braking func‐
tion, see page 197.
Sensors
▷ Evasion Assistant, see page 198.
Depending on the equipment, the system is con‐
trolled by the following sensors:
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision at speeds above approx. 5 km/h/3 mph. ▷ Front radar sensor.
The system is temporarily disabled at speeds ▷ Side radar sensors, front.
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
192
Safety CONTROLS
Turning the front-collision warning result, there may also be an increased number of
on/off premature or unjustified warnings and respon‐
ses.
Turning on the system automatically The system checks for visual impairments. De‐
pending on equipment, the Driver Attention
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the
system is automatically active after every driving
driver's gaze behaviour. Visibility conditions and
off.
field of vision also affect the timing of the warn‐
ings.
Turning the system on manually
The system is activated when the warning time Display in the instrument cluster
is set.
Depending on the equipment, the following
For further information: icons are displayed in the instrument cluster and
Setting the warning time, see page 193. Head-up display:
Icon Meaning
Turning the system off manually
Depending on the national-market version, the Depending on the national-market ver‐
adjustment can only be made at a vehicle stand‐ sion:
still or in the very low speed range. System is restricted or has failed.
1. "MENU" Depending on the national-market ver‐
2. "Vehicle apps" sion:
3. "Driving settings" System is deactivated.
4. "Driver assistance" Risk of collision, for example, with a pe‐
5. "Safety and warnings" destrian.
6. "Front collision warning"
Risk of collision, for example, with a ve‐
7. "Off" hicle driving in front.
Setting the warning time Risk of collision, for example, with a

1. "MENU" crossing vehicle.
2. "Vehicle apps"
General risk of collision.
4. "Driver assistance"
The image of the respective icon may vary, be‐
6. "Front collision warning" cause the system may detect multiple objects.
▷ "Early" Warning function
▷ "Medium" The front-collision warning warns on different
warning levels, depending on the respective haz‐
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
ardous situation.
The higher the sensitivity of the warning time
settings the more warnings are displayed. As a
193
CONTROLS Safety
In the event of a system warning, the driver must System limits

intervene immediately and in accordance with
the situation. Safety note
▷ A red icon illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected. In‐ WARNING
creased awareness is required.
The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
▷ A red icon flashes: spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
There is a risk of collision. Intervene yourself tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
immediately. accident or material damage. Observe the in‐
▷ A warning signal sounds: formation on the system limits and intervene
There is a risk of collision. Intervene yourself
immediately.
▷ Automatic brake intervention: Detection capability
Depending on the equipment and situation in The detection capability of the system is limited.
case of an imminent danger of collision, the Only objects within the detection range of the in‐
system can also intervene with an automatic stalled sensors and that are detected by the sys‐
brake intervention and automatically deceler‐ tem are taken into account.
ate the vehicle, if necessary, to a complete
Depending on the equipment, the area is moni‐
stop.
tored by cameras or radar sensors.
When the brake is operated during a warning, the
For this reason, the system may fail to respond
maximum necessary brake force is applied. This
or only respond after a delay.
requires the brake pedal to be pressed suffi‐
ciently quickly and firmly.
System limits of the sensors
Automatic brake intervention For further information:
In case of a risk of collision, the system can assist Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47.
with an automatic brake intervention, if neces‐
sary. Functional limitations
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a The system may have restricted functionality in
stop. situations such as the following:
A brake intervention can be cancelled by step‐ ▷ On sharp bends.
ping on the accelerator pedal, releasing the brake ▷ With restriction of the driving stability control
pedal or with an active steering movement. systems.
Depending on the equipment and situation, the ▷ Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
brake intervention can occur at speeds of up to ready state using the Start/Stop button
approx. 250 km/h/155 mph.
At speeds above approx. 210 km/h/130 mph, Malfunction
only a brief brake intervention will occur. In the event of a system fault, a Check Control
message or indicator/warning lights will generally
be displayed.
A system fault can be triggered by the failure of
individual components, for example:
194
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Sensors, for example camera. Icon Meaning

▷ Control units, for instance for the Dynamic
Collision Warning with a detected vehi‐
Stability Control.
cle.
Collision Warning with braking General risk of collision.
function
Principle Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene per‐
The Collision Warning with braking function
sonally.
warns of a possible risk of collision and may
brake independently. For further information:
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system Front-collision warning, see page 192.
helps to reduce the collision speed.
System limits
General
General
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
“Front-collision warning”.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected, or
only detected with a delay, for instance:
▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at
high speed.
Sensors record the traffic situation. ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
heavily.
collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
5 km/h/3 mph. The timing of these warnings may ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.
vary depending on the current driving situation.
When deliberately moving closer to a vehicle, the Upper speed limit
Collision Warning and brake intervention are acti‐ The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
vated later to avoid unwarranted system respon‐ over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. Once the
ses. speed drops back below this threshold, the sys‐
tem becomes responsive again according to its
Safety notes settings.
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter “Front-
collision warning”.

A warning symbol is displayed when a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
195
CONTROLS Safety
Pedestrian Warning with city Icon Meaning
braking function Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
Principle
General risk of collision.
In the urban speed range, the Pedestrian Warn‐
ing with city braking function warns of a possible
risk of collision with pedestrians and bicycle rid‐
ers, and may brake independently. Warning function
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system The warning prompts the driver to intervene per‐
helps to reduce the collision speed. sonally.
General Front-collision warning, see page 192.
System limits
General
“Front-collision warning”.
Detection range
Sensors record the traffic situation.
Persons within the detection range who are de‐

tected by the system are taken into account.
collision with pedestrians at speeds above ap‐
prox. 5 km/h/3 mph.
Safety notes
Follow the Safety Information in Chapter “Front- The detection range in front of the vehicle con‐
collision warning”. sists of two parts:
▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the
Display in the instrument cluster vehicle.
A warning symbol is displayed when a collision ▷ Extended zone, arrows 2, to the right and left
with a detected pedestrian is imminent. of the central area.
There is a risk of collision if persons are in the
central zone. A warning is only given of persons
in the extended zone if they are moving towards
the central zone.
For example the following might not be detected:
196
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes. From speeds of approximately 10 km/h, approx.

▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ 6 mph, the system provides a warning of possi‐
cause of their contour or posture. ble risk of collision with vehicles.
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height. The timing of these warnings may vary depend‐
ing on the current driving situation.
Upper speed limit
Depending on the equipment, the system reacts
Safety notes
to pedestrians when your own speed is up to Follow the Safety Information in Chapter “Front-
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. collision warning”.

Crossroads Warning with city A warning symbol is displayed when a collision
braking function with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Icon Meaning
Principle
In the urban speed range, the Crossroads Warn‐ from right.
ing with city braking function can warn of possi‐
ble risk of collision with crossing traffic at road Risk of collision with crossing vehicle
junctions and crossroads, and may brake inde‐ from left.
pendently.
If an accident cannot be avoided, the system General risk of collision.
helps to reduce the collision speed.
General
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene per‐
sonally.
Front-collision warning, see page 192.
System limits
General
Sensors record the traffic situation. Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
Vehicles that cross the vehicle's direction of “Front-collision warning”.
travel can be detected by the system as soon as
these vehicles enter the detection range of the Detection range
system. For example the following might not be detected:
A warning is given at road junctions and cross‐ ▷ Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings, for
roads if there is a risk of collision with crossing example.
traffic. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
197
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situations. Safety notes

▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating Follow the Safety Information in Chapter “Front-
heavily. collision warning”.
▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.
Upper speed limit ▷ Front-collision warning is active.
The system responds to crossing vehicles when ▷ Sensors detect adequate space around the
your own speed is below approx. 80 km/h, ap‐ vehicle.
prox. 50 mph.
Evasion Assistant A warning symbol is displayed when a collision
with a detected vehicle or a detected pedestrian
is imminent.
Principle
Icon Meaning
The Evasion Assistant can support the driver in
making evasive manoeuvres in certain situations, Warning when a vehicle is detected.
for example, when obstacles or persons sud‐
denly appear.
Warning when a pedestrian is detec‐
General ted.
Warning for unknown obstacles.
Warning function with evasion

support
A warning is displayed when the vehicle is ap‐
proaching another object at a high differential
speed and there is an immediate risk of collision.
The system issues warnings and intervenes to
provide support if there is a possibility to take an Intervene in case of a warning.
avoidance manoeuvre to the side. The system provides support for the driver's
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in avoidance manoeuvres if there is a risk of colli‐
front of the vehicle. Depending on the equip‐ sion.
ment, the areas next to the vehicle are also moni‐
tored. System limits
The system then utilises the detected free space
to take the avoidance manoeuvre by steering the General
vehicle safely and precisely in the direction Follow the limits of the system in the chapter
specified by the driver by means of supporting “Front-collision warning”.
steering wheel movements.
Detection range
For example the following might not be detected:
198
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at Safety notes

high speed.
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
WARNING
heavily.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
sonal responsibility to assess the layout of the
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. road and the traffic situation. There is a risk of
▷ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes. accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ conditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐
cause of their contour or posture. tervene actively if the situation warrants it. In
the event of a warning, do not move the steer‐
▷ Pedestrians with insufficient height. ing wheel unnecessarily abruptly.

WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
Principle
your personal responsibility. System limitations
The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning if can mean that warnings or system responses
the vehicle leaves the road or its driving lane. are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly
or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐
General dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
vene actively if the situation warrants it.
The lane marking must be detected by the cam‐
era in order for the Lane Departure Warning to
be active.
Sensors record the traffic situation. Sensors

The system is controlled by the camera behind
The system issues a warning starting at a mini‐ the windscreen.
mum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Turning the Lane Departure Warning
Warnings are displayed in the instrument cluster. on/off
In addition, the steering wheel is vibrating. The
strength of the steering wheel vibration can be
Turning on the system automatically
adjusted.
The system does not issue a warning if the driver
system is automatically active after every driving
indicates in the corresponding direction before
off.
leaving the driving lane.
199
CONTROLS Safety
Turning the system on manually 4. "Driver assistance"

The system is activated when the warning time 5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
is set. 6. "Vibration intensity"
For further information: 7. Select the desired setting.
Setting the warning time, see page 200. The setting is applied to all collision warning sys‐
tems.
Turning the system off manually
1. "MENU" Depending on the national-market
2. "Vehicle apps" version: turn steering intervention on/off
3. "Driving settings" 1. "MENU"
4. "Driver assistance" 2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Safety and warnings" 3. "Driving settings"
6. "Lane departure warning" 4. "Driver assistance"
7. "Off" 5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane departure warning"
Setting the Lane Departure Warning 7. "Steering intervention"
Setting the warning time Display in the instrument cluster

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" Icon Meaning
3. "Driving settings" Depending on the national-market ver‐

4. "Driver assistance" sion:
5. "Safety and warnings" Icon illuminates green: a lane boundary

was detected on at least one side of
6. "Lane departure warning"
the vehicle and warnings can be is‐
7. Select the desired setting. sued.
▷ "Early" The system can perform steering inter‐
▷ "Medium" ventions.
▷ "Reduced" Icon flashes green: the vehicle is going
Some warnings are suppressed depend‐ to drive across the lane boundary.
ing on the situation, for instance, when
purposely driving over driving lane lines in Depending on the national-market ver‐
bends or with dynamic overtaking without sion:
turn indicator. Icon is illuminated yellow: the system is
restricted, deactivated or has failed.
Adjusting the strength of the steering
wheel vibration
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
200
Safety CONTROLS
Warning function ing signal sounds from the third steering inter‐
vention onwards.
When leaving the driving lane A Check Control message is also displayed.
If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a lane The warning signal and Check Control message
marking is detected, the steering wheel vibrates advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
depending on the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting. In trailer operation
In addition, the icon starts to flash. If the trailer socket is occupied or the trailer
mode is activated, for example during operation
with trailer, no steering intervention takes place.
If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre‐
sponding direction before changing lanes, no Cancellation of the warning
warning is issued.
For example, the warning or an active steering in‐
tervention is cancelled in the following situations:
Steering intervention
▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
Depending on the national-market version: if a
lane boundary is crossed in the speed range up ▷ On returning to the correct lane.
to 210 km/h/130 mph, the system may respond ▷ If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or braking
with an active steering intervention in addition to heavily.
the steering wheel vibration. The system thereby ▷ If the hazard warning lights are switched on.
helps to keep the vehicle in driving lane. Steering
▷ On indicating.
intervention can be felt at the steering wheel, and
can be overridden manually at any time. ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control is controlling
the vehicle or it is deactivated.
For example, steering intervention is suppressed
in the following situations: ▷ Directly after a steering intervention by the
vehicle systems.
▷ If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or braking
heavily. ▷ With manual steering intervention.
▷ On indicating. ▷ Possibly when another driver assistance sys‐

tem is activated.
▷ If the hazard warning lights are switched on.
▷ Lane boundaries are not detected.
▷ In driving situations with high driving dynam‐
ics. ▷ When the system limits are reached.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts.

System limits
▷ Directly after a steering intervention by the
vehicle systems.
General
Warning signal
“Collision warning systems”.
Depending on the national-market version: in the
event of multiple active steering interventions by
the system within 3 minutes without the driver's
intervention at the steering wheel during the The system may have restricted functionality in
steering intervention itself, an acoustic warning situations such as the following:
will sound. A short warning signal will sound at ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,
the second steering intervention. A longer warn‐ merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐
201
CONTROLS Safety
ings, for example, in areas where there are The minimum speed is country-specific and dis‐
roadworks. played in the Lane Change Warning menu.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in The system indicates when vehicles are in the
snow, ice, dirt or water. blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from the
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white. The light in the exterior mirror illuminates at a
dimmed level.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
jects. In the above situations, the system issues a
▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead. warning before a lane change with the turn indi‐
▷ Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive- cator activated.
ready state using the Start/Stop button. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. steering wheel vibrates.
A Check Control message may be displayed if When turning at a speed of up to approx.

functionality is restricted. Depending on the na‐ 20 km/h/12 mph, the steering wheel will not vi‐
tional-market version, a yellow icon is also illumi‐ brate.
nated.
Safety notes
Follow the safety information in the Chapter
Lane Change Warning “Collision warning systems”.
Principle Sensors
Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the The system is controlled via the radar sensors at
blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from the side in the rear.
behind in the adjacent lane.
The light in the exterior mirror warns in different Turning the Lane Change Warning
increments. on/off
1. "MENU"
General 2. "Vehicle apps"
6. "Lane change warning"
Adjusting the Lane Change Warning

The system is operational after a minimum Setting the warning time
speed has been reached and uses radar sensors 1. "MENU"
to monitor the area behind and adjacent to the
vehicle. 2. "Vehicle apps"
202
Safety CONTROLS
4. "Driver assistance" Display in the instrument cluster

6. "Lane change warning" Icon Meaning
7. Select the desired setting. Depending on the national-market ver‐

sion:
Adjusting the strength of the steering Icon is illuminated green: the system is
wheel vibration turned on.
1. "MENU" Warnings and, if necessary, steering in‐
2. "Vehicle apps" terventions can occur within the sys‐
tem limits.
4. "Driver assistance" Depending on the national-market ver‐
sion:
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
The icon is illuminated yellow and in
6. "Vibration intensity"
some cases in combination with a
7. Select the desired setting. Check Control message: the system is
The setting is applied to all collision warning sys‐ restricted or has failed.
tems.
sion:
Depending on the national-market
version: turn steering intervention on/off Icon is illuminated yellow: the system
turned off.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Warning function
4. "Driver assistance" Light in the exterior mirror
6. "Lane change warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
The light in the exterior mirror warns of a possi‐

ble collision.
Advance warning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when vehicles are in the blind spot or are ap‐
proaching from the rear.
203
CONTROLS Safety
Acute warning The system becomes responsive again, accord‐

In case of an acute warning, the steering wheel ing to settings, once vehicle speed drops back
briefly vibrates and the light in the exterior mirror below approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
flashes brightly.
Warning displays
An acute warning occurs when the following
conditions are met: Depending on the selected setting for warnings,
for example the warning time, it is possible that
▷ Another vehicle is located in the critical area.
more or fewer warnings will be displayed. As a
▷ Your own vehicle is approaching the other result, there may also be an increased number of
lane. premature warnings about critical situations.
▷ Depending on the system setting when the
turn indicator is turned on. Functional limitations
The warning is terminated when the other vehi‐ The system may have restricted functionality in
cle has left the critical area or the turn indicator situations such as the following:
has been switched off. ▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is
much faster than your own speed.
Steering intervention ▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.
Depending on the national-market version: if
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
there is no response to the steering wheel vibra‐
for instance by stickers.
tions and a lane boundary is crossed at speeds
of up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the system Depending on the national-market version: the
responds, if necessary, with an active steering in‐ steering intervention may be restricted, for exam‐
tervention. The steering intervention helps to re‐ ple, in the following situations:
turn the vehicle to its driving lane. Steering inter‐ ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,
vention can be felt at the steering wheel, and can merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐
be overridden manually at any time. ings, for example, in areas where there are
The steering intervention is performed if a mini‐ roadworks.
mum speed has been reached. The minimum ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
speed is displayed on the control display. snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
Flashing of light ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
A flashing of the light in exterior mirror during ve‐ jects.
hicle unlocking serves as system self-test.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
System limits
▷ Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive-
General ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter A Check Control message may be displayed if
“Collision warning systems”. functionality is restricted. Depending on the na‐
tional-market version, a yellow icon is also illumi‐
Upper speed limit nated.
The system is temporarily disabled at speeds The system is inactive when the trailer socket is
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. occupied or when the trailer operation is activa‐
ted, for example, when operating with a trailer or
204
Safety CONTROLS
bicycle carrier. A Check Control message is Operating requirements

shown.
The lane markings must be detected by the
camera in order for the side collision warning
with steering intervention to be active.
Side collision warning
Sensors
Principle The system is controlled using the following sen‐
The side-collision warning helps to avoid immi‐ sors:
nent side collisions.
General
Turning the side-collision warning

on/off
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Radar sensors monitor the area adjacent to the 5. "Safety and warnings"
vehicle from a minimum speed up to approxi‐ 6. "Side collision warning"
mately , 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph. 7. Select the desired setting.
The minimum speed is country-specific and dis‐
played on the control display. Adjusting the strength of the steering
The camera behind the windscreen detects the wheel vibration
position of the lane boundaries. 1. "MENU"
If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the ve‐ 2. "Vehicle apps"
hicle – and there is a risk of a side collision – the 3. "Driving settings"
system helps the driver to avoid a collision. For
this purpose, the system issues a warning with a
flashing LED in the exterior mirror, a Check Con‐ 5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
trol message and a vibrating steering wheel. The 6. "Vibration intensity"
system may perform an active steering interven‐ 7. Select the desired setting.
tion.
The setting is applied to all collision warning sys‐
tems.
Safety notes
205
CONTROLS Safety
Warning function ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐
Light in the exterior mirror ings, for example, in areas where there are
roadworks.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐
jects.
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
The light in the exterior mirror warns of a possi‐
A Check Control message is displayed in the
ble collision.
event of restricted functionality.
The system is inactive when the trailer socket is
Acute warning occupied or when the trailer operation is activa‐
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ ted, for example, when operating with a trailer or
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel starts bicycle carrier. A Check Control message is
vibrating. shown.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
Rear Collision Prevention
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version, if Principle
necessary, an active steering intervention takes Depending on the equipment and the national-
place to prevent a collision and keep the vehicle market version, the Rear Collision Prevention can
in its own lane. Steering intervention can be felt respond to vehicles approaching from behind.
at the steering wheel, and can be overridden
manually at any time. General
System limits
General
The system may have restricted functionality in
situations such as the following: Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐
▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is cle.
much faster than your own speed. If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a rele‐
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads. vant speed, the system can respond as follows:
206
Safety CONTROLS
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on if

appropriate.
Road Priority Warning
▷ PreCrash functions are triggered if appropri‐
ate.
Principle
The Road Priority Warning provides support in
situations where road signs or traffic lights indi‐
Safety notes cate that the driver must give way.
“Collision warning systems”. General
The system uses a camera behind the wind‐
Sensors screen to evaluate the road signs and traffic
The system is controlled via the radar sensors at lights.
the side in the rear. The navigation system forwards information re‐
garding the road layout to the system.
Turning the Rear Collision Prevention A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to be
on/off violated in the following traffic situations, for ex‐
The system is automatically activated at the start ample:
of each journey. ▷ At a road junction.
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ ▷ At a T-junction.
tions:
▷ On a slip road.
▷ When reversing.
▷ At a roundabout.
▷ If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer oper‐
▷ In the event of a red traffic light.
ation is activated, for example when operating
with a trailer or bicycle carrier. Starting from a variable minimum speed, the sys‐
tem issues warnings from and up to approxi‐
mately 75 km/h, approx. 47 mph.
System limits
The following road signs are taken into account
General for the Road Priority Warning:
Follow the limits of the system in the chapter Signs Meaning

Give way signs:
Functional limitations These signs trigger an advance warn‐

ing.
The system may have restricted functionality in
the following situations: Stop signs.
▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is These signs trigger an advance warn‐
much faster than your own speed. ing and an acute warning.
▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching Red traffic lights trigger an advance
slowly. warning and an acute warning.
207
CONTROLS Safety
Safety notes ▷ Advance warning: visually by means of an

icon in the instrument cluster.
“Collision warning systems”. ▷ Acute warning: visually by means of an icon in
the instrument cluster and with an additional
Operating requirements acoustic signal.
The road priority situation must be unambigu‐ The timing of the warnings may vary depending
ously directed by road signs or light signal sys‐ on the current driving situation and the set warn‐
tems. ing time.
Sensors Advance warning

If there is a risk that road priority is about to be
The system is controlled by the camera behind
ignored, one of the following icons appears in the
the windscreen.
instrument cluster:
Turning the Road Priority Warning Icon Meaning

on/off Give way.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Stop.
5. "Safety and warnings" Red traffic light.
6. "Give way warning"
When an advance warning is issued, intervene as
Setting the warning time appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Acute warning
If there is an imminent risk that right-of-way is
4. "Driver assistance" about to be ignored, an acoustic signal sounds
5. "Safety and warnings" and one of the following icons appears in the in‐
strument cluster:
6. "Give way warning"
7. Select the desired setting. Icon Meaning
▷ "Early" Stop.
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
Red traffic light.
Warning function
General When an acute warning is issued, immediately

The system warns in two stages: intervene as appropriate for the situation; for ex‐
ample, by braking.
208
Safety CONTROLS
Display in the Head-up display ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
Depending on the equipment, the warning is dis‐ outdated or not available.
played in the Head-up display at the same time ▷ The system may not be available or may only
as in the instrument cluster. be available to a limited extent is some coun‐
tries.
System limits
General Wrong-way Warning

“Collision warning systems”. Principle
The Wrong-way Warning issues a warning if the
No Warning driver is about to drive the wrong way, for exam‐
The system provides no warning in situations ple on motorways, roundabouts and one-way
such as the following: streets.
▷ In road priority situations without “Give Way”

signs, “Stop” signs or red light signal sys‐
General
tems. Depending on the equipment, the system will
▷ At road junctions with relevant traffic lights check the traffic situation based on navigation
that illuminate yellow or green. data and road signs.
The system will take into account road signs
Functional limitations such as the following:
The system may have restricted functionality in ▷ No entry.
situations such as the following: ▷ Roundabout.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are un‐ ▷ Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.
clear.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are fully or Safety notes
partially concealed or soiled. Follow the safety information in the Chapter
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are diffi‐ “Collision warning systems”.
cult to read or rotated.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are too Operating requirements
small or too large. The road layout ahead must be unambiguously
▷ When the road signs do not correspond to indicated by road signs.
the standard.
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a Sensors
merging or parallel road. The system is controlled by the camera behind
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific the windscreen.
to one country.
▷ At road junctions with flashing light signal Turning Wrong-way Warning on/off
systems. Depending on the national-market version, the
▷ Up to 10 seconds after switching on drive- Wrong-way Warning is automatically activated
ready state using the Start/Stop button. after each start of the journey.
209
CONTROLS Safety
If Collision Warning is temporarily turned off, the ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
Wrong-way Warning is also turned off. outdated or not available.
▷ It may not be possible to use the system in all
Warning function countries.
A warning is displayed and an acoustic
signal sounds, for example when the ve‐
hicle is travelling in the wrong direction
Emergency Stop Assistant
on a motorway, roundabout or one-way street.
Warnings are displayed in the instrument cluster Principle
and, depending on the equipment, in the Head- If the driver is no longer capable of driving, the
up display. Emergency Stop Assistant helps to bring the ve‐
hicle safely to a standstill.
System limits
General
General The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the vehicle occu‐
pants.
No Warning If the system is activated, the vehicle is brought

to a standstill within its own lane by means of
The system provides no warning if the road lay‐
lane tracking.
out is not indicated by road signs, for example.
ket version, the system may have a lane change
function.
The system may have restricted functionality, or
give no Wrong-way Warning at all, in situations With lane change function: on motorways or sim‐
such as the following: ilar roads, the system steers the vehicle to the
hard shoulder if possible. On other roads or in
▷ If the road signs are ambiguous. heavy traffic, the vehicle is brought to a standstill
▷ If the road signs are fully or partially covered in the road it is currently in.
or soiled.
▷ If the road signs are poorly visible or twisted. Overview
▷ If the road signs are too small or too large.
▷ When the road signs do not correspond to
the standard.
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a
merging or parallel road.
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
210
Safety CONTROLS
Parking brake When the vehicle is at a standstill

As soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the sys‐
tem configures the following settings:
Operating requirements ▷ The vehicle is secured to prevent it from roll‐
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of ing away.
10 km/h, approx. 6 mph to approx. 250 km/h, ▷ The interior lights are switched on.
approx. 155 mph. ▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
▷ With lane change function: lane changes are
performed if the traffic situation allows. Displays in the instrument cluster
Activating the emergency stop Icon Status

function Emergency stop function active.
Briefly press the switch for the parking
brake to activate the emergency stop
function.
Without lane change function:
▷ With lane change function: when the switch is
released, an automatic lane change is trig‐ Icon Status
gered if necessary.
Steering wheel icon green:
▷ The system takes over vehicle control for a
If lane boundaries are detected, the
maximum of 2 minutes.
system keeps the vehicle in the lane.
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on.
Steering wheel icon grey:
▷ An emergency call is triggered.
Lane tracking interrupted briefly.
Cancelling the emergency stop Steering wheel icon yellow:

function Lane marking driven over.
At any time during the process, the driver can If lane boundaries are detected, the
cancel the emergency stop function by actively system keeps the vehicle in the lane.
taking control of the vehicle.
Steering wheel icon yellow:
For example, the emergency stop function is
Hands are not around the steering
cancelled in the following situations:
wheel. System remains active.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned.
Red steering wheel icon, acoustic sig‐
▷ On indicating.
nal sounds:
▷ When the accelerator pedal is pressed.
Hands are not around the steering
▷ When the hazard warning lights are switched wheel. Interruption of lane tracking is
off. imminent.
▷ When the emergency call is cancelled.
Red steering wheel icon, acoustic sig‐
▷ When the selector lever position is changed nal sounds:
while at a standstill.
Lane tracking is switched off.
▷ The parking brake switch is pressed.
211
CONTROLS Safety
System limits Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.

In addition, look directly to check the traffic sit‐
Only use the system if the driver is no longer
uation and the vehicle surroundings and inter‐
able to operate the vehicle.
vene actively where appropriate.
The system cannot replace the abilities of a
driver who is capable of driving.
Sensors
Crossing-traffic Warning The system is controlled using the following sen‐
sors:
Principle
▷ Depending on the equipment: side radar sen‐
At blind exits or when leaving bay parking sors, front.
spaces, the Crossing-traffic Warning detects
other road users approaching from the side ear‐
lier than is possible from the driver's seat.
Turning on/turning off the Crossing-
traffic Warning manually
General 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Parking and manoeuvring"
6. "CROSSING-TRAFFIC WARNING"
Turning on the Crossing-traffic

The area behind to the vehicle is monitored by Warning automatically
sensors. If the system was activated on the control dis‐
Depending on the equipment, the area in front of play, it is automatically turned on as soon as the
the vehicle is also monitored. Park Distance Control or a camera view is active
The system indicates when other road users are and a selector lever position is engaged.
approaching. The system is switched on at the rear when re‐
verse gear is engaged.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
Depending on the equipment, the front system is
assistance systems”.
turned on when a drive position is engaged.
Safety note Depending on the national-market version, the

system is automatically active when the vehicle
is started.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Turning off the Cross-traffic Warning
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ automatically
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
The system is automatically turned off, for exam‐
respond independently and appropriately in all
ple, in the following situations:
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
212
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If walking speed is exceeded. Depending on the equipment: display in the

▷ When a certain distance covered is excee‐ camera image
ded.
Warning function
General
The control display shows the corresponding im‐
age, an acoustic signal sounds, if necessary, and
the light in the exterior mirror flashes.
Visual warning Depending on the direction of travel, the view to

the front or rear is displayed in the camera im‐
Light in the exterior mirror age.
The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the cam‐
era view flashes red if the sensors detect vehi‐
cles.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of your
vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, an acoustic sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if other ve‐
spective direction.
hicles are detected by the rear sensors when the
vehicle is reversing. Depending on the national-market version, the
acoustic signal will already sound when the drive
position is engaged.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
System limits

Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47.
The function can be restricted, for example, in
In the Park Distance Control view, the relevant the following situations:
boundary area flashes red if the sensors detect ▷ On sharp bends.
vehicles. ▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow or
a very fast speed.
213
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in the General

capture range of the sensors.
There are various ways of saving video record‐
▷ If the trailer socket is occupied or the trailer ings.
mode is activated, the Cross-traffic Warning
▷ Automatic saving of recordings.
is not available for the area behind the vehi‐
cle. The function makes it possible to document
the circumstances of an accident.
▷ Manual saving of recordings.
Dynamic brake lights The function makes it possible to document
traffic situations.
Principle Cameras of the parking view are used, for exam‐
The brake lights flash to warn road users behind ple Panorama View.
the vehicle that emergency braking is being per‐ In addition, the following journey parameters are
formed. saved:
▷ Date.
General ▷ Time.
▷ Speed.
▷ GPS coordinates.
Data protection
The reliability of the recording and the use of
video recordings depend on the legal regulations
in the country where the system is to be used.
The user is responsible for the use of the system
▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate. and for complying with the provisions that apply
in each case.
▷ Heavy braking: brake lights flash.
Before using for the first time, the vehicle manu‐
Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill, facture recommends checking that there are no
the hazard warning lights are activated. legal or official restrictions on using the system in
To switch off the hazard warning lights: the state or country in question. Additionally, the
▷ Accelerate. legality of using the system should be checked
at regular intervals, especially if the vehicle fre‐
▷ Press the hazard warning lights button.
quently crosses borders.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed of
the system. Information about the system must
BMW Drive Recorder also be provided if the vehicle is passed on to
anyone else.
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder saves short video re‐ Operating requirements
cordings of the vehicle surroundings in order to ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
document the traffic situation, for example. ▷ Privacy Policy has been accepted.
214
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Recording type was selected. Via iDrive

▷ Recording duration was selected. Start the recording:
1. "MENU"
Activating/deactivating the BMW
2. "All apps"
Drive Recorder
3. "Drive Recorder"
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐
fore using the recording function for the first 4. "Recording"
time. 5. "Start recording"
1. "MENU" The recording can also be started using the

widget on the control display.
2. "All apps"
The system saves the recordings up to 20 sec‐
3. "Drive Recorder"
onds before and after the save function was trig‐
4. Accept data protection policy. gered.
5. "Settings"
6. "Allow recording" Playing and managing recordings
7. Select the desired setting. Saved video recordings can be played, exported
and deleted.
Recording functions For your own safety, the video recording is only
shown on the control display if the speed is be‐
Automatic recording low approximately 3 km/h, 2 mph. In the case of
some national-market versions, the video record‐
The recording is saved automatically when the
ing is only shown with the parking brake applied
vehicle sensors detect an accident.
or with the selector lever in position P.
The system records for up to 20 seconds before
and after the save function was triggered. 1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Manual recording 3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
Using the button
5. Select the desired recording.
If the cameras switched during the recording, it is
possible to select different sections of the video.
Settings
General
Various settings can be made.
Press and hold the button.
Recording type
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
215
CONTROLS Safety
3. "Drive Recorder" General

4. "Settings" Depending on the equipment and the national-
5. Select the desired setting. market version, Active Protection consists of dif‐
ferent PreCrash functions.
Recording duration The system detects critical driving situations
1. "MENU" which could potentially lead to an accident. Such
critical driving situations include:
2. "All apps"
▷ Full braking.
3. "Drive Recorder"
▷ Severe understeering.
4. "Settings"
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of some systems installed in
Cameras the vehicle can – within the system limits – cause
Active Protection to trigger:
Different cameras can be selected.
▷ Collision Warning with braking function: auto‐
1. "MENU" matic brake intervention.
2. "All apps" ▷ Collision Warning with braking function: brake
3. "Drive Recorder" power assistance.
4. "Settings" ▷ Rear Collision Prevention: detection of poten‐
5. "Camera selection" tial rear collisions.
6. Select the desired camera.

Safety note
In the event of an accident, the system switches
to "All" cameras automatically.
WARNING
If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐
era views are selected automatically. The system does not relieve you of your per‐
sonal responsibility. System limitations may
System limits mean that critical situations are not detected
reliably or in good time. There is a risk of acci‐
In the event of a serious accident, recordings dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
may not be saved if, for example, the damage to ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
the vehicle is too extensive or the power supply vene actively if the situation warrants it.
was interrupted.
Function
Active Protection
If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt strap is automatically tensioned once
Principle when driving off.
In critical situations, Active Protection prepares In critical accident situations, the following indi‐
the passengers and the vehicle for a potential vidual functions become active as required:
imminent accident.
216
Safety CONTROLS
▷ Automatic pre-tensioning of the front seat To do so, brake quickly and firmly. For a brief pe‐
belts. riod, the braking pressure will be higher than that
▷ Automatic closing of the windows, leaving achieved with the automatic braking function.
just a small gap. Automatic braking is interrupted.
▷ For glass sunroof: automatic closing of glass

sunroof, including sun protection. Cancelling automatic braking
▷ For panoramic glass sunroof: automatic clos‐ In certain situations, it may be necessary to can‐
ing of the panoramic glass sunroof, including cel automatic braking, for example if evasive ac‐
sun protection. tion is required.
▷ With comfort seat in the front: automatic po‐ Cancel automatic braking:
sitioning of the backrest of the front passen‐ ▷ By depressing the brake pedal.
ger seat. ▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ With comfort seats in the rear: automatic po‐
sitioning of the rear seat backrests.
If the critical driving situation passes without an
Attentiveness Assistant
accident occurring, the tension in the front seat
belts is slackened again. If the belt tension does Principle
not slacken automatically, stop the vehicle and The Attentiveness Assistant can detect decreas‐
unfasten the seat belt by pressing the red button ing attentiveness or the onset of fatigue in the
on the seat belt buckle. Fasten the seat belt driver on long monotonous journeys, for example
again before continuing driving. All other systems on motorways. The system recommends taking
can be restored to the desired setting. a break.
PostCrash – iBrake Safety note
Principle WARNING
In certain accident situations, PostCrash can au‐ The system does not relieve you of your per‐
tomatically bring the vehicle to a standstill with‐ sonal responsibility to assess your physical
out an intervention from the driver. condition correctly. Increasing inattention or fa‐
tigue might not be detected, or may not be de‐
tected in good time. There is a risk of accident.
General Make sure that the driver is rested and alert.
PostCrash can reduce the risk of a further colli‐ Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
sion and its consequences.
At a standstill Function
Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake is The system is switched on every time drive-
released automatically. ready state is switched on.
Once the journey has started, the system adapts
Harder vehicle deceleration to the driver so that any decrease in attention or
In certain situations, it may be necessary to bring fatigue can be detected.
the vehicle to a standstill more quickly than is This process considers the following criteria:
possible with automatic braking.
217
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Personal driving style, for example steering. ▷ If the time is set incorrectly.
▷ Driving conditions, for example time of day, ▷ When the speed is predominantly below ap‐
duration of journey. prox. 70 km/h, 43 mph.
▷ Depending on the equipment: attentiveness ▷ If a sporty driving style is adopted, for exam‐
of the driver through the Driver Attention ple sharp acceleration or fast cornering.
Camera. ▷ In active driving situations, for example fre‐
The system is active from approx. 70 km/h, quent lane changes.
43 mph and can also display a recommendation ▷ In poor road condition.
to take a break.
▷ In strong crosswinds.
Break recommendations The system is reset approximately 45 minutes

after the vehicle is stopped, for example when
taking a break during a long motorway journey.
Setting break recommendations
The Attentiveness Assistant is automatically ac‐
tive every time drive-ready state is switched on Driver Attention Camera
and can therefore display break recommenda‐
tion.
Principle
Break recommendation can also be switched on
or off and adjusted via iDrive. Depending on the equipment, a camera in the in‐
strument cluster monitors the driver activity or
1. "MENU" the driver's direction of view.
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" General
4. "Driver assistance" For support by assistance systems, the attention
of the driver is analysed by evaluating the head
position and eye opening of the driver.
6. "Attentiveness Assistant"
To guarantee full functionality, ensure that the
7. Select the desired setting. Driver Attention Camera has an unobstructed
field of view.
Display For further information:
If the driver shows signs of decreasing attentive‐
▷ Attentiveness Assistant, see page 217.
ness or of fatigue, a note is shown on the control
display with the recommendation to take a break. ▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant with As‐
sisted Driving Plus, see page 244.
The following settings can be selected during
the display.
After a break, another break recommendation
cannot be displayed until after approximately
45 minutes at the earliest.
System limits
The system may have restricted functionality, or
give no warning at all, in situations such as the
following:
218
Safety CONTROLS
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the instrument

cluster has up to 3 infrared light sources. De‐
pending on the light conditions, they can be visi‐
ble when the vehicle is in the standby state.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may have restricted
functionality in situations such as the following:
▷ If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by
the steering wheel.
▷ If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high
protection against infrared light.
219
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment spond even more rapidly when braking in critical
situations.
Dynamic Stability Control
For further information: Principle
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive
power and by brake intervention on individual
Anti-lock Braking System ABS wheels.
General
Principle
The system detects the following unstable driv‐
The Anti-lock Braking System ABS prevents the
ing conditions, for example:
wheels from locking when the brakes are ap‐
plied. ▷ Loss of traction at the rear which can lead to
oversteering.
Steering control is retained even during full brak‐
ing, which enhances active road safety. ▷ Loss of grip at the front wheels which can
lead to understeering.
ABS is operational each time the drive-ready
state is switched on.
Safety notes
Brake Assist WARNING

When the brake is pressed quickly, Brake Assist
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
automatically provides the maximum possible
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
braking force assistance. This keeps the stop‐
not respond independently and appropriately in
ping distance as short as possible in full braking
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
situations. The advantages offered by the Anti-
lock Braking System ABS are utilised in this
case.
The pressure on the brake should be maintained
for the duration of the full-braking process.
WARNING
Adaptive brake assist When driving with a roof load, for example with
a roof rack, the higher centre of gravity can
In combination with Cruise Control with distance mean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐
control, this system ensures that the brakes re‐ teed in critical driving situations. There is a risk
of accident or material damage. Driving with
220
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Activating the system
Control.

Overview 2. "DSC ON"

3. Press the button to close the selec‐
tion.
After switching on drive-ready state, Dynamic
Stability Control is activated.
Display
In the instrument cluster

"DSC OFF": display in the instrument cluster
with deactivated Dynamic Stability Control.
DSC OFF

Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic
Activating/deactivating Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Stability Control
Indicator light flashes: Dynamic Stability
General Control controls the drive and brake
Driving stability during acceleration and cornering forces. The vehicle is being stabilised.
is restricted if Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐ Decrease speed and adjust driving style to the
vated. road conditions.
To assist driving stability, re-activate Dynamic Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic Stability
Stability Control as soon as possible. Control malfunction or initialising. No driving sta‐
bilisation.
Deactivating the system Have the system checked immediately by a
1. Press the button. shop.
2. "DSC OFF"
3. "Activate anyway" Automatic programme change
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated auto‐
4. Press the button to close the selec‐ matically by the front-collision warning, depend‐
tion. ing on the situation.
221
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Dynamic Traction Control Activating/deactivating Dynamic

Traction Control
Principle
To activate the system
Dynamic Traction Control is a drive-optimised
variant of Dynamic Stability Control.
In special road conditions, for example on un‐ 1. Press the button to open the selec‐
cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose surfa‐ tion.
ces, the system ensures maximum drive, but 2. "Traction"
with restricted driving stability. 3. "Activate traction"
General
4. Press the button to close the selec‐
Activating Dynamic Traction Control provides
tion.
maximum traction. Driving stability is restricted
when accelerating and cornering.
Deactivating the system
Activating Dynamic Traction Control briefly may
be useful in the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- 1. Press the button to open the selec‐
covered roads. tion.
▷ When driving off in deep snow or on a loose 2. "DSC ON"

surface.
▷ When driving with snow chains. 3. Press the button to close the selec‐
tion.
Overview
Display
In the instrument cluster
When Dynamic Traction Control is activated,
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control is activated.
DSC OFF
Automatic programme change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control is
activated automatically:
222
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control is spective of the current speed, the variable sport
activated. steering reacts to the angle of the steering wheel
▷ In case of a brake intervention by the front- with varying steering ratios.
collision warning.
▷ In the event of a flat tyre.
xDrive
Principle
xDrive is the all-wheel drive system of the vehi‐
cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and and
other suspension control systems, for example,
Dynamic Stability Control, further optimises trac‐
tion and driving dynamics.
General
xDrive distributes the driving power variably to
the front and rear axles according to the driving
situation and road condition.
Efficient4x4 reduces consumption by deploying
all-wheel drive as required.
Servotronic
Principle
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering assis‐
tance.
The system provides more steering force assis‐
tance at lower speeds than at higher speeds.
This makes it easier to park, for example, and
provides a firmer steering feel when driving at
higher speeds.
In addition, the steering force is adapted accord‐
ing to the drive mode, so that a firm, sporty feel
or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.
Variable sport steering

The variable sport steering facilitates a direct and
agile driving style with less steering effort. Irre‐
223
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle equipment 6. "Speed warning"
7. "Warning at:"
This chapter describes equipment, systems and 8. Select the desired setting.
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ Setting the current speed as the
speed limit warning
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Speed limit warning 4. "Driver assistance"
Principle 6. "Speed warning"
The speed limit warning can be used to set a 7. "Adopt current speed"
speed limit. A warning will be issued when this
speed limit is exceeded.
Manual Speed Limiter
General
The warning is repeated if the set speed limit is Principle
exceeded again after dropping below it by The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set a
5 km/h/3 mph. speed limit, for instance, to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding speed limits.
Activating/deactivating the speed limit
warning General
1. "MENU" The system allows speeds of 30 km/h/20 mph
2. "Vehicle apps" and above to be set as a speed limit. Below the
set speed limit, the vehicle can be driven without
restriction.
6. "Speed warning"
Setting the speed

1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
224
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Overview To interrupt the speed limiter

The system is interrupted in reverse gear or
Buttons on the steering wheel when rolling backwards at idle.
Button Function Changing the speed limit

System on/off.
To store the current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
To change the speed limit.
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down
Operation until the desired speed limit is set.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
Turning on the speed limiter resistance point, the speed limit is increased
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the speed limit
The current speed is adopted as the speed limit. changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph
When switching on at a standstill or driving at low
on the mph display in the speedometer.
speed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
The speedometer marker is set to the appropri‐
exceeded, for example when driving downhill,
ate speed.
there is no active brake intervention.
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic Sta‐
If you set a speed during the journey which is be‐
bility Control may be switched on and the drive
low the current speed, the vehicle decelerates to
mode may be changed.
the set speed limit.
Turning off the speed limiter The current speed can also be stored by press‐
ing the button:
The system switches off automatically in situa‐

tions such as the following:
Exceeding of speed limit
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
The system gives a warning if the vehicle's
▷ When switching on Cruise Control. speed exceeds the set speed limit.
▷ When activating some programmes using You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.
Driving Experience Control.
To intentionally exceed the set speed limit, press
The displays turn off. the accelerator pedal all the way down.
225
The limit automatically becomes active again as

soon as the current speed falls below the set
Cruise Control without distance
speed limit. control
Warning when the speed limit is Principle
exceeded Cruise Control allows a set speed to be specified
using the buttons on the steering wheel. The set
Visual warning speed is then maintained by the system. It does
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐ this by automatically accelerating and braking the
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes vehicle as necessary.
for as long as the set speed limit is ex‐
ceeded. General
The system can be activated from
30 km/h/20 mph.
Acoustic warning
▷ A warning sounds if you inadvertently exceed Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐
the set speed limit. istics of Cruise Control may change in certain
areas, for example acceleration in ECO PRO
▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the drive mode is less pronounced.
driven speed during the journey, the signal
sounds after a little time.
Safety notes
▷ No signal sounds if you intentionally exceed
the speed limit by fully pressing the accelera‐
tor pedal. WARNING
Displays in the instrument cluster sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
Display in the speedometer not respond independently and appropriately in
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the system.
▷ Green marker: system is ac‐ tively if the situation warrants it.
tive.
▷ Grey mark: the system is inter‐
rupted. WARNING
▷ No marker: system is switched The risk of an accident may increase if the sys‐
off. tem is used in certain situations, such as:
▷ On stretches of road with many corners
Indicator light and bends.
▷ Indicator light illuminates: the system ▷ In heavy traffic.

is switched on. ▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow, in
▷ Indicator light flashes: set speed limit wet conditions or on a loose road surface.
is exceeded.
▷ Grey indicator light: the system is interrupted.
226
There is a risk of accident or material damage. Depending on the equipment, press the
Only use the system if it is possible to drive at a corresponding button on the steering
constant speed. wheel.
The indicator lights are illuminated in the instru‐

ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer
WARNING
is positioned at the current speed.
The desired speed may be set incorrectly by
Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is
mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk
maintained and stored as the set speed.
of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. turned on.
Switching the system off

Overview Depending on the equipment, press the
corresponding button on the steering
Buttons on the steering wheel wheel.
Button Function
Cruise Control on/off. The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
To interrupt Cruise Control
Manually interrupting the system

To resume Cruise Control with last
setting. Press the button while the system is acti‐
vated.
To interrupt Cruise Control.
Interrupting the system automatically
To store the current speed. The system is interrupted automatically in the
gested speed manually. ▷ When braking manually.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
Rocker switch:
▷ Dynamic Traction Control is activated or Dy‐
To set the speed. namic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts.
Turning the Cruise Control on/off
Turning on the system
227
Setting the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed is increased
Maintaining and saving the speed or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the set speed
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph
on the mph display in the speedometer.
The maximum speed which can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ When the rocker switch is pressed to the re‐
sistance point and then held there: the vehi‐
While the system is interrupted, press the rocker cle accelerates or decelerates without the
switch up or down once. need to press the accelerator pedal.
When the system is switched on, the current When the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
speed is maintained and stored as the set speed. cle maintains the final speed. Pressing be‐
yond the resistance point accelerates the ve‐
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
hicle more rapidly.
eter.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be Resuming Cruise Control
turned on.
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed
The speed can also be stored by pressing the by calling up the stored speed.
button.
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure
Press the button. that the difference between the current speed
and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise,
there may be unintentional deceleration or accel‐
eration.
Changing the speed
With the system interrupted, press the
button.
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values.

In the following instances, the stored speed value
is deleted and therefore cannot be called up
again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
until the set speed is set. Displays in the instrument cluster
If the system is active, the displayed speed is
stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored Display in the speedometer
speed when the road is clear. Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
228
▷ Green marker: system is ac‐ General

tive, the marker shows the set
When the road ahead is clear, the system main‐
speed.
tains the set speed. The vehicle accelerates or
▷ Grey marker: system is inter‐ brakes automatically.
rupted; the marker shows the
If there is a vehicle driving in front, the system
stored speed.
adapts the speed of your vehicle in order to
▷ No marker: system is switched off. maintain the set distance from the vehicle ahead.
The speed is adapted as far as the given situa‐
Indicator light tion allows.
The distance can be set in several stages and for
▷ Green indicator light: the system is
safety reasons is dependent on the respective
active.
speed.
▷ Grey indicator light: the system is in‐
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and
terrupted.
sets off again shortly afterwards, the system is
▷ No indicator light: the system is switched off. able to comprehend this as far as the given con‐
ditions allow.
Displays in the Head-up display Otherwise, drive off yourself, for example by
pressing the accelerator pedal or rocker switch
Some information from the system can also be
on the steering wheel.
shown in the Head-up display.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐
The icon is displayed when the selected istics of Cruise Control may change in certain
set speed has been reached. areas, for example acceleration in ECO PRO
drive mode is less pronounced.
System limits
The set speed is also maintained when driving
Safety notes
downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set
speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough WARNING
drive power. The system does not relieve you of your per‐
In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
vehicle will drive faster or slower than the set tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
speed setting in some situations, for example on not respond independently and appropriately in
downhill or uphill gradients. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Active Cruise Control with tively if the situation warrants it.
distance control
WARNING
Principle
Active Cruise Control allows the driver to specify
ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
a set speed and a desired distance from the ve‐
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
hicle in front, using the buttons on the steering
rolling away.
wheel.
229
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ Overview

cle is secured against rolling away:
▷ Apply the parking brake. Buttons on the steering wheel
upward or downward gradients. Button Function
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward With Steering and Lane Control Assis‐
or downward gradients, for example with a tant:
chock. Cruise Control on/off.
With Steering and Lane Control Assis‐

WARNING tant:
The desired speed may be set incorrectly by To select the function.
Without Steering and Lane Control As‐
sistant:
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. Cruise Control on/off.
To store the current speed.

WARNING gested speed manually.
There is a risk of accident if the difference in
speed relative to other vehicles is too great.
tant:
This may occur, for example, in the following
situations: To interrupt Cruise Control.
▷ When quickly approaching a slowly mov‐ To resume Cruise Control with last
ing vehicle. setting.
▷ If another vehicle suddenly veers into the Without Steering and Lane Control As‐
vehicle's own lane. sistant:
▷ When quickly approaching stationary vehi‐ To resume Cruise Control with last
cles. setting.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Observe Without Steering and Lane Control As‐
the traffic situation and intervene actively if the sistant:
situation warrants it.
To interrupt Cruise Control.
To increase the distance.

To switch distance control on/off.
To reduce the distance.

To switch distance control on/off.
Rocker switch:
To set the speed.
230
Sensors Icon Function

The system is controlled using the following sen‐
Cruise Control with distance control.
sors:
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen.
▷ Front radar sensor. Cruise Control with distance control
For further information: and Steering and Lane Control Assis‐
tant.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47.
The selected function is shown in green.

Use
The system can be used to optimum effect on Turning on the system
well-constructed roads.
With Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
The minimum speed that can be set is
30 km/h/20 mph.
The maximum speed which can be set is limited 1. Press the button on the steering
and depends on the vehicle and its equipment, wheel.
for example.
Higher speeds can be set by switching to Cruise 2. Set Cruise Control if necessary.
Control without distance control.
Without Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
The system can also be activated when the vehi‐
cle is at a standstill. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Turning the Cruise Control on/off or The indicator lights are illuminated in the instru‐
interrupting it ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer
is positioned at the current speed.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is
Assisted Driving Mode maintained and stored as the set speed.
General If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be

turned on.
The button is used to switch the set
function on and off. Switching the system off
When switching off with the vehicle at a stand‐
The button is used to set the primary
still, depress the brake at the same time.
function.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Setting the function With Steering and Lane Control Assis‐

tant.
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired func‐ Without Steering and Lane Control As‐
tion is selected in the toolbar. The Assis‐ sistant.
ted Driving Mode toolbar is shown at the bottom
of the instrument cluster. The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
231
Manually interrupting the system Setting the speed

With the system active, press the button on the
steering wheel: Maintaining and saving the speed
tant.
Without Steering and Lane Control As‐

sistant.
If interrupting the system when the vehicle is at a

standstill, depress the brake at the same time.
Interrupting the system automatically While the system is interrupted, press the rocker
The system is interrupted automatically in the switch up or down once. The system is activa‐
following situations: ted.
▷ The driver brakes.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. the set speed.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control is activated or Dy‐ The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
namic Stability Control is deactivated. eter.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts. If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, the seat belt is turned on.
unfastened and the driver's door is opened. The speed can also be stored by pressing the
▷ The system has not detected any objects for button.
an extended period, for example, on a road
Press the button.
with very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ The detection range of the radar is impaired,
for example, by contamination or heavy pre‐ Changing the speed
cipitation.
▷ After an extended stationary period, if the ve‐
hicle was decelerated to a standstill by the
system.

until the set speed is set.
If the system is active, the displayed speed is

stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored
speed when the road is clear.
232
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the tomatically within the set distance according to
resistance point, the set speed is increased the traffic situation or environmental factors, for
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. example, poor visibility.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ 1. "MENU"
yond the resistance point, the set speed
2. "Vehicle apps"
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph 3. "Driving settings"
on the mph display in the speedometer. 4. "Driver assistance"
To repeat an action, hold the rocker switch in the 5. "Driving"
relevant position. 6. "Speed Assistant"
7. "Adjust distance based on conditions"
Adjusting the distance
Safety note
Resuming Cruise Control
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed
by calling up the stored speed.
WARNING
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ that the difference between the current speed
sonal responsibility. System limitations may and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise,
mean that braking is performed too late. There there may be unintentional deceleration or accel‐
is a risk of accident or material damage. Pay eration.
close attention to the traffic conditions at all
With the system interrupted, press the button on
times. Adapt the distance to suit traffic and
the steering wheel:
weather conditions and comply with the pre‐
scribed safe distance by braking if necessary. With Steering and Lane Control Assis‐
tant.
Reducing the distance Without Steering and Lane Control As‐

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐ sistant.
sired distance is set.
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐ In the following instances, the stored speed value
ment cluster. is deleted and therefore cannot be called up
again:
Increasing the distance ▷ When the system is switched off.
Press the button repeatedly until the de‐ ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
sired distance is set.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster.
Adapting the distance automatically

ket version: the system can be configured so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is adapted au‐
233
Switching between Cruise Control Display in the speedometer

with/without distance control Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
Safety note ▷ Green marker: system is ac‐
tive, the marker shows the set
WARNING speed.
The system does not respond to traffic travel‐ ▷ Grey marker: system is inter‐
ling in front of you, but instead maintains the rupted; the marker shows the
stored speed. There is a risk of accident or ma‐ stored speed.
terial damage. Adjust the desired speed to the ▷ No marker: system is switched off.
traffic conditions and brake if necessary.

Switching the Cruise Control mode Depending on the equipment:
To switch Cruise Control without distance con‐ Icon Description
trol on and off:
White vehicle icon:
No display of distance control
▷ Press and hold the button.
because the accelerator pedal is
being pressed.
▷ Press and hold the button. Green icon:
With Steering and Lane Control Assistant: to Vehicle ahead detected.
switch on distance control:
The vehicle icon goes out if no
Press the button. vehicle in front is detected.
Vehicle icon flashes green:
Without Steering and Lane Control Assistant: to Preceding vehicle has driven off.
switch on distance control:
Grey icon:
System interrupted.
▷ Press the button.
▷ Press the button.

A Check Control message is then displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General
Depending on the equipment, the displays in the
instrument cluster may vary.
234
Icon Description With Steering and Lane Control

Icon flashes grey:
Assistant: prevent overtaking
This function helps to prevent inadvertent over‐
The requirements for system
taking on motorways.
operation are no longer being
met. Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version, the system can be configured to
The system has been deactiva‐
prevent overtaking in the slower driving lane.
ted but will continue to brake
until you actively take over by The setting applies to speeds over
depressing the brake or acceler‐ 80 km/h/50 mph.
ator pedal. When the set speed is significantly higher than
the speed in the adjacent lane, passing or over‐
Vehicle icon flashes red and an
taking may still be possible even if the function is
acoustic signal sounds:
switched on.
Brake and take avoidance ma‐
At speeds below 80 km/h/50 mph, vehicles on
noeuvre if necessary.
motorways are only overtaken with an adjusted
differential speed.
Displays in the Head-up display The driver can overtake or accelerate at any time
by pressing the accelerator pedal.
Set speed
Turning the function on/off:
Some information from the system can also be
shown in the Head-up display. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
The icon is displayed when the selected
set speed has been reached. 3. "Driving settings"
Distance information 5. "Driving"
The icon is shown if your vehicle is too
close to the vehicle ahead. 7. ▷ "Avoid overtaking on the left"
▷ "Avoid overtaking on the right"
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
System limits
▷ Active Cruise Control with Distance control is
switched off. System limits of the sensors
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected. For further information:
Head-up display, see page 174. ▷ Cameras, see page 47.
▷ Distance too close. ▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
▷ Speed above approximately 70 km/h,
40 mph.
235
Detection range prompts you to intervene by braking, and if nec‐

essary by taking avoidance manoeuvre.
Cornering
The system's detection capability and automatic

braking capacity are limited.
For example, two-wheel vehicles may not be de‐
tected. If the set speed is too high for cornering, it will be
reduced slightly in the bend. However, since
Deceleration bends may not be anticipated in advance, mod‐
erate your speed when cornering.
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations: The system has a restricted detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise on tight bends where a vehicle
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow road users. driving in front will not be detected or will be de‐
▷ Depending on the equipment and national- tected very late.
market version at red traffic lights.
▷ For crossing traffic.
▷ For oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles cutting in
When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the

curvature may cause the system to respond
temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If the
system responds by decelerating the vehicle,
you may compensate for this by accelerating
If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you, briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released
the system might not be able to restore the se‐ again, the system will resume control of the vehi‐
lected distance automatically. In some circum‐ cle's speed.
stances, it may also not be possible to restore
the selected distance if you are driving signifi‐
Driving off
cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example
when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle is The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in
clearly detected in front of you, the system some situations, for example:
236
▷ On steep upward gradients. The speed value is proposed as a new set speed
▷ Before bumps or rises in the road. for adopting. The relevant system must be acti‐
vated for the speed value to be adopted.
▷ When towing a heavy trailer.
Depending on the equipment, destination sys‐
In such cases, press the accelerator pedal.
tem and national-market version, the value may
be applied automatically.
Weather
With traffic light detection: Speed Limit Assist
In adverse weather and lighting conditions, sys‐ controls the speed when the vehicle approaches
tem functionality may be limited as follows: red traffic lights.
▷ Impaired detection of vehicles.
▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already Safety notes
been detected.
Pay attention when driving and respond to the WARNING
prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, intervene
actively, for example by braking, steering or tak‐
ing avoidance manoeuvre.
Drive power all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
The set speed is also maintained when driving Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough tively if the situation warrants it.
drive power.
In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the
vehicle will drive faster or slower than the set WARNING
speed setting in some situations, for example on
The desired speed may be set incorrectly by
downhill or uphill gradients.
Speed Limit Assist traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Principle
Speed Limit Assist helps the driver to observe Overview
speed limits. A suggested speed can be adop‐
ted. Buttons on the steering wheel
General Button Function

When the systems in the vehicle, for example To accept the suggested speed man‐
Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed ually.
limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed value With traffic light detection: detected
for the following systems: traffic lights are accepted manually.
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.
Rocker switch:
▷ Cruise Control.
To set the speed; see Cruise Control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control.
237
Turning Speed Limit Assist on/off Icon Function

1. "MENU"
Depending on the equipment, the
2. "Vehicle apps" indicator light illuminates green, to‐
3. "Driving settings" gether with the icon for a Cruise
Control System:
Speed Limit Assist is active and
5. "Driving"
detected speed limits can be
6. "Speed Assistant" adopted manually for the displayed
7. "Speed limits" system.
8. Select the desired setting: Detected change in speed limit de‐
▷ "Adjust automatically": depending on the tected with immediate effect.
equipment: detected speed limits are ap‐ Distance information shown along‐
plied automatically. side the icon indicates there might
With traffic light detection: detected traffic be a change in the speed limit up
lights are accepted automatically if possi‐ ahead.
ble.
Indicator light is illuminated green:
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits the detected speed limit can be
can be applied manually. adopted with the SET button.
With traffic light detection: detected traffic With traffic light detection: detec‐
lights can be accepted manually. ted traffic lights can be accepted
▷ "Show anticipation": current and upcom‐ with the SET button.
ing speed limits are displayed in the in‐ A green tick is displayed once it
strument cluster without being applied. has been adopted.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed limits
are displayed without being applied in the
instrument cluster.
Automatic adoption
Depending on the equipment, a detected speed
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
limit in automatic mode is automatically accepted
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit
for the Active Cruise Control with distance con‐
Assist will be turned off.
trol or the Manual Speed Limiter.
Other proactive comfort functions – the
Route-ahead Assistant, for example – may After an automatic adoption, the button
be switched off. can be pressed to switch back to the last
set value of the set speed.
Displays in the instrument cluster With traffic light detection: detected traffic lights
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster are accepted automatically if possible.
when the system and a driver assistance system
are activated. Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied manually
for the active driver assistance system.
With traffic light detection: detected traffic lights
can be accepted manually.
238
When the SET icon is illuminated, press For example, the speed is reduced in the
the button. following situations if necessary:
▷ Before turning off.
Speed adjustment ▷ Before a roundabout.
▷ Before a bend.
Principle
It is possible to set whether the speed limit will Adjusting
be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
General
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up to
60 km/h/40 mph can be set up. 5. "Driving"
The additional speed adjustment for speeds up 6. "Speed Assistant"
to 60 km/h/40 mph can be activated or deactiva‐ 7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
ted. speed to route"
Setting the speed adjustment Depending on the equipment version:

1. "MENU" traffic light detection
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Driving settings" Principle
4. "Driver assistance" Speed Limit Assist controls the speed when the
vehicle approaches red traffic lights.
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Assistant" General
7. Select the desired setting: The camera near the interior mirror is used to
▷ "Adjust speed limits": to set a speed ad‐ detect red traffic lights.
justment tolerance that will affect all If necessary, the system also uses the Driver At‐
speeds. tention Camera and the information that has
▷ "2nd adjustment up to": to activate or de‐ been saved in the navigation system.
activate additional speed adjustment. Detected red traffic lights are displayed in the in‐
▷ "Adjust speed limits": with activated addi‐ strument cluster and, depending on the setting,
tional speed adjustment, set the tolerance can be taken into account by Speed Limit Assist
for speed limits up to 60 km/h/40 mph. either manually or automatically during the jour‐
ney.
Adjusting to the route
Principle
Depending on the equipment, the system can be
set so that the vehicle adapts the speed auto‐
matically to the route.
239
Overview Displays in the instrument cluster
Sensors Icon Meaning

The system is controlled using the following sen‐ Red traffic light detected.
sors:
As soon as a green tick is
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. displayed after adoption,
For further information: the vehicle brakes to a
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47. standstill.
Green traffic light detected.

▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control is
activated. Green traffic light: the sys‐
▷ Speed up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph. tem is interrupted.
▷ The function must be available in the country If the grey traffic light is dis‐
in which the vehicle is being driven. played with a red cross, it
cannot be offered for ac‐
Activating/deactivating ceptance.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
System limits
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit
Info system.
Take into account the Speed Limit Info system
5. "Driving" limits.
6. "Speed Assistant" Depending on the national-market version, up‐
7. "Consider traffic lights" coming speed limits may not be available for ap‐
plication or they may only be available to a cer‐
Drive off reminder tain extent, for instance speed information from
1. "MENU" the navigation system.
2. "Vehicle apps" Cruise Control without distance control: depend‐

ing on the system, it may not be possible to
3. "Driving settings" adopt speed limits automatically.
4. "Driver assistance" Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to
5. "Driving" Active Cruise Control with distance control.
6. "Speed Assistant" Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
7. "Drive off reminder": when the vehicle is ket version, the system may not respond at all or
stopped at traffic lights, the detected phase with limitations to the route when the navigation
of the lights can be displayed in the instru‐ system is unable to clearly identify the position of
ment cluster. In addition, there will be visual the vehicle.
and acoustic information as soon as driving The traffic light detection system may have re‐
can continue at a green traffic light. stricted functionality in situations such as the
following:
240
▷ Traffic lights are obscured, for example by Overview

other vehicles.
▷ At a road junction with multiple lanes where Buttons on the steering wheel
there are several sets of traffic lights.
For further information: Button Function
▷ Limits of the Speed Limit Information system, Steering and Lane Control Assistant
see page 170. with traffic jam assistant on/off.
▷ System limits of the sensors, see page 47.
To set the function.
Steering and Lane Control

Assistant Sensors
Principle sors:
The Steering and Lane Control Assistant helps ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen.
to keep the vehicle in driving lane. It does this by ▷ Front radar sensor.
performing supporting steering wheel move‐
ments, for example when cornering.
General For further information:
Depending on the speed, the system orientates Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47.
itself using the lane markings and vehicles driving
in front. Operating requirements
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether ▷ Speed under 210 km/h/130 mph.
the steering wheel is being touched. ▷ The lane width is sufficiently wide.
▷ Above 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane demarcations
Safety note are detected on both sides.
▷ Below 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane markings on
WARNING both sides or a vehicle driving in front is/are
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ detected.
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Sufficient corner radius.
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. ▷ Driving in the centre of the driving lane.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. ▷ Turn indicator switched off.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ ▷ The sensor system calibration process is
tively if the situation warrants it. complete.
▷ Cruise Control with distance control active.
▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Collision Warning active.
241
▷ Pedestrian warning active. System is on standby and does not make any
▷ Side collision warning active. steering wheel movement.
The system activates automatically when all op‐

Switching the Steering and Lane erating requirements are met.
Control Assistant on/off
Steering wheel icon illuminates green.
Assisted Driving Mode The system is active.
When the system is switched on, the Pedestrian

General
Warning with city braking function and the side-
The button is used to switch the set collision warning are active.
function on and off.
Switching the system off
The button is used to set the primary
function.
Setting the function The display is no longer illuminated.
When the system is active, press the The system does not perfom any supporting
button repeatedly until the desired func‐ steering wheel movements.
tion is selected in the toolbar. The Assis‐
ted Driving Mode toolbar is shown at the bottom Automatically interrupting Steering
of the instrument cluster. and Lane Control Assistant
The system interrupts the supporting steering
Icon Function movements automatically, for example in the
Cruise Control with distance control. following situations:
▷ At a speed above 210 km/h/130 mph.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
Cruise Control with distance control
▷ The driver brakes.
and Steering and Lane Control Assis‐
tant. ▷ When the steering wheel is turned sharply.
▷ When the vehicle leaves its own driving lane.
The selected function is shown in green. ▷ When the turn indicator is activated.
▷ When the driving lane is too narrow.
Turning on the system
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a certain
period of time and no vehicle is driving in
1. Press the button on the steering front.
wheel. ▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control is
interrupted.
2. Adjust the Steering and Lane Control ▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
Assistant if necessary. tened.
Steering wheel icon illuminates grey. Steering wheel icon illuminates grey.
242
System is on standby and does not make any Icon Description

steering wheel movement.
Steering wheel icon yellow:
The system activates automatically when all op‐ Hands are not around the steer‐
erating requirements are met. ing wheel. System remains ac‐
tive.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Red steering wheel icon, acous‐
Icon Description tic signal:
Hands are not around the steer‐
Steering wheel icon grey:
ing wheel. System interruption is
System on standby. imminent.
Steering wheel icon green: The system reduces the speed

to a standstill if applicable.
System is activated.
The system may possibly not
The system is helping the driver
perform any supporting steering
keep the vehicle in driving lane.
wheel movements.
Yellow flashing steering wheel
icon: Displays on the steering wheel
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
Yellow steering wheel icon and

an acoustic signal, if applicable:
System interruption is imminent.
Steering wheel icon flashes red,

signal sounds:
System is switching off. The two LEDs above the keypads are illuminated
in the same way as the displays in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
▷ Red: system is deactivated.
The steering wheel displays can be switched

on/off if required.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Lighting elements"
243
Displays in the Head-up display Weather

All the system information can also be displayed In adverse weather and lighting conditions, sys‐
in the Head-up display. tem functionality may be limited as follows:
▷ Impaired detection of vehicles and lane mark‐
System limits ings.
▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already
General been detected.
The system cannot be activated or used usefully Pay attention when driving and respond to the
in certain situations. prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, intervene
actively, for example by braking, steering or tak‐
Safety note ing avoidance manoeuvre.
WARNING
Assisted Driving Plus
spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of Principle
accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ Assisted Driving Plus helps the driver to control
formation on the system limits and intervene the vehicle in traffic queues.
actively if necessary. The supporting steering wheel movements take
place without the driver actively steering.

General
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
▷ Cameras, see page 47. and Lane Control Assistant.
▷ Radar sensors, see page 48.
Safety note
Hands on the steering wheel
In the following situations, contact between the WARNING
driver's hands and the steering wheel is not de‐
tected by the sensors: The system does not relieve you of your per‐
▷ Driving when wearing gloves. tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
▷ Covers on the steering wheel. not respond independently and appropriately in
Narrow driving lanes Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
The system cannot be activated or used usefully Observe the traffic conditions, be ready to take
when driving in narrow driving lanes, for example over steering and braking at any time, and ac‐
in the following situations: tively intervene if the situation warrants it.
▷ At road works.
The information for the Steering and Lane Con‐
▷ Depending on the equipment, if emergency trol Assistant also applies.
lanes are being formed.
▷ In built-up areas.
244
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see Displays in the instrument cluster
page 241.
Icon Description
Green indicator light: the system
▷ Operating requirements of the Steering and is active.
Lane Control Assistant are met.
Operating requirements, see page 241. White indicator light: the system
▷ The Steering and Lane Control Assistant is is ready.
active.
Grey indicator light: the system
▷ The function is only available on certain types
is interrupted.
of road, for example motorways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists. Alternative displays
▷ The lane width is sufficiently wide. Depending on the equipment, the displays in the
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle ahead are de‐ instrument cluster may vary and are shown as
tected. follows:
▷ Speed under approximately 60 km/h/ Indicator Description
40 mph. light
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
Green indicator light: the system
ment cluster detects that the driver is looking
is active.
at the traffic situation.
▷ The function must be available in the country
in which the vehicle is being driven. Displays on the steering wheel
Turning Assisted Driving Plus on

As soon as all of the operating require‐
ments have been met, Assisted Driving
Plus is displayed as an additional icon in
the toolbar. The toolbar is shown at the
bottom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assisted Driving Plus with the

button on the steering wheel. The two LEDs above the keypads are illuminated
The icon for Assisted Driving Plus is in the same way as the displays in the instrument
shown in green. cluster:
Two green LEDs are illuminated on the steering ▷ Green: the system is active.
wheel. ▷ Yellow: the system has been interrupted.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is ▷ Red: the system is deactivated.
shown in green.
The system starts to help the driver to control
the vehicle.
245
System limits Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐

General
The system limits for the Steering and Lane
trol Assistant also applies.
Control Assistant apply.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 241.
page 241.
Driver Attention Camera Operating requirements

▷ Operating requirements of the Steering and
Pay attention to the traffic situation at all times.
Lane Control Assistant are met.
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether
Operating requirements, see page 241.
the driver is looking at the traffic situation.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
The Driver Attention Camera may have restricted
clists and with physical barriers separating
functionality in situations such as the following:
oncoming vehicles, for example crash barri‐
▷ If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by ers.
the steering wheel.
▷ Lane markings detected.
▷ If the driver is wearing sunglasses with high
▷ Maximum speed 180 km/h, 110 mph.
protection against infrared light.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Lane Change Assistant Turning on/turning off Lane Change

Assistant
Principle 1. "MENU"
Lane Change Assistant provides the driver with 2. "Vehicle apps"
additional support when changing driving lanes 3. "Driving settings"
on multi-lane roads.
General 5. "Driving"
The system uses the sensors of the Steering 6. "Assisted Driving"

and Lane Control Assistant. 7. "Lane Change Assistant"
Safety note Changing driving lane

1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a lane
WARNING change.
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ 2. Press the turn indicator lever in the desired
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ direction as far as the resistance point for in‐
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ dicating briefly.
246
After a short period, a supporting steering Alternative displays

wheel movement in the desired direction is
Depending on the equipment, the displays in the
noticeable.
instrument cluster may vary and are shown as
follows:
Icon Description
Green steering wheel icon.

Grey line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Green arrow icon for lane
change.
The system carries out a lane
After the lane change, the system helps the
change.
driver keep the vehicle in lane.
Green steering wheel icon.
Cancelling a lane change Grey line for lane marking on the
The lane change can be cancelled by steering in appropriate side.
the opposite direction. No arrow icon for lane change
on the display.
Displays in the instrument cluster The system has detected the
lane change request. Lane
Icon Description change not currently possible.
Green steering wheel icon. Depending on the national-mar‐
Green arrow icon for lane ket version:
change. Green steering wheel icon.
The system carries out a lane Grey line for lane marking on the
change. appropriate side.
Green steering wheel icon. Grey arrow icon for lane change.
Grey line for lane marking on the Lane change not possible; oper‐
appropriate side. ating requirements not met.
The system has detected the
lane change request. Lane System limits
change not currently possible.
The system limits for the Steering and Lane
Depending on the national-mar‐ Control Assistant apply.
ket version: For further information:
Green steering wheel icon. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
Grey arrow icon for lane change. page 241.
Lane change not possible; oper‐
ating requirements not met.
247
Emergency Lane Assistant ▷ Lane boundary detected.

▷ The function must be available in the country
in which the vehicle is being driven.
Principle
The Emergency Lane Assistant can help the Activating/deactivating the
driver to form an emergency lane on congested
Emergency Lane Assistant
motorways or similar roads.
1. "MENU"
As soon as the system detects a traffic queue, a
Check Control message is shown on the control 2. "Vehicle apps"
display. Depending on the situation, the vehicle 3. "Driving settings"
will be steered to the right or left within the cur‐ 4. "Driver assistance"
rent driving lane in order to form an emergency
5. "Driving"
lane.
6. "Assisted Driving"
General 7. "Emergency Corridor Assistant"
and Lane Control Assistant. Displays in the instrument cluster
Safety note ket version, the information of the Emergency
Lane Assistant is displayed in the Assisted View
in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ Assisted View, see page 154.
not respond independently and appropriately in System limits
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. The system limits for the Steering and Lane
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Control Assistant apply.
page 241.
trol Assistant also applies.
For further information: Lane change with active route
page 241.
guidance
Operating requirements Principle

▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant is activa‐ Lane change with active route guidance assists
ted. the driver when a lane change is needed in order
to reach a destination.
▷ Traffic queue detected.
▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
248
General The system prepares for this lane change. To

do this, the system identifies a suitable gap in
the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane.
and Lane Control Assistant.
2. When a gap has been found, the speed is
Safety note adapted so the vehicle stays level with the
gap.
3. A lane change suggestion is displayed with a
WARNING Check Control message.
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ When the Steering and Lane Control Assis‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ tant is active, a steering intervention to steer
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ the vehicle towards the target driving lane
not respond independently and appropriately in may be performed.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. 4. If the traffic situation permits a lane change,
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ the driver can steer the vehicle into the adja‐
tively if the situation warrants it. cent lane.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Lane
The information for the Active Cruise Control Change Assistant: once the Check Control
and the Steering and Lane Control Assistant also message has been displayed, the Lane
applies. Change Assistant can be started by operating
the turn indicator.
▷ Active Cruise Control, see page 229.
▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 241. Icon Function
Operating requirements The proposed lane change is displayed

and a green tick indicates that the
▷ Active Cruise Control with distance control is function is active.
activated.
▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road. Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐
▷ A lane boundary is detected on the side of ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the
the desired lane change. Assisted View in the instrument cluster.
▷ Navigation system: route guidance is activa‐ For further information:
ted. Assisted View, see page 154.
▷ The adjustment to route is turned on.
▷ The function must be available in the country Switching on adjustment to route
in which the vehicle is being driven. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Changing driving lane
1. One or more lane changes are required in or‐
der to reach a destination.
5. "Driving"
249
7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route"
System limits
The system limits for the Active Cruise Control
and the Steering and Lane Control Assistant ap‐
ply.
250
Parking CONTROLS
Parking
Vehicle equipment Overview
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Button in the vehicle

Park assistance systems

General Park Assist button
The parking assistance systems include different
individual systems. The individual systems pro‐
Panorama View
vide support with assistance functions, sensors
and different camera views when parking, ma‐
noeuvring or driving in reverse.
For further information: Sensors
▷ Reversing Assist Camera, see page 255. The parking assistance systems are controlled
▷ Automatic camera perspective, see by the following sensors:
page 255. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▷ Flank view, see page 256. ▷ Side ultrasonic sensors.
▷ 3D view, see page 256. ▷ Side radar sensors, front.
▷ Zoom to trailer tow hitch, see page 257. ▷ Side radar sensors, rear.
▷ Washing bay view, see page 257. ▷ Front camera.
▷ Panorama View, see page 257. ▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
▷ Door opening angle, see page 259. ▷ Reversing Assist Camera.
▷ Remote 3D View, see page 259. For further information:
▷ Park Distance Control, see page 260. Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47.
▷ Active Park Distance Control, see page 263.
▷ Park Assist, see page 264.
▷ Reversing Assistant, see page 269.
251
CONTROLS Parking
Safety note General

Several cameras capture the area from various
WARNING selectable perspectives.
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Depending on the view, the vehicle surroundings
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ or a partial area are displayed.
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot Depending on the national-market version, the
respond independently and appropriately in all automatic camera perspective or the Reversing
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Assist Camera is displayed.
In addition, look directly to check the traffic sit‐ Turning the display on/off
vene actively where appropriate. General
When driving forwards, the parking assistance
systems display turns off automatically when a
Go to Park menu certain distance or speed is exceeded.
Some parking assistance systems can be adjus‐
ted in the Park menu. With the reverse gear
The display is automatically turned on if selector
Via Parking Assistant button lever position R is engaged while drive-ready
state is turned on.
Via Parking Assistant button
2. "Settings"
Press the button.
3. Select the desired settings.
Via iDrive
1. "MENU" Display on the control display
2. "Vehicle apps"
General
The display on the control display will vary de‐
4. "Driver assistance" pending on the equipment and the activated
5. "Parking and manoeuvring" parking assistance system.
6. Select the desired settings.
Display
Principle
The parking assistance systems display assists
with parking and manoeuvring by displaying the
Park Distance Control and a variety of camera
perspectives.
252
Parking CONTROLS
Without Parking Assistant Plus The Park Distance Control view is displayed.
▷ "Parking"
Depending on the equipment, camera im‐
ages or the view of the Park Distance Control
are displayed.
▷ "3D view"
A three-dimensional representation is dis‐
played.
▷ "Tow hitch"
1 Toolbar, left The zoom for the trailer tow hitch can be
turned on.
2 Camera image
▷ "Car wash"
3 Selection window
The display of your own lane can be turned
4 Toolbar, right
on for easier driving into the car wash.
With Parking Assistant Plus Toolbar, right

The parking assistance functions are displayed in
the right toolbar. The display may vary depend‐
ing on the equipment.
▷ Status and functions of Park Assist.
▷ Status and functions of Reversing Assistant.
▷ "Settings"
Settings can be entered in the Park menu.
1 Toolbar, left Status of the parking assistance

2 Camera image systems
3 Selection window The status of the following parking assistance
systems is displayed:
4 Automatic camera perspective
▷ Park Assist.
5 Flank view
▷ Reversing Assistant.
6 Reversing Assist Camera
The icons are shown on the control display in the
7 Toolbar, right
right toolbar.
Toolbar, left
Depending on the equipment, different views
can be selected via the left toolbar.
▷ "Rear view camera"
The camera image from the Reversing Assist
Camera is shown.
▷ "Parking sensors only"
253
CONTROLS Parking
Icon Meaning Turning circle lines

No search for Park Assist services.
Park Assist has failed.
Search for Park Assist services is ac‐

tive.
Park Assist: when the icon is green,

Park Assist is active. The system
takes control of the vehicle.
Reversing Assistant: when the icon is
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on
green, Reversing Assistant is active.
the camera image together with lanes.
The system takes control of the
steering. The lines show the course of the smallest possi‐
ble turning circle on a level road.
Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐
Additional displays yond a certain angle, only one turning circle line
is displayed.
General
Additional displays can be faded in on the cam‐
era image of the parking assistance systems dis‐ Using driving lane lines and turning circle
play to facilitate parking and manoeuvring. lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
Turning additional displays on/off circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐
Depending on the equipment, the additional dis‐ ing space.
plays can be turned on and off in the parking 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green
menu or in the right toolbar. driving lane line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Driving lane lines
Obstacle marking
Driving lane line help estimate the space required

when parking and manoeuvring on level roads. Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The driving lane lines are continuously adapted Obstacle markings can be faded into the camera
to the steering wheel movements depending on image.
the steering wheel angle. Coloured gradations of the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
254
Parking CONTROLS
Functional limitations Malfunction

The system can only be used to a restricted ex‐ Failure of one camera is shown on the control
tent in the following situations: display.
▷ With a door open. The detection range of the failed camera is dis‐
▷ With open luggage compartment. played hatched on the control display.
▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.

Areas with grey hatching with an icon in the cam‐ Reversing Assist Camera
era image identify areas that are currently not
shown, for example an open door.
Principle
System limits The Reversing Assist Camera assists in reverse
parking and manoeuvring. It does this by show‐
ing an image of the area behind the vehicle on
Safety note
the control display.
Additional displays can be shown in the display,
WARNING for example lane and turning circle lines.
spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ General
tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Observe the in‐
formation on the system limits and intervene
▷ The luggage compartment is fully closed.
System limits of the sensors ▷ The camera area is clean and unobstructed.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 47. Deactivated Reversing Assist Camera
When the Reversing Assist Camera is deactiva‐
Non-visible areas ted, for example when the luggage compartment
Due to the angle of view, the area under the ve‐ is open, the camera image is displayed hatched
hicle cannot be seen by the cameras. in grey.
Detection of objects
The system cannot detect very low obstacles
Automatic camera perspective
and higher, protruding objects such as ledges.
The objects shown in the control display may be Principle
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the dis‐ The automatic camera perspective displays a
tance to the objects on the control display. steering angle-dependent view looking towards
Projecting loads, carrier systems or trailers can the vehicle's direction of travel.
restrict the detection range of the camera. This perspective adapts to the current driving sit‐
uation.
255
CONTROLS Parking
General System limits

As soon as obstacles are detected, the view The system only shows stationary obstacles that
switches to a fixed display of the area in front of were previously detected by the sensors when
or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to the Lat‐ driving past.
eral Parking Aid page. The system does not detect whether an obstacle
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic subsequently moves. Consequently, the mark‐
camera perspective is exited if necessary and the ings will no longer be shown on the display after
view of the Reversing Assist Camera is dis‐ the vehicle has been stationary for a while. The
played. If required, select the automatic camera area next to the vehicle needs to be scanned
perspective with reverse gear engaged. The au‐ again.
tomatic camera perspective is retained for the
current parking manoeuvre.
Flank view
Principle
Lateral Parking Aid The flank view displays the area at the side to as‐
sist with positioning the vehicle at the kerb or
Principle alongside any other obstacles.
The side Park Distance Control is automatically
displayed and warns of obstacles next to the ve‐ General
hicle. Flank view looks from the rear to the front. If
there is a hazard, it automatically focuses on pos‐
General sible obstacles.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking Flank view can be selected for the right or left
assistance systems”. side of vehicle.
Display assistance systems”.
3D view
Principle
When the 3D view is selected, a circle is dis‐
played on the control display.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides of
the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
General
▷ No markings: no obstacles have been detec‐
ted. The current perspective is identified by a camera
icon.
▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles
have been detected. Select another camera function to exit the func‐
tion.
256
Parking CONTROLS

Washing bay view
Principle
Zoom to trailer tow hitch The washing bay view assists when entering a
car wash.
Principle
To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is possi‐ General
ble to zoom in on the area around the trailer tow Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
hitch. assistance systems”.
General Turning the car wash view on/off

When zooming in, remember that the view might
no longer show certain obstacles. 1. Press the button.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking 2. "Car wash"
Display
Turning zoom on trailer tow hitch
on/off

2. "Tow hitch"
Display
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving into

a car wash.
Panorama View
Principle
Two static circle segments show the distance The panoramic view gives you an earlier view of
between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch. crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and road
A docking line dependent on the steering wheel junctions.
angle assists you in lining up the trailer tow hitch
with the trailer. General
Road users hidden by obstacles at the side may
not be seen from the driver's seat until very late.
The front camera and the Reversing Assist Cam‐
257
CONTROLS Parking
era capture the area around the side of the vehi‐ Activation points
cle to improve the view.
The camera image is subject to varying levels of Principle
distortion in some areas and is thus not suitable Positions at which the panoramic view should
for estimating distances. switch on automatically can be saved as activa‐
Depending on the equipment, the function can tion points.
be used when driving forwards or reversing.
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking General
assistance systems”. Up to ten activation points can be saved.
Activation points can be used for the front cam‐
Sensors era when driving forwards.
The system is controlled by the following cam‐
eras: Operating requirements
▷ Reversing Assist Camera. To use the function, a GPS signal must be re‐
▷ Front camera. ceived.
Turning the panoramic view on/off Saving activation points

1. Drive the vehicle to the position where the
Press the button.
system should turn on and stop.

Display
3. "Activation point"
The current position is shown.
4. "Save activation point"
Activation points are stored with one of the
following where possible:
▷ Location.
▷ Town and street.
▷ GPS coordinates.
Yellow lines on the screen mask identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
Using activation points
Use of activation points can be switched on and
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi‐
off.
tion, the camera image of the Reversing Assist
Camera or front camera will be displayed.
2. "Settings"
3. "GPS-based"
258
Parking CONTROLS
Displaying activation points Display

2. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is shown.
Editing activation points

2. "Manage points" The maximum door opening angles are dis‐
played when the selector lever is in position P.
A list of all activation points is shown.
3. Select an activation point if necessary.
System limits
For technical reasons, the display of the vehicle
surroundings is distorted.
Door opening angle Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not superimpose any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
Principle
other objects.
Depending on the equipment, the door opening
The perspective means that protruding objects
angle indicator is displayed automatically.
located higher up may be closer than they ap‐
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking view pear on the control display.
indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the open‐
ing angles of the doors.
The system does not issue warnings about ap‐ Remote 3D View
proaching road users.
Principle
General
The BMW app and the camera pictures in the
Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking parking view, for example automatic camera per‐
assistance systems”. spective, enable the display of the vehicle sur‐
roundings on a mobile end device.
The function shows a view of the current situa‐
tion.
General
For reasons related to data protection, the func‐
tion can only be run three times in two hours.
259
CONTROLS Parking
Sensors ▷ When other camera functions are being run in

the vehicle.
The system is controlled by the following cam‐
eras: ▷ The vehicle moves faster than at walking
speed.
▷ Front camera.
▷ In case of missing or weak Internet connec‐
▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
tion.
▷ Reversing Assist Camera.
Operating requirements Park Distance Control

▷ Data transfer must be activated.
Data protection, see page 70. Principle
▷ The BMW app must be installed on the mo‐ Park Distance Control assists with parking. Ob‐
bile device. stacles in front of or behind the vehicle are sig‐
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with an nalled by acoustic and visual warnings.
existing ConnectedDrive account must be Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra‐
activated. sonic sensors can also be reported.
BMW ID/driver profiles, see page 71.
General
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D The range of the system is approximately 2 m,
View 6 ft, depending on the obstacle and environmen‐
tal factors.
The function can be activated or deactivated in‐
dividually or together with other functions. An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle is
approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object and a
1. "MENU" collision is imminent.
2. "Vehicle apps" For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
3. "System settings" warning is given sooner, at a distance of approx.
4. "Data privacy" 1.50 m, 5 ft.
5. Select the desired setting. Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
After the activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed in the BMW app.
Safety notes
The system may have restricted functionality or WARNING
may not be available at all in situations such as The system does not relieve you of your per‐
the following: sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
▷ With a door or the luggage compartment tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
open. Areas that the system is not able to re‐ respond independently and appropriately in all
cord are shown dark on the display. traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
▷ If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually.
vene actively where appropriate.
260
Parking CONTROLS
Turning the system on/off manually

WARNING
Press the button.
Approaching at high speed when using Park
▷ On: the LED is illuminated.
Distance Control PDC may result in late warn‐
ings, due to the physical conditions. There is a ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
risk of injury or material damage. Avoid ap‐
If the system is manually turned on when reverse
proaching an object at speed. Avoid moving off
gear is engaged, the image of the Reversing As‐
at speed while Park Distance Control PDC is
sist Camera is displayed.
not yet active.
system cannot be turned off manually when the
Sensors reverse gear is engaged.
sors: Acoustic warning
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
General
▷ Side ultrasonic sensors.
An intermittent tone indicates that the vehicle is
approaching an object. For example, if an object
Turning Park Distance Control on/off is detected to the rear left of the vehicle, the
acoustic signal is emitted from the rear left loud‐
Turning on the system automatically speaker.
The system switches on automatically in the The shorter the distance to an object, the shorter
following situations: the intervals of the intermittent tones.
▷ When the drive-ready state is turned on when A continuous tone sounds if the distance to a
engaging selector lever position R. detected object is less than approximately
▷ When approaching detected obstacles, if the 20 cm, 8 in.
speed is below approximately 4 km/h, An alternating continuous tone sounds between
2.5 mph. The distance from the obstacle at the front and rear loudspeakers if there are ob‐
which the system activates depends on the jects in front and behind the vehicle at the same
individual situation. time and at a distance of less than approximately
Automatic activation on detection of obstacles 20 cm, 8 in.
can be enabled and disabled. The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
1. "MENU" are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
2. "Vehicle apps"
interval tones are switched off after a short time
4. "Driver assistance" with the vehicle at a standstill.
6. "Automatic PDC activation" Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be ad‐
Turning off the system automatically justed.
When driving forwards, the system turns off au‐ 1. "MENU"
tomatically when a certain distance or speed is
2. "Vehicle apps"
exceeded, if necessary.
261
CONTROLS Parking
3. "Driving settings" Display: object next to the vehicle

6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Visual warning
General
When you are approaching an object, its proxim‐ Depending on the equipment:
ity is displayed on the control display as soon as
▷ Grey markings, hatched surface: no obstacles
the system is activated.
have been detected.
Objects that are farther away are already dis‐
▷ No markings, black surface: the area adjacent
played before a signal sounds.
to the vehicle has not yet been detected.
The detection range of the sensors is shown in
green, yellow and red if obstacles are detected
within the range. System limits
Depending on the view, driving lane lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown for General
a better estimation of the space required. The function to protect the vehicle sides only
If equipped with the Crossing-traffic Warning: shows stationary obstacles that were previously
depending on the equipment, the display also detected by the sensors when driving past.
warns of vehicles approaching from the sides at The system does not detect whether an obstacle
the front and rear. subsequently moves. With the vehicle at a stand‐
Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides of still, the side markings will be hidden after a cer‐
the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks. tain period of time. The area on the side of the
vehicle must be newly captured.
Display: object behind the vehicle Also observe the limits of the system in the
chapter “Parking assistance systems”.
Trailer operation
The rear functions of Park Distance Control are
turned off if a trailer is connected, when the
trailer socket is occupied or when trailer opera‐
tion is activated.
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not displayed.
An icon is displayed on the control dis‐
play.
Depending on the equipment, the detec‐
tion range of the sensors is shown dark on the
control display.
262
Parking CONTROLS
False alarms Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking

If the system is approaching its limits, false assistance systems”.
alarms may occur.
To reduce false alarms, for example in conveyor
Safety notes
car washes, switch off automatic activation of
Park Distance Control when obstacles are detec‐ WARNING
ted if necessary. The system does not relieve you of your per‐
Malfunction tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
An icon is displayed on the control dis‐ respond independently and appropriately in all
play. traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
The detection range of the sensors is not
displayed on the control display.
A Check Control message is shown. vene actively where appropriate.
Park Distance Control failure. Have the system

checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a WARNING
specialist workshop. When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the assis‐
tance system cannot react correctly if its sen‐
sors are obstructed. There is a risk of accident
Active Park Distance Control or material damage. Do not use the assistance
system in trailer operation or when using the
Principle trailer tow hitch, for example with a bicycle car‐
rier.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini‐
tiates emergency braking if there is an imminent
risk of collision. Sensors
General sors:
Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be
prevented under all circumstances.
The function is available at speeds below walking
speed when reversing or rolling back.
Temporarily turning off Active Park
Pressing the accelerator pedal suppresses the
Distance Control
brake intervention. No emergency braking is per‐
formed. After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily turned off on the control display.
After emergency braking to a stop, it is possible
to continue a slow approach to the obstacle. To 1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
approach, lightly depress the accelerator pedal 2. "Deactivate temporarily"
and release it again.
If the journey is continued in these environ‐
If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer, mental conditions, no further emergency
the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is possible braking is performed.
at any time.
263
CONTROLS Parking
The system will be turned on again automatically the possibility of subsequent enabling and soft‐
for the next drive. ware updates. This also applies to the individual
functions of the system.
Settings For further information:
It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle are Vehicle equipment, see page 7.
protected by the system.
1. "MENU" General
2. "Vehicle apps" Follow the information in the Chapter “Parking
4. "Driver assistance" Parking methods
5. "Parking and manoeuvring" The system supports the following functions:
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
Display
As soon as the system detects an obsta‐
cle, an icon is displayed with a corre‐
sponding message.
System limits Reverse parking parallel to the road, parallel park‐

The system cannot be used in situations such as ing.
the following:
▷ When driving with a trailer.
If applicable, turn off the system temporarily, if
needed.
Also observe the limits of the system in the
chapter “Parking assistance systems”.
Park Assist
Reverse parking transverse to the road, bay park‐
Principle ing.
Park Assist supports driving into parallel and bay
parking spaces and helps driving out of parallel
parking spaces.
Vehicle equipment
This system may not be available in the vehicle in
question, for example due to the selected op‐
tional equipment, the national-market version or
264
Parking CONTROLS
Safety notes
WARNING
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in all
Leaving parallel parking spaces. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Operation vene actively where appropriate.
The operating principle and operation of the sys‐
tem is divided into the following steps:
▷ Parking space search. WARNING
▷ Turn on. When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the assis‐
▷ Parking. tance system cannot react correctly if its sen‐
sors are obstructed. There is a risk of accident
▷ Leaving parking space.
or material damage. Do not use the assistance
Parking space search is always active when the system in trailer operation or when using the
vehicle is moving forward slow and straight. trailer tow hitch, for example with a bicycle car‐
Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on rier.
both sides of the vehicle.
When the system is active, the status of the sys‐
tem and necessary instructions are displayed. NOTE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
Parking manoeuvre kerbs. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐
The system calculates the best possible option serve the traffic situation and intervene actively
for driving in or driving out of parking spaces with if the situation warrants it.
parking lines and takes control of the following
functions during the parking manoeuvre:
▷ Steering.
Sensors
The Parking Manoeuvre Assistant is controlled
▷ Accelerating and braking.
by the following sensors:
▷ Changing gear.
The parking manoeuvre is automatic.
When leaving parallel parking spaces, the vehicle
manoeuvres automatically until the vehicle rea‐
ches a position in which the driver can drive out
of the parking space without further steering
wheel movements.
265
CONTROLS Parking
Operating requirements vehicle are detected. The distance to a de‐

tected kerb is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in.
Measurement of parking spaces ▷ The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft lon‐
▷ Driving forwards in a straight line up to a max‐ ger than the vehicle.
imum speed of approximately 35 km/h,
22 mph. Turning Park Assist on/off
▷ Maximum distance from the row of parked
vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft. Via Parking Assistant button
Press the button.
Suitable parking space
General:
The current status of the parking space search is
▷ Gap behind an object which is at least 0.5 m, displayed.
1.7 ft long.
▷ Gap between two objects, each at least With the reverse gear
0.5 m, 1.7 ft long.
Engage selector lever position R.
▷ Minimum length of adjoining objects approx.
The current status of the parking space search is
1 m/3 ft.
displayed.
Parking parallel to the road:
▷ Minimum length of gap between two objects: Turning the acoustic signal on/off
own vehicle length plus approximately 0.8 m, The acoustic signal for suitable parking spaces
2.6 ft. can be turned on and off.
▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.
1. "MENU"
Bay parking:
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ Minimum width of gap: own vehicle width
plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft. 3. "Driving settings"
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length. 4. "Driver assistance"
The depth of bay parking spaces must be es‐ 5. "Parking and manoeuvring"
timated by the driver. Due to technical limits, 6. "Sound when available"
the system is only able to gauge the depth of
bay parking spaces approximately. Acoustic signal of the Park Distance
Control
Parking manoeuvre
Depending on the national-market version, an in‐
▷ Doors and luggage compartment are closed. termittent tone of the Park Distance Control PDC
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened. will sound during an automatic parking manoeu‐
vre.
Leaving parking space A continuous tone will sound when the distance
▷ The vehicle was parked using the Parking to a detected object is less than approx. 20 cm,
Manoeuvre Assistant and an object is detec‐ 8 in.
ted in the surrounding area of the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle was parked manually in reverse
and objects in the immediate vicinity of the
266
Parking CONTROLS
Parking space search Leaving parking space with Park

▷ Parking space search is always active when Assist
driving forwards at a speed of up to approx. 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
35 km/h, approx. 22 mph and a distance of
max. 1.5 m, approx. 5 ft for vehicles to be
parked. 2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the button or engage reverse gear.
▷ Park Assist is turned on and the parking
space search is activated. Search for suitable The display of the parking assistance sys‐
parking spaces. tems is shown.
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed and an 3. Select the desired parking direction for leav‐
acoustic signal sounds. ing the parking space on the control display.
▷ When parallel or bay parking spaces are 4. Follow the instructions on the control display.
clearly detected, the system automatically se‐ Green: the system takes control of the
lects the appropriate parking method. If there parking manoeuvre.
are parking spaces that are large enough for
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
both parallel and bay parking, both parking
Other interventions will cancel the system.
spaces are shown on the control display. The
parking direction can be selected by selecting A message is displayed at the end of the ma‐
the parking space. noeuvre.
5. Make sure that it is safe to leave parking
Parking with Park Assist space in the current traffic situation and drive
off as usual.
The Parking Manoeuvre Assistant is turned
1. Press the key or engage reverse off automatically.
gear.
The display of the parking assistance sys‐ Cancelling Park Assist manually
tems is shown.
Park Assist can be cancelled manually at any
Parking space search is activated. time, for example:
The status of the parking space search and ▷ Press the button.
possible parking spaces are shown on the
control display.
2. Select the suggested parking manoeuvre. ▷ by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Green: the system takes control of the The Parking Manoeuvre Assistant is cancelled
parking manoeuvre. without engaging selector lever position P. Driv‐
ing can continue immediately.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Cancelling Park Assist automatically
Other interventions will cancel the system.
The system automatically cancels in situations
When parking manoeuvre is complete, selec‐
such as the following:
tor lever position P is engaged.
Completion of parking manoeuvre is indica‐
ted on the control display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself if neces‐
sary.
267
CONTROLS Parking
▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers System limits

the vehicle.
▷ When the accelerator pedal is pressed lightly General
and the steering wheel is simultaneously Observe the limits of the system in the Chapter
moved gently. “Park assistance systems”.
▷ When operating the accelerator pedal or the
selector lever. No parking assistance
▷ When the brake pedal is depressed longer at Park Assist does not provide assistance in the
a vehicle standstill. following situations:
▷ If the parking brake is applied. ▷ On sharp bends.
▷ When the driver's seat belt is unfastened. ▷ In angled parking spaces.
▷ With open luggage compartment. ▷ In trailer operation.
▷ With open bonnet. ▷ With parking spaces which are marked by
▷ When the doors are open. lines on the floor only. The system orients it‐
self on objects.
▷ During activation or intervention by driver as‐
sistance systems. ▷ For special parking spaces, for example pay
parking spaces with automatic locking mech‐
▷ If you switch to other functions on the control
anisms, coin parking or mechanical parking
display.
systems.
▷ When the display on the control display is fa‐
ded due to messages. Functional limitations
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road. The system may have restricted functionality in
▷ On steep uphill or downhill gradients. situations such as the following:
▷ If it encounters objects that are difficult to ne‐ ▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example gravel
gotiate, for example kerbs. roads.
▷ If objects appear suddenly. ▷ On slippery surfaces.
▷ With insufficient distances, which are indica‐ ▷ On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
ted by the Park Distance Control. ▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted or
▷ When a maximum number of parking moves been piled up in the parking space.
or the parking time is exceeded. ▷ If an already measured parking space
A Check Control message is shown where appli‐ changes.
cable. ▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex‐
ample a quayside.
Continuing the parking manoeuvre ▷ In some cases, parking spaces may be detec‐
If parking or leaving a parking space has been in‐ ted that are not suitable or suitable parking
terrupted, the operation can be continued, if nee‐ spaces may not be detected.
ded.
To do this, switch Park Assist on again and fol‐ Malfunction
low the instructions on the control display. A Check Control message is shown.
Park Assist has failed. Have the system checked
by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
268
Parking CONTROLS
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist uation and the vehicle surroundings and inter‐
workshop. vene actively where appropriate.
Reversing Assistant WARNING

When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the assis‐
Principle tance system cannot react correctly if its sen‐
The Reversing Assistant assists when driving in sors are obstructed. There is a risk of accident
reverse, for example when driving out of tight or or material damage. Do not use the assistance
confusing parking or street situations. system in trailer operation or when using the
trailer tow hitch, for example with a bicycle car‐
Vehicle equipment rier.
This system may not be available in the vehicle in

question, for example due to the selected op‐
tional equipment, the national-market version or NOTE
the possibility of subsequent enabling and soft‐ The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
ware updates. This also applies to the individual kerbs. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐
functions of the system. serve the traffic situation and intervene actively
For further information: if the situation warrants it.
General
▷ To save the distance covered, drive forwards
The vehicle saves the driving movements for the without interruption.
last distance covered. This stored distance can
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive
be driven back with automated steering.
faster than 35 km/h/22 mph.
The system takes control of the steering. The
▷ No trailer operation.
speed must be controlled by the driver using the
accelerator pedal and the brake. ▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
A maximum of 50 m, approx. 164 ft are stored.
Reversing with automated steering
assistance systems”. 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Safety notes 2. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the button or engage reverse gear.
WARNING The display of the parking assistance sys‐
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ tems is shown.
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ 3. "Reversing Assistant"
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot Follow the instructions on the control display
respond independently and appropriately in all as applicable.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelerator
pedal and the brake.
269
CONTROLS Parking
Green: the system takes control of the System limits

steering.
▷ The maximum speed when driving in reverse
When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle is limited to approx. 9 km/h, approx. 6 mph.
surroundings.
A warning occurs at a speed of approx.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and 7 km/h/4 mph.
take over control of the vehicle. Pay attention
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the func‐
to the information on Park Distance Control.
tion will be cancelled.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
▷ After driving a stored distance with major
covered, an acoustic signal will sound and a
steering-wheel angles, the function of the
message is displayed.
system will be restricted for the return trip.
Stop when you reach normal road traffic at
Various factors can cause the vehicle to deviate
the latest and take over control of the vehicle,
sideways when reversing along the saved dis‐
for example by engaging a forward gear.
tance covered. These factors include, for exam‐
ple:
Cancelling the Reversing Assistant
▷ If the steering wheel is moved with the vehi‐
automatically cle stationary while the distance covered is
The system automatically cancels in situations being saved.
such as the following: ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers covered in question.
the vehicle. ▷ Road characteristics, for examples gradients,
▷ When shifting from reverse gear to another inclines or slippery road surface.
selector lever position. ▷ Greatly deviating conditions when storing and
▷ During activation or intervention by driver as‐ driving the distance covered, for example, dif‐
sistance systems. ferent tyres or changed environmental factors
▷ After an extended period of time when the like the weather.
vehicle is stationary. Also observe the limits of the system in the
▷ When exiting the stored lane when reversing, chapter “Parking assistance systems”.
for example with a maximum steering wheel
angle.
▷ When the display on the control display is fa‐
ded due to messages.
▷ In case of a slippery surface.
▷ When the vehicle is rolling, for example on a
slope.
▷ In case of changed environmental factors.
▷ When the trailer socket is occupied or trailer
operation is activated.
▷ At speeds over approximately 9 km/h, approx.
6 mph.
270
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment Extended stationary periods
The vehicle may lower itself during extended sta‐
This chapter describes equipment, systems and tionary periods. This is not a malfunction.
functions which are offered or will be offered on If drive-ready state is switched on with the doors
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ closed, the vehicle is automatically raised to the
ded in the vehicle in question. normal level.
Adaptive M suspension
Suspension components Principle
The adaptive M suspension is an intelligent, con‐
The suspension components have been opti‐ trollable sport suspension.
mised for the vehicle and its area of use, thus en‐
suring the best possible driving experience. The suspension reduces body movements with
a sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
Self-levelling suspension General

The intelligent control of the suspension increa‐
Principle ses the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐
pending on the road condition and driving style.
The air suspension on the rear axle helps the
self-levelling suspension to ensure that the vehi‐
cle height and ground clearance remain con‐
Setting
stant. Irrespective of load, the system maintains The system offers various shock absorber set‐
the height of the vehicle at the rear axle at a tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
specified level. The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on
The system ensures consistent driving comfort, the selected drive mode as well as the road con‐
as the full spring travel is kept constant in all driv‐ dition and driving style.
ing situations. For further information:
Driving Experience Control, see page 144.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is shown. The system
is faulty. There is a change in the vehicle's han‐ Performance Control
dling characteristics or a noticeable restriction in
driving comfort. Visit the nearest Service Partner Performance Control increases the agility of the
of the manufacturer or another qualified Service vehicle.
Partner or a specialist workshop. Individual wheels are braked to increase agility
for a sporty driving style.
271
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Electric motor sound

ket version, settings can be made for the drive
sound.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "IconicSounds"
272
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Air conditioning
Vehicle equipment Icon Function
SYNC programme.
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ Seat heating, see
ded in the vehicle in question. page 122.
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. Active seat ventilation,
see page 123.
Air conditioning control The functions can also be operated via voice, for
example, Temperature.
Overview
Buttons, integrated automatic heating/air
Functions in the air conditioning menu conditioning system
Icon Function
AUTO programme.
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
Icon Function
Air recirculation function. Defrost function.
Automatic air recircula‐ Rear window heating.

tion control.
Fresh air.
Amount of air.
Air distribution.
273
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Buttons, automatic rear air-conditioning 4 Air conditioning functions, passenger's side

system 5 Air conditioning bar
Locking the rear air-conditioning

operating elements
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Rear climate control"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
Icon Function
AUTO programme.
Air conditioning menu
General
Temperature. In the Climate control menu, air conditioning
functions can be set individually.
Depending on the equipment, the following air
Air distribution.
conditioning functions can be accessed via the
Climate control menu, for example:
Seat heating, see ▷ AUTO programme.
page 122. ▷ Amount of air.
▷ Air distribution.
To switch off.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Active seat ventilation.
Display in the display Go to air conditioning functions

Via air conditioning bar:
"CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air
conditioning bar.
or:
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Climate control"
1 Toolbar
2 Air conditioning functions, driver's side
3 Air conditioning functions
274
Turning the air conditioning Turning off the system with the button
system on/off Press the button.
Turning the air conditioning system

on/off
AUTO programme
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "All climate functions"
Principle
The AUTO programme ensures a comfortable
The complete air conditioning system is turned climate, which can be modified with the set tem‐
on/off with the last settings. perature and individual settings.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, The AUTO programme cools, ventilates or heats
individual air conditioning functions can be the interior automatically.
turned off.
General
Turning automatic rear air- Depending on the equipment, the AUTO pro‐
conditioning system on/off gramme provides the best possible settings for
air conditioning functions depending on the out‐
Operating requirements side temperature, interior temperature, sunlight,
▷ Automatic air conditioning is turned on. seat occupancy and the desired temperature
▷ Defrost function is deactivated. setting:
▷ Amount of air.
Turning the system on/off via iDrive ▷ Air distribution.
1. "CLIMATE MENU" ▷ Temperature.
2. "Settings" ▷ Seat heating.
3. "Rear climate control" ▷ Active seat ventilation.
4. Activate "Rear climate control". The AUTO programme is started automatically
The automatic rear air-conditioning system can at each vehicle start.
be activated with the default setting for tempera‐ The AUTO programme takes the seat occu‐
ture and AUTO programme: pancy into account to ensure energy-efficient
"Activate with default settings" control.
A condensation sensor also controls the pro‐
Turning on the system with the button gramme so that window condensation is avoided
Press one of the following buttons: as much as possible.
▷ Temperature.
Turning the AUTO programme on/off
▷ AUTO programme.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
▷ Air distribution, manual.
2. "Automatic programme"
Automatic rear air-conditioning system:
275
Press the button. Active air conditioning functions, for example,

The LED in the button is illuminated seat heating are displayed as icons in the climate
when the AUTO programme is switched control bar.
on. Active air conditioning functions are highlighted
in colour in the climate control menu.
Setting the intensity

When the AUTO programme is activated, the in‐ Temperature
tensity of individual air conditioning functions can
be individually adjusted.
Principle
Each air conditioning function has multiple levels
The automatic air conditioning cools or heats to
that can be adjusted individually. Each level has a
the set temperature and then keeps the temper‐
specific control range of the intensity.
ature constant.
Based on the stored data models, the intensities
are dynamically adjusted during the journey. It is
General
not necessary to manually change the desired in‐
tensity to lower or higher levels while driving. Avoid switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐
Functional example
just to the set temperature.
When the AUTO programme is turned on, the in‐
tensity of the seat heating can be adjusted:
Adjusting the temperature
1. "CLIMATE MENU" tap in the centre of the air
The temperature can be set indi‐
conditioning bar.
vidually for driver and front pas‐
2. Seat heating. senger in the air conditioning bar.
3. Select the desired settings, for example,
"HIGH".
The individually selected settings of the air con‐ Set the desired temperature:
ditioning functions are stored and automatically ▷ Increase the temperature.
set up again, for example, after the vehicle is
▷ Reduce the temperature.
started again.
Setting the automatic rear air-

Display
conditioning system temperature
The indicator in the climate control bar informs of
Using the button:
the temperature differential between configured
desired temperature and current interior temper‐ Press the left or right side of the button
ature: to set the desired temperature.
▷ The red or blue bar next to the temperature
Via iDrive:
display indicates the progress of heating up
or cooling. 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
▷ The desired interior temperature is reached 2. "Settings"
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
3. "Rear climate control"
4. Set the desired temperature.
276
Adjusting the upper body Air recirculation function

temperature
Principle
General
If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant
The air temperature in the upper body area can
odour or contains pollutants, the supply of out‐
be adjusted.
side air into the interior of the vehicle can be shut
The set interior temperature for driver and front off. The interior air is then recirculated.
passenger is not changed by this.
General
Adjusting the upper body temperature
If there is condensation, switch off the air recircu‐
1. "CLIMATE MENU" lation function.
2. "Settings" When the air recirculation function is turned off,
3. "Temperature adjustment upper body" outside air is directed into the interior.
4. Set the desired temperature. In the automatic recirculated-air control, outside
air is drawn in or the interior air is circulated, de‐
pending on the outside air quality.
Maximum cooling The interior filter cleans the incoming outside air
or the circulated inside air in air recirculation
Principle mode.
The function enables quick and intense cooling
of the interior. Turning the air recirculation function
on/off
General 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The system is set to the lowest temperature, 2. Select the desired setting in the toolbar:
maximum amount of air and air recirculation ▷ "Air recirculation"
function.
▷ "Fresh air"
Operating requirements ▷ "Auto air recirculation"
The function is available at an outside tempera‐ The current operating mode is displayed in the
ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and when toolbar.
driving readiness or standby state is switched on. Depending on the equipment, the air recircula‐
tion function will turn off automatically after some
Turning maximum cooling on/off time depending on the environmental factors to
prevent condensation.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "MAX A/C"
3. Select the desired setting. Amount of air
The air flows from the air vents for the upper
body area. Open the vents. General
The blower-generated air flow can be adjusted
individually as needed.
277
Adjusting the amount of air ▷ Temperature.

1. "CLIMATE MENU" ▷ Air distribution.
2. Amount of air. ▷ AUTO programme.
Turning the SYNC programme on/off
The level of the selected amount of air is dis‐
played. 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
The amount of air may be reduced in order to 2. "SYNC"
save the vehicle battery power. The programme is switched off automatically if
settings are changed on the passenger's side or
in the rear passenger compartment.
Air distribution
General Defrost function
The air distribution can be adjusted individually
as needed. Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
Adjusting the air distribution are quickly removed from the windscreen and
the front side windows.
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. Air distribution.
General
The amount of air and air temperature are auto‐
The selected air distribution is displayed. matically optimised for the removal of ice and
Automatic rear air-conditioning system: condensation.
Press the button repeatedly. Select the The air distribution is directed toward the wind‐
desired setting. screen and the front side windows.
The selected air distribution setting is If there is condensation, turn on the AUTO pro‐
shown on the climate display. gramme to utilise the advantages of the conden‐
sation sensor. Ensure that air can flow towards
the windscreen.
SYNC programme When the defrost function is switched on, the

automatic rear air-conditioning system is deacti‐
vated to provide maximum power.
Principle
If the SYNC programme is activated, it can be Turning the defrost function on/off
used to transfer settings on the driver's side to
Press the button.
the passenger's side and to the rear.
The LED in the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
General
The following settings can be transferred:
278
Rear window heating Ventilation at front
Principle
With the rear window heating, ice and condensa‐
tion are quickly removed from the rear window.
The drive-ready or standby state is turned on.
Turning the rear window heating ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
on/off rows 1.
Press the button. ▷ Knurled wheel for the variable adjustment of
the air flow on the vents, arrows 2.
The LED is illuminated when the rear
window heating is switched on.
Ventilation in rear passenger
The rear window heating switches off automati‐
cally after a while. compartment
If pre-conditioning is turned on, the rear window
heating is activated as needed.
Ventilation
Principle
The ventilation system provides individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation to
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
optimise the movement of air inside the vehicle.
rows 1.
General ▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and

closing the air vents, arrow 2.
Open the air vents and position them in a way
that ensures effective climate control.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending Adjusting the ventilation
on the set temperature. Depending on the set ventilation, align the air
flow directly or indirectly toward the passengers.
Air quality
General
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
279
▷ Emissions-tested interior. The air automatically flows out of the air vents to
▷ Interior filter. the windscreen, side windows, upper body area
and the footwell.
▷ Climate control system for regulating temper‐
ature, amount of air and air recirculation func‐ The system shuts down automatically after ap‐
tion. proximately 30 minutes or by activating the drive-
ready state.
▷ Pre-conditioning.
Using the pre-conditioning while the vehicle is
▷ Automatic air recirculation control.
being charged will reduce the air conditioning ca‐
pacity during the journey. This helps to optimise
Interior filter the range.
The interior filter cleans the incoming outside air To ensure the vehicle can achieve a minimum
or the circulated inside air in air recirculation range, the pre-conditioning may be switched off
mode. automatically, for example after switching on sev‐
Depending on the equipment: eral times or due to the high-voltage battery be‐
▷ Dust and pollen are filtered out from the in‐ ing insufficiently charged. After turning off due to
flowing outside air. an insufficient state of charge, charge the high-
voltage battery. The pre-conditioning is then
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
available again.
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷ Microbial particles and allergens are filtered. Operating requirements
▷ The vehicle is in rest state or standby state.
Pre-conditioning ▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently

charged or a charging cable is connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
Principle charged, it may take some time after con‐
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehicle inte‐ necting the charging cable before the pre-
rior to a comfortable temperature prior to starting conditioning is ready to function.
the journey depending on the inside and outside
▷ Time and date are set correctly.
temperature. Any snow and ice can be removed
more easily. ▷ The air vents of the ventilation are open.
General Turning on/turning off the pre-

The pre-conditioning can be switched on and off conditioning
directly or for a preselected departure time.
Turning on/turning off via iDrive
Depending on the equipment, the following air
conditioning functions are controlled automati‐ 1. "CLIMATE MENU"
cally: 2. "Settings"
▷ Seat heating. 3. "Pre-conditioning"
▷ Active seat ventilation. 4. Select the desired setting.
▷ Steering wheel heating.
▷ Rear window heating.
Turning on via vehicle key
The system can be switched on using the vehi‐
▷ Mirror heating.
cle key.
280
Press the button on the vehicle key. Activating the departure time
To turn on the pre-conditioning prior to a depar‐
ture time, the respective departure time must be
Activate the pre-conditioning function for the
activated beforehand.
button of the vehicle key:
1. "CLIMATE MENU"
1. "MENU"
2. "Settings"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Pre-conditioning for departure time"
4. "Vehicle key"
Display
Air conditioning for departure time Icon Description
General Icon in the upper centre

console.
Departure times can be set with time and day of
the week. Icon is illuminated: heating
mode is turned on.
The switch-on point is determined automatically
based on the temperature. Icon in the upper centre
The system is switched on in good time before console.
the set departure time on the required days of Icon is illuminated: a depar‐
the week. ture time is activated.
Preselection of departure time is done in two Icon flashes: the pre-condi‐
stages: tioning is turned on.
▷ Set the departure times.
▷ Activate the departure time. Activating with BMW App
At least 10 minutes should pass between set‐ An appropriate BMW app with remote function
ting/activating the departure time and the sched‐ can be used to turn on the pre-conditioning di‐
uled departure time, so the climate control has rectly or via a preselected departure time.
enough time to work.
Pre-conditioning will be turned off automatically
a few minutes after the set departure time.
Setting the departure time

1. "CLIMATE MENU"
2. "Settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the desired departure time.
6. Select the day of the week if necessary.
281
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Ashtray
Front centre console
Opening
1. Press the cover.
Sun visor
Glare protection
Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards.
Protection from glare at the side 2. The ashtray is located in one of the cup hold‐
ers. Fold up the ashtray cover.
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unhook the sun visor from its holder and
pivot it sideways to the side window.
Folding the sun visor in

To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the Emptying
sun visor.
With the cover closed, pull the ashtray out of the

cup holder.
282
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Cigarette lighter
Safety notes
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the lighter can cause burns. Flamma‐
ble materials can catch fire if the lighter is drop‐
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
ped or is held against objects. There is a risk of
holders.
fire and danger of injury. There is a risk of ma‐
terial damage. Hold lighter by its handle. Ensure
that children do not use the lighter. Operation
Press in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
NOTE
moved when it pops back out.
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material
damage. After using the socket, re-fit the
lighter or socket cover.
Sockets
Front centre console Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devices
when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 V.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
Press the cover. connectors.
Safety notes
WARNING
Devices and cables, for example portable navi‐
gation devices, that are located in the deploy‐
ment range of the airbags may impede airbag
deployment or be thrown around the vehicle in‐
terior when the airbag is deployed. There is a
danger of injury. Make sure that devices and
283
cables are not in the deployment range of the Inside the luggage compartment
airbags.
NOTE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery
via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle
may overload or damage the 12 V electrical
system. There is a risk of material damage. In
the case of a discharged vehicle battery, con‐
tact a manufacturer Service Partner or other
Depending on the equipment, there is a socket
qualified Service Partner or specialist work‐
in the luggage compartment on the right-hand
shop.
side. Open the cover.
NOTE
USB port
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material
damage. After using the socket, re-fit the General
lighter or socket cover. Please comply with the notes on connecting mo‐
bile devices to the USB port in the chapter on
USB connections.
Front centre console For further information:
1. Press the cover. For information on USB connections, see Own‐
er’s Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication.
In the centre armrest
2. The socket is located between the cup hold‐

ers. Pull off the cover.
There is a USB port in the centre armrest.

Properties:
▷ USB port type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
284
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. In the rear centre console

▷ With navigation system: for data transfer.
In the front centre console
NOTE
Objects in the storage compartment, for exam‐
ple large USB connectors, can block or damage
the cover on opening and closing. There is a
risk of material damage. When opening and There are two USB ports in the rear centre con‐
closing, make sure that the area of movement sole.
of the cover is kept clear.
Properties:
▷ USB port type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
Wireless charging tray

Principle
Press the cover. The wireless charging tray allows wireless charg‐
ing of mobile phones and other mobile devices
certified according to the Qi standard.
General
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects between the de‐
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
The charging process is indicated by the
charging indicator on the control display.
There is a USB port in the centre console.
Properties: Safety notes
▷ USB port type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and transferring WARNING
data.
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
▷ Charge current: maximum 1.5 A. wireless charging dock, any metal objects loca‐
ted between the device and the dock can be‐
come very hot. If storage media or electronic
cards, for example smart cards, cards with
285
magnetic strips or cards for transmitting sig‐ LED displays

nals, are placed between the device and the
dock, card function may be impaired. There is a Colour Meaning
risk of injury and material damage. When charg‐
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no ob‐ Blue The mobile phone is charging.
jects between the device and the dock. The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted Qi-compatible mobile
phone is fully charged.
Overview
Or‐ The mobile phone is not charging.
Dock in the centre console:
ange The mobile phone may be exposed to
excessively high temperature or there
may be foreign bodies in the charging
dock.
Red The mobile phone is not charging.

Contact a Service Partner of the manu‐
facturer or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
1 LED Forgotten phone warning

2 Dock surface
General
A warning can be issued if a mobile phone with
Qi certification has been left in the wireless
▷ The device to be charged must have been charging tray when leaving the vehicle.
certified according to the Qi standard.
The forgotten phone warning is shown in the in‐
▷ Standby state is switched on. strument cluster.
▷ The maximum size for a mobile phone is ap‐
proximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x 3.1 x Activating forgotten warning function
0.7 in.
1. "MENU"
▷ Only use protective sleeves and covers up to
2. "Vehicle apps"
a maximum thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in, oth‐
erwise the charging function may be im‐ 3. "System settings"
paired. 4. "Wireless charging tray"
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in 5. "Mobile phone reminder"
the middle of the dock. The display of the
mobile phone faces upwards. System limits
The charging process may be reduced or tem‐
Inserting the mobile phone porarily interrupted in the following situations:
1. Open the cover of the dock.
2. Place the mobile phone in the centre of the
dock with the display facing upwards.
3. Close the cover of the dock.
286
▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur‐

face of the tray and mobile phone.
▷ When there are objects between the mobile
phone and wireless charging tray.
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for example
for charging. Follow the relevant instructions
on the control display and in the instructions
for the mobile phone, if applicable.
287
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐
sive action. There is a danger of injury. Immedi‐
ately close the glove compartment after using
it.
Opening the glove compartment
Safety notes
WARNING
Devices connected by a cable to the vehicle,
for example mobile phones, or loose objects Pull the handle.
may be thrown around the interior during the
journey, for example in the event of an accident The lighting in the glove compartment comes
or when braking or taking avoidance manoeu‐ on.
vre. There is a danger of injury. Ensure that de‐
vices connected by cable to the vehicle or Closing the fold-down compartment
loose objects are secured in the interior.
Shut the lid.
NOTE Fold-down compartment

Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument
panel. There is a risk of material damage. Do
Safety note
not use anti-slip mats.
WARNING
The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐
Glove compartment terior when it is open. Objects in the glove
compartment may be thrown around the inte‐
Safety note rior during the journey, for example in the event
of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐
sive action. There is a danger of injury. Immedi‐
WARNING
ately close the glove compartment after using
The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐ it.
terior when it is open. Objects in the glove
compartment may be thrown around the inte‐
rior during the journey, for example in the event
288
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening the fold-down compartment Storage compartments in the

centre console
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing the fold-down compartment

Shut the lid. Press the cover.
Storage in the doors Closing

Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.
General
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Front centre armrest
Safety note
General
There is a storage compartment in the centre
WARNING
armrest between the seats.
Breakable objects, for example glass bottles or
glasses, may get broken in the event of an acci‐ Opening the centre armrest
dent or when braking or taking evasive action.
Splinters may scatter throughout the interior.
There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do
not use breakable objects during a journey.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Press the button.
Close the centre armrest

Press the cover down until it engages.
289
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Cup holder front Cup holder rear

Safety note Safety notes
WARNING WARNING
Unsuitable containers placed in the cup holders Unsuitable containers placed in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be flung into may damage the cup holders or be flung into
the interior, for example in the event of an acci‐ the interior, for example in the event of an acci‐
dent or when braking or taking evasive action. dent or when braking or taking evasive action.
Spilt liquids can distract the driver from the Spilt liquids can distract the driver from the
road and lead to an accident. Hot beverages road and lead to an accident. Hot beverages
may damage the cup holders or cause scalding. may damage the cup holders or cause scalding.
There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐ not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, sealable and shatterproof containers. weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.
Do not transport hot drinks. Do not transport hot drinks.
Opening the cup holder NOTE

If the cup holder is open, the centre armrest
cannot be folded back. There is a risk of mate‐
rial damage. Push back the covers before fold‐
ing up the centre armrest.
Press the cover.
There are two cup holders in the centre console.
Closing the cup holder

Pull back the cover by the the handle strip.
290
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening the cup holder

1. Fold down the centre armrest. WARNING
Incorrect use of the coat hooks can present a
danger, for example if objects are thrown
around as a result of braking or evasive action.
There is a risk of injury and material damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, for example
items of clothing, on the coat hooks.
2. To open the cup holder, press the button.
Closing the cup holder

Press both covers back in one after the other
and fold back the centre armrest.
Coat hooks
General
The coat hooks are located on the grab handles
in the rear.
Safety notes
WARNING
Items of clothing on the coat hooks can impair
visibility when driving. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Hang items of clothing from the coat
hooks in such a way that they do not obstruct
visibility when driving.
291
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
Luggage compartment
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Devices connected by a cable to the vehicle,
functions which are offered or will be offered on for example mobile phones, or loose objects
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ may be thrown around the interior during the
ded in the vehicle in question. journey, for example in the event of an accident
or when braking or taking avoidance manoeu‐
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. vices connected by cable to the vehicle or
Loading
WARNING
Safety notes
Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be
thrown into the interior, for example in the
WARNING event of an accident or when braking or taking
A high gross vehicle weight can make the tyres evasive action. Vehicle occupants could be
overheat, causing internal damage and a sud‐ struck and injured. There is a danger of injury.
den loss of tyre inflation pressure. Handling Stow and secure objects and the load correctly.
characteristics may be adversely affected, for
example reduced directional stability, longer
stopping distance and altered steering charac‐ NOTE
teristics. There is a risk of accident. Please Liquids in the luggage compartment may cause
comply with the permitted load index of the damage. There is a risk of material damage.
tyre, and do not exceed the permitted gross ve‐ Ensure that no liquids leak out into the luggage
hicle weight. compartment.
WARNING Stowing and securing loads in the

If the permitted total weight and the permitted vehicle
axle loads are exceeded, the operational safety ▷ Wrap protective material around any sharp
of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. There is corners and edges on the load.
a risk of accident. Do not exceed the permitted
▷ Heavy loads: stow as far forward as possible,
total weight and permitted axle loads.
low down and directly behind the rear seat
backrests.
▷ Very heavy loads: stow as far forward as pos‐
sible, low down and directly behind the rear
seat backrests. If there are no passengers on
the rear seat, insert both outer seat belts into
the respective opposite buckles.
292
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
▷ Fully fold down the rear seat backrests if Safety note

stowing a large load.
▷ Do not stack loads above the upper edge of
WARNING
the backrests.
Incorrect use of the multifunction hooks may
▷ Small and lightweight load: secure with ten‐
present a danger, for example if objects are
sioning straps or, depending on the equip‐
flung around in the event of braking and avoid‐
ment, a luggage compartment net or retain‐
ance manoeuvres. There is a danger of injury
ing straps.
and material damage. Only hang lightweight
▷ Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing objects from the multifunction hooks. Only
straps. transport heavy luggage in the luggage com‐
partment if suitably secured.
Lashing eyes in the luggage

compartment Folding down the multifunction hook
Fold open the multifunction hook until it detecta‐

There are several lashing eyes in the luggage bly engages in the lower position.
compartment for securing the load. Load-secur‐
ing equipment, for example lashing straps, ten‐
sioning straps, retaining straps or luggage com‐
partment nets, must be secured to the lashing Net
eyes.
Depending on the equipment, smaller objects
can be stowed in the net on the left or right side.
Move the net down to transport larger objects.
Multifunction hook
General Luggage compartment floor
Depending on the equipment, a multifunction
hook is located on the right side in the luggage General
compartment. There is a storage compartment under the lug‐
gage compartment floor.
293
Opening the storage compartment

WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo may be flung into the interior, for example
in the event of an accident or when braking or
taking evasive action. There is a danger of in‐
jury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is
locked after it has been folded back.
Fold the luggage compartment floor forwards. WARNING

If the seat is not set properly or the child seat
has been installed incorrectly, the child restraint
Through-loading system system may have restricted or no stability at all.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system rests
Principle firmly against the seat backrest. Wherever pos‐
The luggage compartment can be enlarged by sible, adapt the backrest angle of all relevant
folding down the rear seat backrests. seat backrests and adjust the seats correctly.
Make sure that the seats and their backrests
General are correctly engaged or locked. If necessary,
adjust the height of the head restraints, or re‐
The rear seat backrest is split 40–20–40. The move them.
right rear seat backrest and the centre section
can be folded down individually. The left rear
seat backrest can be folded down together with
the centre section. NOTE
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
the luggage compartment. The middle section down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of
can be folded down separately from the rear. material damage. When folding down, make
sure that the area of movement of the rear seat
backrest including head restraint is kept clear.
Safety notes
WARNING
Risk of entrapment when folding down the rear
seat backrest. There is a risk of injury or mate‐
rial damage. Before folding down, make sure
that the area of movement of the rear seat
backrest and the head restraint is kept clear.
294
Folding down rear seat backrest Luggage compartment cover

From the rear
Safety notes
1. If necessary, remove the corresponding head
restraint.
WARNING
2. Pull the lever in the recess and fold the rear
seat backrest forwards. Devices connected by a cable to the vehicle,
for example mobile phones, or loose objects
may be thrown around the interior during the
journey, for example in the event of an accident
or when braking or taking avoidance manoeu‐
vices connected by cable to the vehicle or
WARNING
Folding back the rear seat backrest If the luggage compartment cover is not inser‐
ted correctly, it may be thrown around the inte‐
Fold back the rear seat backrest into the seat po‐
rior during the journey, for example in the event
sition and lock in place. Ensure that the seat belt
of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐
is not trapped. The red mark behind the recess
sive action. There is a risk of injury and material
disappears completely.
damage. Make sure that the luggage compart‐
ment cover is engaged securely in the brack‐
Folding down the middle section ets.
1. Fold down the middle head restraint.
2. Pull the lever and fold the middle part for‐
wards. Removing the luggage compartment
covers
The cover can be removed for stowing bulky
items.
295
Cover in the luggage compartment

1. Press the back edge of the luggage compart‐
ment cover up and out of the side brackets,
arrow 1.
2. Pull out luggage compartment cover, ar‐

rows 2.
Cover in the tailgate

1. Open lid at the rear edge, arrow 1, and
slightly fold the luggage compartment cover
open.
2. Pull the luggage compartment cover up and

out of the brackets, arrows 2.
Inserting the covers

To insert, proceed in reverse order. Make sure
that the luggage compartment covers are posi‐
tioned correctly in the brackets and that they are
engaged.
296
297
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Vehicle equipment Brake system
Brake discs and pads only achieve their full ef‐
This chapter describes equipment, systems and fectiveness after approximately 500 km,
functions which are offered or will be offered on 300 miles. Drive moderately during this running-
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ in period.
For further information: After fitting new parts
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. Please comply with the running-in procedures
again if the components previously referred to
are renewed.
Running in
General
General driving notes
Moving parts need to adjust to each other.
Closing the tailgate
The following notes will help to maximise the ve‐
hicle's lifetime and efficiency.
Safety note
Do not use Launch Control when running in.
WARNING
Safety note
When open, the tailgate protrudes above the
vehicle and in the event of an accident, or when
WARNING braking or taking avoidance manoeuvre, can
New parts and components can cause safety endanger vehicle occupants and other road
and driver assistance systems to respond with users or damage the vehicle. There is a danger
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After new of injury or material damage. Do not drive with
parts have been installed or if the vehicle is the tailgate open.
new, drive moderately and take action promptly
if necessary. Please comply with running-in
procedures for the corresponding parts and Driving with the tailgate open
components. If there is no alternative but to drive with the flap
open:
▷ Close all the windows and the glass sunroof.
Drivetrain
▷ Adjust the blower output to a high setting.
Drive moderately for the first 500 km, approx.
300 miles and avoid full load. ▷ Maintain a moderate speed.
Tyres
Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do
not achieve their full road grip immediately.
Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles.
298
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
Ice on the windows This phenomenon is known as aquaplaning and

can cause the tyre to lose contact partially or fully
with the road surface, meaning that the vehicle
NOTE can neither be steered, nor the brakes properly
The window lowers a little when the door han‐ applied.
dle is pulled. If there is frost, the window may
freeze up and cannot then be lowered. There is Driving through water
a risk of material damage. Make sure that the
window lowers when the door handle is pulled. General
Remove any snow or ice from the window. Do
Please comply with the following when driving
not open the door by force.
through water:
▷ Only drive through still water.
Radio signals ▷ Only drive through water up to a max. depth
of 25 cm, 9.8 in.
WARNING ▷ Drive through water at a walking speed of no
more than 5 km/h, 3 mph.
Certain vehicle functions may be affected by in‐
terference from high-frequency radio signals.
Such signals are output from a series of trans‐ Safety note
mission systems, for example from air traffic
beacons or relay stations for mobile telecom‐ NOTE
munications.
Driving through excessively deep water too fast
We recommend you consult your Service Cen‐ can result in water getting under the front flap
tre should you experience any difficulties. or into the electrical system or transmission.
There is a risk of material damage. When driv‐
ing through water, do not exceed the maximum
Mobile radio in the vehicle water depth and speed specified above.
WARNING
Safe braking
There is a possibility of reciprocal interference
between the vehicle electronics and mobile
General
radio devices. Radiation is generated when mo‐
bile radio devices are transmitting. There is a The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Brak‐
risk of injury or material damage. If possible, ing System ABS as standard.
only use mobile radio devices, for example mo‐ Perform full braking in situations that require it.
bile telephones, inside the vehicle if they are The vehicle remains steerable. Steer as
connected directly to an external aerial in order smoothly as possible to avoid any obstacles.
to eliminate reciprocal interference and to divert
A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic regu‐
the radiation away from the vehicle's interior.
lating sounds indicate that the Anti-lock Braking
System ABS is functioning.
Aquaplaning In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can cause functional noise. However, the
On wet or slushy roads, a water wedge can form
functional noises have no effect on the efficiency
between the tyres and the road.
and operational safety of the brake.
299
Objects in the movement range of the Safety notes

pedals
WARNING
WARNING Even slight but continuous pressure on the
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the brake pedal can cause overheating, brake pad
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been wear or even brake system failure. There is a
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that risk of accident. Avoid excessive loads on the
items in the vehicle are stowed securely and brake.
cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not WARNING
use loose floor mats, and do not place several
In idle or with drive-ready state switched off,
floor mats on top of one another. Make sure
safety-relevant functions are restricted or no
that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐
longer available, for example the braking effect
sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐
of the drivetrain or power assistance for the
ter removal, for example for cleaning.
braking force and steering. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Do not drive in idle or with the drive-
ready state switched off.
Wet roads
In wet weather, road salt exposure and in heavy
rain, apply the brakes lightly every few kilome‐ Corrosion of the brake disc
tres/miles.
Corrosion of the brake discs and contamination
Ensure that you do not obstruct other road users of the brake pads increase in the following cir‐
when doing so. cumstances:
The heat generated by braking dries the brake ▷ Low mileage.
discs and brake pads and protects them against
▷ Extended stationary periods when the vehicle
corrosion.
is not used.
This helps to maintain braking power so that it is
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
available immediately when needed.
▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents.
Downhill gradient During braking, corroded brake discs may cause
juddering which usually cannot be eliminated.
General
Change gear using shift paddles or selector lever Condensation when vehicle is parked
position D/L, depending on the equipment. When the automatic air conditioning is operating,
Energy recuperation can affect the braking effect condensation develops and exits underneath the
of the drive system. vehicle.
Roof rack
General
Roof racks are available as optional accessories.
300
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
Safety note Rear luggage rack

WARNING Principle
When driving with a roof load, for example with The ball head of the trailer tow hitch can be used
a roof rack, the higher centre of gravity can as a mount for rear luggage racks, for example
mean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐ bicycle carrier systems.
teed in critical driving situations. There is a risk
of accident or material damage. Driving with General
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability
Control. Rear luggage racks which the manufacturer has
classified as suitable are available as optional ac‐
cessories.
Fitting Bicycle carrier systems for up to three bicycles
Follow the installation instructions for the roof can be used.
rack.
Make sure that there is sufficient space to raise
Fitting
and open the glass sunroof. Follow the installation instructions for the rear
luggage rack.
Loading
A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road be‐
Loading
haviour and steering response by shifting its cen‐
tre of gravity.
Therefore when loading and driving, bear the
following in mind:
▷ Do not exceed the permitted roof and axle
load or the permitted total weight.
▷ Make sure that there is sufficient space to
raise and open the glass sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load evenly. The permitted total weight of the rear luggage
▷ The roof load must not be spread over too rack when loaded depends on how far its centre
large an area. of gravity is from the ball head.
▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bottom.
▷ If the centre of gravity is up to 30 cm, 11.8 in
▷ Securely fasten the luggage, for example with away from the ball head, the total weight of
tensioning straps. the rear luggage rack must not exceed
▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the 75 kg/165 lbs.
swing range of the tailgate. ▷ If the centre of gravity is 60 cm, 23.5 in from
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and the ball head, the total weight of the rear lug‐
braking suddenly or fast cornering. gage rack must not exceed 35 kg/77 lbs.
▷ Stow heavy loads as close as possible to the
ball head.
▷ Fasten loads securely to the rear luggage
rack and secure them against sliding around.
301
Before a journey
Before the start of a journey, check that the rear
lights on the rear luggage rack are working.
The maximum output of the rear luggage rack
rear lights must not exceed the values for trailer
rear lights.
To prevent functional limitations and malfunc‐
tions affecting driver assistance systems, activate
trailer operation.
▷ Power consumption, see page 304.
▷ Activating trailer operation, see page 306.
Driving with a rear luggage rack

Loaded rear luggage racks change the driving
and steering behaviour of the vehicle by shifting
the centre of gravity.
Therefore when loading and driving, bear the
following in mind:
▷ Do not exceed the permitted axle load or the
permitted total weight.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and
braking suddenly or fast cornering.
Driving on a racetrack
WARNING
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
competitions or similar. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Do not use the vehicle in M Sport com‐
petitions or similar.
The higher mechanical and thermal loads in‐

volved when driving on racetracks lead to in‐
creased wear. This wear is not covered by the
warranty.
Before and after driving on a racetrack, have the
vehicle checked at a Service Partner of the man‐
ufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
302
Trailer operation DRIVING HINTS
Trailer operation
Vehicle equipment plied towball mount assembly is not approved.
Use only the genuine BMW towball mount as‐
sembly.
functions which are offered or will be offered on BMW Group Australia does not recommend or
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ support the installation and use of a Weight Dis‐
ded in the vehicle in question. tribution Hitch or Load Levelling Device on any
BMW Group vehicle. The use of such devices
may affect the vehicle's warranty status.
We recommend you consult your Authorised
BMW Dealer for any further advice or clarifica‐
General tion.
The permitted trailer loads, axle loads, trailer

nose weights and permitted total weight rating
Before a journey
are specified in the technical data.
Consult a Service Partner of the manufacturer or Trailer nose weight
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist The trailer nose weight should not be less than
workshop about options for increasing the loads. the minimum trailer nose weight of 25 kg, 55 lb.
The vehicle is equipped with reinforced springs Utilise the maximum trailer nose weight as far as
on the rear axle and, depending on the vehicle possible.
type, with a more powerful cooling system. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the trailer
nose weight reduce the maximum load of the
towing vehicle. The trailer nose weight increases
For Australia: note the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the permitted
total weight of the towing vehicle.
Towing
Loading
The Australian/New Zealand Standards AS
4177.1-2004 Caravan and light trailer towing Distribute the load as evenly as possible over the
components – trailer tow hitches and towing loading area.
brackets includes the following statement which Stow the load as low down as possible and as
BMW Group Australia herewith adopts: FOR close as possible to the trailer axle. A low centre
TRAILER TOWING ONLY. The trailer tow hitch of trailer gravity makes the car/trailer combination
supplied with your BMW vehicle should only be much more stable and safe to drive.
used for towing purposes, the trailer tow hitch The permitted total weight of the trailer and the
assembly should not be used in conjunction with permitted trailer load of the vehicle must not be
any towbar-mounted carrying device, such as, for exceeded. The lower value is the limit which
example, a bicycle carrier. should be adhered to.
As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are de‐
signed, tested and approved as a single unit, the
practice of modifying or replacing the BMW sup‐
303
DRIVING HINTS Trailer operation
Tyre inflation pressure Not Australia/New Zealand: Trailer rear

Check the vehicle's and the trailer's tyre inflation lights
pressures carefully. The power output of the trailer's rear lights must
On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure for not exceed the following values:
higher loads applies. ▷ Turn indicators: 42 watts per side.
For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac‐ ▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
turer apply. ▷ Brake lights: 84 watts total.
For further information: ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts total.
Tyre inflation pressure information, see ▷ Reversing lights: 42 watts total.
page 327.
Australia/New Zealand: Trailer rear lights
Flat tyre monitor RPA ▷ Turn indicators: 54 watts per side.
Initialise the flat tyre monitor after the tyre infla‐
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total.
tion pressure has been corrected or a trailer has
been attached or detached. ▷ Brake lights: 108 watts total.
For further information: ▷ Reversing lights: 54 watts total.
Flat tyre monitor RPA, see page 345.

Towing a trailer
Tyre Pressure Monitor
Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor after the tyre
General
inflation pressure has been corrected or a trailer
has been attached or detached. When the trailer socket is occupied, some driver
assistance systems are unavailable, or available
only to a restricted extent. A Check Control mes‐
Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 338. sage is shown where applicable.
In order to avoid malfunctions, activate trailer op‐
Exterior mirrors eration.
Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor‐ For further information:
ners of the trailer into your field of view are re‐
Activating trailer operation, see page 306.
quired by law. Mirrors of this type are available as
optional accessories from a Service Partner of
the manufacturer or another qualified Service Safety notes
WARNING
Power consumption Speeds in excess of approximately 80 km/h,
50 mph, can be enough to produce snaking
General motion, depending on the design of trailers and
Before the start of a journey, check the function the loads they are carrying. There is a risk of
of the trailer rear lights. accident or material damage.
When towing a caravan, only operate power con‐
sumers briefly to avoid placing an excessive load
on the vehicle battery.
304
Keep to an appropriate speed when towing a Before the downhill gradient, shift down manually
trailer. If the trailer starts to snake, brake imme‐ to the next-lowest gear and drive downhill slowly.
diately and make the necessary steering cor‐ Change gear using shift paddles or selector lever
rections as carefully as possible. position D/L, depending on the equipment.
WARNING Trailer Stability Control

The tyre inflation pressure must be adapted
because of the increased axle load when tow‐ Principle
ing a trailer. Driving with inadequate tyre infla‐ Trailer Stability Control assists in intercepting
tion pressure can damage the tyres. There is a trailer snaking movements.
risk of accident or material damage. Do not ex‐
ceed a speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph. Increase The system detects snaking movements and
the tyre inflation pressure of the towing vehicle promptly brakes the vehicle so that the vehicle
by 0.2 bar. Note the maximum possible tyre in‐ speed falls to below the critical speed range and
flation pressure stated on the tyre. the outfit is stabilised.
General
Upward gradients The system can also become active in extreme
driving situations when the trailer socket is occu‐
General pied without a trailer attached, for example when
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up using a bicycle carrier with lighting.
other traffic flow, do not attempt to climb upward
gradients steeper than 12 % in trailer operation. Operating requirements
If higher trailer loads have been retrospectively The system is operational from a speed of ap‐
approved, the limit is 8 %. proximately 65 km/h, 40 mph in trailer operation
and with the trailer socket occupied.
Driving off on upward gradients
The parking brake is automatically released System limits
when the accelerator pedal is operated. The system is unable to intervene or intervenes
To prevent the vehicle from rolling back when too late, in the following situations for example:
driving off, use the parking brake. ▷ If a trailer folds instantly, for example on slip‐
pery or loose road surfaces.
▷ If a trailer with a high centre of gravity tips
1. Shortly before driving off, pull and re‐ over before snaking movement is detected.
lease the switch.
▷ If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or
The parking brake is engaged. has failed.
2. To drive off, press the accelerator pedal with ▷ If the power consumption of a trailer is too
sufficient force. low to be detected by the system, for exam‐
ple due to LED rear lights.
Downhill gradient
On downward gradients, a car/trailer combination
tends to start snaking movement earlier.
305
Activating trailer operation

NOTE
The trailer tow hitch is intended to be used with
General a trailer. If the ball linkage of the trailer tow hitch
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the has been swivelled out, it may become jammed
trailer socket is not occupied, some driver assis‐ when driving without a trailer or load carrier.
tance systems may only operate to a limited ex‐ There is a risk of material damage. Swivel the
tent or may malfunction. In order to avoid mal‐ ball linkage back in when driving without a
functions, activate trailer operation. trailer or load carrier.
Activating trailer operation

1. "MENU" Overview
2. "Vehicle apps"
5. "Driving"
6. "Trailer mode"
Not for Australia: Trailer tow The button for swivelling the ball head in and out
is in the luggage compartment.
hitch with electrically adjustable
ball head
▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground.
General
▷ The tailgate is open.
The adjustable ball head is located on the under‐
side of the vehicle. ▷ The trailer socket is not occupied.
▷ Trailer operation is not activated.
Safety notes ▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
The LED in the button illuminates green if the
WARNING system is operational.
If the ball linkage is not locked, unstable driving
conditions or accidents can result. There is a Swivelling out the ball head
risk of accident or material damage. Before a 1. Open the luggage compartment.
journey with a trailer or load carrier, check that 2. Step out of the swing range of the ball head
the ball linkage is correctly locked. behind the vehicle.
If the ball linkage is not properly locked, the
LED in the button illuminates red.
3. Press the button in the luggage com‐
partment.
306
The ball head swivels out. The LED flashes If necessary, repeat the swivel movement with
green. the button pressed and drive-ready state
4. Wait until the ball head has reached the end switched on.
position. The LED in the button illuminates green when
The LED in the button illuminates green when the ball head has reached an end position.
the ball head has reached an end position. If the swivel movement is repeatedly interrupted,
contact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
Swivelling the ball head back in another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
1. Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.
2. Remove any fittings for the track-stabilising
Trailer socket
devices.
3. Remove the power supply connector for the
trailer and any adapter from the socket.
4. Press the button in the luggage com‐

partment.
The ball head swivels inwards. The LED
flashes green.
5. Wait until the ball head has reached the end
position. The trailer socket is located on the trailer tow
hitch.
The LED in the button illuminates green when
the ball head has reached an end position. Fold down the cover.
Interruption or reversal of the swivel Eye for securing cable

movement
General
The swivel movement is interrupted, might be
reversed or is not performed if electrical current
limits are exceeded, for example at very low tem‐
peratures, or if mechanical resistance is encoun‐
tered. LED illuminates red.
Repeating the swivel movement with the There is an eye on the trailer tow hitch for fasten‐
drive-ready state switched on ing the trailer securing cable.
For increased safety when towing a trailer, attach
the trailer securing cable to the eye.
2. Press the button in the luggage com‐ Check that the securing cable can move freely
partment and hold it until the ball head has and is not dragging on the ground.
moved completely in or out.
307
Operating rear luggage racks

The ball head of the trailer tow hitch can be used
as a mount for rear luggage racks, for example
bicycle carrier systems.
Note the information on rear luggage racks when
operating the rear luggage rack.
Rear luggage rack, see page 301.
308
Increasing range DRIVING HINTS
Increasing range
Vehicle equipment Tyres
This chapter describes equipment, systems and General

functions which are offered or will be offered on Tyres can have differing effects on energy con‐
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ sumption. For example, energy consumption can
ded in the vehicle in question. be affected by tyre size.
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. Check tyre inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before set‐
Increasing range ting off on a longer journey.
Insufficient tyre inflation pressure increases roll‐
General ing resistance and consequently energy con‐
sumption and tyre wear.
The vehicle contains extensive technologies to
reduce energy consumption and maximise For further information:
range. Tyre inflation pressure information, see
A number of measures, such as driving style and page 327.
regular service can increase the range.
For further information: Pre-conditioning
Range, see page 165. Activate preliminary air conditioning in the vehicle
during charging before starting the trip.
Remove unnecessary loads Heating and cooling processes are very energy-
intensive and decrease the electric range consid‐
Extra weight decreases range.
erably.
Remove mounted parts after use
Pre-conditioning, see page 280.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks or rear carri‐
ers after use if they are no longer required.
Think ahead
Parts mounted on the vehicle can adversely af‐
fect its aerodynamics and increase energy con‐ Anticipating the road situation and adopting a
sumption. smooth driving style will reduce energy con‐
sumption.
Closing windows and glass sunroof Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
An open glass sunroof or open window increases To do so, keep an appropriate distance from the
drag and consequently reduce the range. vehicle ahead.
309
DRIVING HINTS Increasing range
Use the accelerator pedal for General

decelerating and rolling to a stop The system comprises the following
When approaching a red light, use the accelera‐ EfficientDynamics functions and
tor or brake pedal to decelerate at an early stage. EfficientDynamics displays:
Use the coasting function when driving downhill. ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
Press accelerator pedal just until the vehicle rolls. ▷ ECO PRO air conditioning.
With adaptive recuperation: do not press the ac‐ ▷ ECO PRO view.
celerator pedal. Coasting and deceleration are ▷ Route-ahead Assistant
automatically adapted to the driving situation in
question. ▷ Driving style analysis
Switch off functions which are not Overview

currently required
Functions such as seat heating or rear window
heating require a great deal of energy and re‐
duce the range, especially in city traffic and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch these functions off if they are not re‐
quired.
The ECO PRO drive mode supports energy-sav‐
ing use of comfort functions. These functions are
automatically deactivated wholly or partially.
ECO PRO
Have maintenance work carried out
For optimum economy and service life, have the
vehicle serviced regularly. BMW recommends
having maintenance work carried out by a BMW Selecting the drive mode
Service Partner.
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
Please also comply with the BMW Maintenance in the instrument cluster.
System.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

ECO PRO
Via iDrive
Principle 1. "MENU"
ECO PRO supports an efficient driving style. The 2. "Vehicle apps"
control of the drivetrain is optimised for moder‐ 3. "Driving settings"
ate acceleration and light and comfort functions,
including air conditioning output, for example, are
adapted. 5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
310
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO peration is important for supplying the electrical

functions components and essential for achieving a long
range. Energy recuperation and energy con‐
The following ECO PRO functions can be activa‐
sumption depend on driving as well as other fac‐
ted/deactivated:
tors.
▷ ECO PRO seat heating.
▷ ECO PRO air conditioning. Optimising driving style
▷ ECO PRO view.
Power display
ECO PRO seat climate control When activating the ECO PRO drive mode, the
The output of the seat heating is reduced when display changes to a special display.
ECO PRO is activated.
ECO PRO air conditioning

The air conditioning is adjusted for efficient con‐
sumption.
To achieve this, the set temperature is adjusted
slightly and the interior is heated or cooled more
slowly to reduce consumption.
ECO PRO view When driving efficiently, the power display is col‐
The power output of the exterior mirror heating oured blue.
and the rear window heating is reduced. The display will change to grey if the driving style
Depending on the equipment, the dynamic ECO is inefficient.
lighting function is activated additionally.
For efficient driving style, activate adaptive recu‐
peration
Resetting settings
Driving in detail: eDRIVE, see page 141.
2. "Settings" Display inefficient driving style
3. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD" When driving above the efficient range,
an arrow will be displayed.
Using eDRIVE efficiently For example, the display occurs in the

▷ Excessive acceleration.
Principle
▷ Excessive speed.
eDRIVE works automatically. By adopting an an‐
ticipatory driving style, the drive system charac‐ ▷ Special route section, for example round‐
teristics can be used to optimum effect, in other about ahead.
words energy consumption and energy recuper‐ In addition, a deceleration notification is dis‐
ation are optimised. Energy recuperation is for played.
charging the high-voltage battery. Energy recu‐
311
Predictive driving style ▷ With temporary and variable speed limits, for
example, at road works.
Principle ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
The display informs the driver about decelera‐ outdated or not available.
tions ahead, for example, speed limit reductions ▷ If there are country-dependent restrictions on
or roundabouts, even when they are not yet visi‐ map-based route sections.
ble. The situation-specific information and dis‐
tance to the route section ahead is shown above
the current speed limit in the instrument cluster. Driving style analysis
If there is a note, the speed can be reduced in
way that saves energy using the corresponding
Principle
accelerator pedal position for rolling.
The function helps develop a particularly efficient
driving style and to save energy.
It does this by analysing your driving style. The
evaluation is performed in various categories and
is shown on the control display.
Using this display, the individual driving style can
be adjusted to save energy.
General
Adapting the driving style can increase the range
of the vehicle.
A note regarding a section of the route ahead is The current trip is analysed.
given as a recommendation to allow the vehicle
to roll. Operating requirements
An icon, for example a turn, indicates the detec‐ The function is available in ECO PRO drive
ted section of the route: mode.
Icon Section of the road in front

Go to efficiency evaluation
Speed limit or town entrance. 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
Roundabout. 3. "Live Vehicle"

Live Vehicle, see page 171
Corner.
Display on the control display
The display of the efficiency analysis shows the
System limits efficiency of the driving style.
For example, the display of the upcoming route The more efficient the driving style, the larger the
sections is not available in the following situa‐ bars of the evaluation categories.
tions:
312
In contrast, a reduced area will be displayed with 4. "Drivetrain and chassis"

an inefficient driving style. 5. "Energy recovery in D"
Adaptive recuperation
Coasting
Principle
Adaptive recuperation supports an anticipatory Principle
and comfort-oriented driving style. Map data and
The electric drivetrain allows it to roll without en‐
various sensors analyse the current driving situa‐
ergy consumption. This drive state is called
tion, for example the distance to the vehicle in
coasting.
front.
Coasting is automatically adapted to the driving
General situation in question.
Adaptive recuperation is available depending on If the vehicle rolls, no energy is recuperated.

the equipment and national-market version.
Based on the situation, the system decides
Examples of driving situations
whether and the extent to which energy is recov‐ If a route can be covered without foreseeable
ered through recuperation, or how the vehicle braking, it is advantageous to roll on this route.
rolls. Depending on the strength of the recupera‐ The following examples of driving situations may
tion, the vehicle is decelerated differently while be suitable for this:
coasting. ▷ Rolling on straight downhill gradient with no
obstacles.
Display ▷ Rolling to a stop on a section of route without
obstacles.
Avoid late or heavy braking.
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
▷ Selector lever position D is engaged.
Power display, see page 163.
▷ Adaptive recuperation is activated.
Display on the control display ▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
The adaptive recuperation can be displayed on ▷ Brake is not depressed.

the control display. ▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
Current driving condition, see page 173. System limits
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
Activating the recuperation outdated or not available.
1. "MENU" ▷ If there are country-dependent restrictions on

map-based route sections.
2. "Vehicle apps"
▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit,
such as at road works.
313
▷ If Cruise Control is active.

▷ If the sensors are faulty, soiled or covered.
314
315
MOBILITY Charging vehicle
Charging vehicle
Vehicle equipment Before the first charging process, have the
following components of your own charging
point checked by a qualified electrician at the
charging location:
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ ▷ Charging cable.
ded in the vehicle in question. ▷ Charging station.
For further information: ▷ Domestic socket outlet and connected cir‐
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. cuits.
General WARNING
Damaged or worn charging points, for example
The vehicle can be recharged with various worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of
charging cables at charging stations, domestic fire. Only use a charging point that is in perfect
socket outlets or industrial socket outlets. condition.
The charging process is controlled and moni‐
tored fully automatically. The charge current in‐
tensity can be set using iDrive. WARNING
Touching live components can result in an
electric shock. High voltage is present at the
Safety notes charging socket. There is a risk of injury or even
death. Have work on the charging socket, for
example cleaning, performed by a Service Part‐
WARNING ner of the manufacturer or another qualified
Incorrect handling of electric current can cause Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
an electric shock due to high voltages or pow‐
erful current. There is a risk of fire or death. Fol‐
low the general safety regulations when work‐ NOTE
ing with electric current.
The connected charging cable and charging
cable connections on the vehicle may be dam‐
aged due to mechanical load. There is a risk of
WARNING material damage. Do not apply mechanical
A defective and wrongly configured charging loads to the charging cable and the charging
point at the charging location may damage to cable connections. Route the charging cable to
the vehicle and overload the power system at the vehicle freely and avoid pulling or bending.
the charging location. There is a risk of fire and
injury.
316
Charging vehicle MOBILITY
High-voltage battery power supply. Set to the lowest level if the

power supply is unknown.
The high-voltage battery serves as energy stor‐
age. The high-voltage battery can be charged by
Charging at a domestic socket outlet
energy recuperation during a journey or from the
mains. Before charging for the first time at your own do‐
mestic socket outlet, and when charging at other
For optimum operation of the high-voltage bat‐
domestic socket outlets, first find out the permit‐
tery, charge the vehicle regularly at a suitable
ted charge current level, for example by consult‐
charging point.
ing a qualified electrician.
The following different options are available for
charging from the mains:
Current limitation
▷ Domestic socket outlet.
▷ Industrial socket. General
▷ AC charging station. The current limitation for charging with the
▷ DC charging station. Mode 2 charging cable and the Mode 3 charging
cable can be set via iDrive.
For optimum use of energy from the grid, charg‐
ing at a charging station, for example BMW Wall‐ Depending on the electrical mains, the set charg‐
box, is recommended. ing current strength may have to be rechecked.
Determine the approved charge current level be‐
The BMW Wallbox must meet the following
fore using a domestic socket outlet for charging,
technical requirements:
for example by a qualified electrician.
▷ Three-phase charging power of at least
If the approved charging current strength is un‐
11 kW.
known, set the current limitation to the lowest
▷ Charge current intensity of 16 A. level.
Activating/deactivating current limitation

Charge current 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
General
3. "Charging"
Charge current intensity is specified in amps.
4. "Current limit"
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐
5. "Current limit"
imum permitted charge current intensity of the
grid when charging at a domestic socket outlet. The set current limitation is activated or de‐
activated.
Safety note
Setting current limitation
1. "MENU"
WARNING
2. "Vehicle apps"
If the charge current intensity is set incorrectly,
the power supply of the domestic socket outlet 3. "Charging"
can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk 4. "Current limit"
of fire. Before charging at domestic socket out‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
lets, adapt the charge current intensity to the
317
The setting is saved. When changing the charg‐ Safety notes

ing point change the setting accordingly.
WARNING
Charging cable ID
Incompatible charging cables or unsuitable
The charging cable and high-voltage charging
charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐
socket feature an ID. The ID indicates whether
age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. For
the charging cable and high-voltage charging
charging, use charging cables or charging sta‐
socket are compatible.
tions that have been classified as suitable for
When the identification on the charging cable the corresponding type of vehicle.
matches with one of the identifications on the
Information on suitable charging cables can be
charging socket, a charging process is possible.
asked for at the Service Partner of the manu‐
facturer.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the charging cable can prevent
the charging process and lead to damage, for
example a cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Only
use the charging cable for charging the vehicle
and do not extend it with a cable or adapter.
AC charging via a Mode 2 charging cable or
Mode 3 charging cable or DC charging via a DC
charging cable.
WARNING
Damaged charging cables can heat up or cause
an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or injury.
Charging cable Only use undamaged charging cables.
General
To charge the vehicle, use a mode 2 charging WARNING
cable, a mode 3 charging cable or a fixed cable of An incorrectly connected charging cable can
a charging station. lead to damage, for example cable fire. There is
Depending on the national-market version, differ‐ a risk of injury or material damage. Ensure that
ent charging cables are required and are inclu‐ the charging cable plug has been fully inserted
ded in the vehicle delivery specification. into the socket.
It may be possible to perform settings on the
charging cable. Do not change the default set‐
ting on the charging cable. AC charging cable
Mode 2 charging cable

The mode 2 charging cable permits charging at
domestic socket outlets with protective earth.
The power supply at a domestic socket outlet
uses alternating current to charge the vehicle.
318
When using the mode 2 charging cable, the effi‐ The rapid charging cable is also referred to as a
ciency values may differ from those of the en‐ mode 4 charging cable.
ergy label.
The mode 2 charging cable is also referred to as Storage
a standard charging cable. On delivery, the charging cable is stowed in the
luggage compartment, for example under the
Flexible Fast Charger luggage compartment floor or in a bag.
The Flexible Fast Charger is a special mode 2 Put the charging cable back in the same place
charging cable. after use.
The interchangeable power plugs of the Flexible If the charging cable is stowed in a bag, secure
Fast Charger allow flexible charging at domestic the bag to an unused lashing eye in the luggage
or industrial socket outlets with protective con‐ compartment.
ductors. If necessary, store the charging cable with at‐
tached plug cover to avoid moisture in the charg‐
Mode 3 charging cable ing cable plug.
The mode 3 charging cable enables fast charg‐
ing at sockets of designated AC charging sta‐ Connecting a charging cable
tions through a special connector. Alternating
current is used to charge at designated AC General
charging stations. The charging process can be
Before connecting, clean the area between the
completed faster than with domestic socket out‐
charging socket flap and charging socket outlet
lets.
and the charging cable plug if necessary, for ex‐
A charge current level of up to a maximum of ample remove any snow.
16 A is possible.
The charging cable may be permanently installed Charging socket flap
at the charging station.
The mode 3 charging cable is also referred to as
an AC quick charging cable.
Rapid charging cable

The rapid charging cable permanently installed
on the charging station allows charging at DC
charging stations. Direct current is used for
charging at designated DC charging stations.
The DC charging station has a higher rated The charging socket flap is located in the rear on
power supply and the charging time is usually the right side of the vehicle.
considerably shorter compared with a domestic
socket outlet or AC charging station. Keep the high-voltage charging socket clean and
When charging at a DC charging station, a note unobstructed.
is shown on the instrument cluster. Keep the charging socket flap and, if applicable,
Charge the vehicle only with a DC charging cable the charging socket cover, closed when the
less than , 30 m approx. 98 ft in length. charging socket is not in use.
319
Connecting a charging cable Removing the charging cable

To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state and unlock the vehi‐ General
cle. Apply the parking brake, if necessary. During the charging process, the charging cable
1. To open the charging socket flap, press on is automatically locked. Unlock the charging ca‐
the rear edge, arrow. ble before removing.
The charging socket flap opens. Before removing, clean the area between the
charging socket flap and the charging socket
outlet, for example to remove snow.
Removing a charging cable

1. Unlock vehicle or unlock charging cable via
iDrive.
The charging process is finished.
The charging cable is unlocked for a short
time.
2. Open the charging socket flap. 2. Hold the charging cable at the grips.
3. Remove the charging cable from the high-
voltage charging socket, arrow.
3. Remove the cover from the charging cable

connector if necessary.
4. As applicable, connect the mode 2 charging 4. Close the charging socket cover.
cable to the domestic socket outlet or the 5. Press the charging socket flap closed until it
mode 3 charging cable to the connection engages.
point on the AC charging station.
6. Where applicable, fit cover on charging cable
5. Place the charging cable plug into the charg‐ connector.
ing socket outlet and press it in as far as it will
7. If applicable, disconnect the mode 2 charging
go.
cable from the domestic socket outlet or the
6. Briefly hold the charging cable until the mode 3 charging cable from the connection
charging cable is locked correctly. point at the AC charging station.
7. When charging at a charging station, follow 8. Stow the charging cable if necessary.
the instructions at the charging station if nec‐
At a charging station, insert the permanently
essary.
installed charging cable into the place provi‐
ded for this purpose.
320
Unlocking the charging cable General

High or low outside temperatures can cause lon‐
Principle ger charging times.
The charging cable is unlocked when the vehicle When charging the vehicle, a target charge can
is unlocked. The charging cable can also be un‐ be set, shortening the charging time.
locked via iDrive.
When the route guidance to a DC charging sta‐
tion has been started, the pre-temperature of the
Unlocking the charging cable via iDrive high-voltage battery is set in advance as best as
1. "MENU" possible before the destination is reached. This
2. "Vehicle apps" increases the charging capacity during the
charging process and shortens the charging
3. "Charging"
time. The pre-temperature setting takes factors
4. "Unlock charging cable" such as remaining range or outside temperatures
5. "Unlock charging cable now" into account.
6. "Stop and unlock charging cable" If the mode 2 charging cable is exposed to high
temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐
Additional settings rupt the charging process. Charging process re‐
sumes automatically.
1. "MENU"
The charging process will be interrupted or will
2. "Vehicle apps"
not be started when a Remote Software Up‐
3. "Charging" grade is installed. The charging process may not
4. "Unlock charging cable" resume automatically after successful installa‐
5. Select the desired setting: tion.
▷ "Unlock charging cable when charging
finishes": the charging cable is automati‐ Safety notes
cally unlocked as soon as the charging
process has finished. NOTE
▷ "Unlock charging flap permanently": the Placing weight on the charging socket flap and
charging socket flap can be permanently the charging socket outlet cover may cause
unlocked so that it can be opened even damage. There is a risk of material damage. Do
when the vehicle is locked. not put weight onto the charging socket flap
and the charging socket outlet cover, for exam‐
ple, by setting down the charging cable.
Charging process
Principle Starting the charging process
Charging can be adapted to accommodate vari‐ 1. Engage the selector lever in position P. Apply
ous constraints, for example, electricity costs, parking brake if necessary.
available electricity source or low ambient tem‐ 2. Plan the charging process.
perature. The vehicle controls the charging proc‐ Charging process scheduling, see page 324.
ess so that the charging is completed if possible
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
by a departure time. To do so, a departure time
must be set. 4. As applicable, connect the mode 2 charging
cable to the domestic socket outlet or the
321
mode 3 charging cable to the connection If the vehicle is locked, the indicator light is extin‐
point on the AC charging station. guished after a while.
5. Open the charging socket flap. The blue indicator light flashes continuously
6. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle. while the vehicle is unlocked. The other indicator
lights are extinguished after a while.
Connecting a charging cable, see page 319.
Press the button on the vehicle key to check
7. Lock the vehicle if necessary.
the charge state. The charge state is shown on
The charging cable is locked automatically once the indicator light. The vehicle may be locked.
the charging cable connector has been inserted
Additional messages about the charging status
into the high-voltage charging socket.
can be displayed in the instrument cluster or via
the BMW app on a mobile device.
Charging status display
Setting the charging mode
Indicator light on the high-voltage
1. "MENU"
charging socket
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
4. "Charging mode"
5. Select the desired settings:
▷ "Charge immediately": charging process
starts as soon as the charging cable is
connected.
▷ "Charging in time slot": if a departure time
is set, a time window with a cheaper elec‐
The charging status is indicated on the indicator tricity tariff can be set for charging.
light on the charging socket.
Charging in the time window
Charging status
General
Light Meaning During the charging process, a time window with
White Charging cable can be connec‐ a favourable electricity tariff can be set for charg‐
ted. ing.
The vehicle can also start the charging process
Yellow Charging cable is locked.
before the selected time window begins or end it
Flashing yel‐ Charging process is being pre‐ after the selected time window finishes. The
low pared. starting point of the charging process is adjusted
so the vehicle can be charged as much as possi‐
Blue Charging process paused. ble and, if applicable, be air conditioned right up
Flashing blue Charging process is active. to the departure time.
Flashing red Fault in charging process. Operating requirements

Green Charging is complete. A departure time is defined.
322
Setting the time window for cost- the noise emissions may result in longer charg‐
effective charging ing times.
1. "MENU" 1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps" 2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging" 3. "Charging"
4. "Charging mode" 4. "Fan loudness"
5. "Charging in time slot" 5. Select the desired setting.
Stopping charging process
Target charge When the vehicle is charged using a
Mode 2 charging cable or a Mode 3 charging ca‐
Principle ble, the charging process will be interrupted
A percentage target value can be set when when the vehicle is unlocked. The charging proc‐
charging the high-voltage battery. ess will then be continued automatically after a
short period of time or when the vehicle is
If a lower target value is set, the charging time
locked.
can be shortened.
The charging process can be terminated at any
General time by removing the charging cable, and re‐
sumed at a later point by connecting the charg‐
Charging with a set charging target is recom‐ ing cable. For example to allow other consumers
mended in particular when charging the vehicle to use the power supply in the meantime, or to
at a DC charging station. avoid having several high power consumers con‐
To make optimum use of the function, a target nected at the same time.
value of 80 % is recommended. For further information:
Target values below 20 % cannot be set. Removing, see page 320.
Setting the target charge Resuming charging process

1. "MENU"
If charging is interrupted, for example, by unlock‐
2. "Vehicle apps" ing the vehicle or due to a temporary power fail‐
3. "Charging" ure, the charging process will continue automati‐
4. "Charging target" cally after the interruption.
5. Select the desired setting. When the vehicle is charged at a public charging
station, the charging process may not continue
automatically after an interruption.
Permissible DC charging volume
If the vehicle is charged at a DC charging station, Ending charging process
the noise emissions that occur during charging
process can be restricted in order to comply with 1. Disconnect the charging cable from the vehi‐
local noise regulations, for example. Restricting cle.
Removing, see page 320.
2. Stow the charging cable if necessary.
323
3. Press the charging socket flap closed until it Display Meaning

engages.
Charging cable unlocked.
4. Lock the vehicle if necessary.
Goodbye screen on the control Set charge target.

display
When the drive-ready state is turned off, a good‐
bye screen will appear on the control display Departure time set.
where some of the settings for charging via
iDrive can be entered.
One-time departure time set.
Displays in the instrument

Air conditioning activated for depar‐
cluster ture time.
When the standby state is switched on, the

Flashing: ventilation or cooling active.
charging status display shows the charge state
of the high-voltage battery in the instrument
cluster. When all bars are filled, the high-voltage
Flashing: heating active.
battery is fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system
is always under high voltage. Yellow icon: charging capacity of the
The charge display displays information about charging station is not available or re‐
the charging process. stricted.
Display Meaning
Charging the vehicle with a Mode 2

charging cable or Mode 3 charging ca‐
ble.
Charging the vehicle with a DC charg‐

ing cable.
Current charging power.

Icon indicates when the maximum
The hatched area indicates a limited charging
charging capacity of the vehicle has
capacity that can occur, for example, due to the
been reached.
connected charging infrastructure.
Maximum charging current strength or
currently set current limitation. For further information:
Charge display, see page 155.
Charging cable locked.
324
Departure time The set departure time is deactivated if the de‐

parture time is not observed three times in suc‐
cession.
Principle
For optimum range and climate control, the de‐
parture time can be set before parking the vehi‐ Air conditioning
cle.
The following settings for air conditioning the ve‐
General hicle are possible:
If settings for the air conditioning have been ▷ Activate pre-conditioning immediately.
made, the vehicle is pre-conditioned for the set The range will be reduced if pre-conditioning
departure time. is activated without a charging cable connec‐
The following settings for departure time are ted.
possible: ▷ Planned climate control at the set departure
▷ Air conditioning for departure time. time.
▷ Scheduling of up to three regular departure For further information:

times. Pre-conditioning, see page 280.
▷ Scheduling of a one-off departure time.
Air conditioning for departure time

Discharged high-voltage
1. "MENU" battery and vehicle battery
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
General
As well as the high-voltage battery, the vehicle
4. "Departure plan"
has a 12-volt vehicle battery which is required for
5. "Pre-conditioning for departure" operating the on-board electronics.
It is not possible to operate the vehicle with a
Setting the departure time discharged vehicle battery.
1. "MENU"
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
Service life of the high-voltage
4. "Departure plan" battery
5. Select the required departure time.
6. Set the time and day of the week. General
The high-voltage battery is maintenance-free.
Activating the departure time More information regarding the high-voltage bat‐
1. "MENU" tery can be obtained from a Service Partner of
the manufacturer or another qualified Service
2. "Vehicle apps"
3. "Charging"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the required departure time.
325
Principle Extended stationary periods

The performance of the high-voltage battery de‐ Before a longer stationary period, observe the
creases over its service life. The service life of following:
the high-voltage battery can be optimised by ▷ If possible, park the vehicle with a charge
one’s own usage behaviour. level between 30 % and 50 %.
▷ Do not leave the charging cable connected.
Charging instructions
▷ Do not place the vehicle in storage for longer
For several consecutive DC charging processes, than 14 days if the electric range has been
e.g. during a longer trip, the charging capacity is used up.
reduced, if necessary, temporarily, to protect the
high-voltage battery.
Putting the vehicle out of use
With increased service life of the high-voltage
A Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
battery, the charging capacity is also reduced.
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop
To optimize the life of the high-voltage battery, will be pleased to advise you on the measures
observe the following: that should be taken when placing the vehicle in
▷ Preferably charge at AC charging stations for storage for longer than three months.
daily use.
▷ Keep the charge state between 10 % and
80 % where possible, for example by setting
a charging target of 80 %. Charging target,
see Charging process, see page 321.
Before and during travel

To optimize the life of the high-voltage battery,
observe the following:
▷ Bring the high-voltage battery to operating
temperature before driving. To do this, acti‐
vate the vehicle’s preliminary air conditioning.
Setting the departure time, see page 325.
▷ Adopt an anticipatory driving style. Increasing
the range, see page 309.
Parking
To optimize the life of the high-voltage battery,
observe the following:
▷ Avoid direct sunlight at high outside tempera‐
tures.
▷ Park the vehicle in a protected area at low
outside temperatures, for example in a ga‐
rage.
326
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
Wheels and tyres

Vehicle equipment Tyre inflation pressure information
This chapter describes equipment, systems and On the body pillar

Tyre inflation pressure

General The tyre inflation pressure information is located
on the body pillar of the driver's door.
The tyre condition and tyre inflation pressure in‐
fluence the following: The tyre pressure applies to all tyre sizes and
recommended tyre makes that have been rated
▷ Tyre service life. by the vehicle manufacturer as suitable for the
▷ Driving safety. vehicle type concerned. The list can also include
▷ Driving comfort. tyre sizes that are only suitable in combination
with specific equipment.
▷ Energy consumption.
Information about approved wheels and tyres for
Safety note the vehicle can be requested from one of the
manufacturer's Service Partners or another quali‐
fied Service Partner or specialist workshop.
WARNING The tyre inflation pressure appropriate for the re‐
A tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pressure spective load conditions should be used. For ex‐
can heat up significantly and sustain damage. ample, if the vehicle is partially loaded, use the
Handling characteristics, for example steering tyre inflation pressure specified for a partially loa‐
and braking, will be impaired as a result. There ded vehicle.
is a risk of accident. Check the tyre inflation
pressure regularly and adjust as necessary, for
example twice a month or before any long jour‐ For Australia/New Zealand
ney.
WARNING
The inflation pressures on the tyre label are ap‐
plicable only for tyres explicitly mentioned on
the label. Inflation pressures for tyres that may
be covered by the label – by size, speed cate‐
gory and load rating/load index – but not explic‐
itly mentioned on the label may be different.
Please obtain adequate inflation pressures in
327
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
accordance with the tyre manufacturer's speci‐ ▷ If the vehicle has been driven a distance of no
fications from your tyre dealer. more than 2 km, 1.25 miles.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a journey.
On the control display
If equipped with an emergency tyre: check the
The current tyre inflation pressures and the
tyre inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in
specified tyre inflation pressures for the mounted
the luggage compartment regularly and correct if
tyres can be displayed on the control display.
necessary.
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
tyre sizes must be stored in the system and must Checking using the tyre inflation pressure
have been set for the fitted tyres. information on the control display
The current tyre inflation pressure value is shown 1. "MENU"
on each tyre.
2. "Vehicle apps"
The specified tyre inflation pressure value is lo‐
3. "Live Vehicle"
cated towards the bottom of the control display.
4. "Content"
Checking the tyre inflation pressure 5. "Vehicle status"
6. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
General
Tyres heat up while driving. The tyre inflation After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure
pressure increases with the temperature of the For the flat tyre monitor RPA:
tyre.
Reinitialise the flat tyre monitor RPA.
Tyres have a natural, uniform tyre pressure loss.
For the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
Inflating devices can display a pressure that may
The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied
be up to 0.1 bar too low.
automatically. Make sure that the tyre settings
are correct.
Checking using tyre inflation pressure
For tyres that are not listed in the tyre inflation
information on the body pillar
pressure information on the control display, reset
1. Determine the specified tyre inflation pres‐ the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
sures for the tyres installed on the vehicle.
2. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four Speed code letter
tyres, using a pressure gauge, for example.
3. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐ Designation Maximum speed
rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from the
Q up to 160 km/h, 100 mph
specified tyre inflation pressure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed R up to 170 km/h, 106 mph
onto the tyre valves.
S up to 180 km/h, 112 mph
The tyre inflation pressure information on the
tyre pressure label on the body pillar only relates T up to 190 km/h, 118 mph
to cold tyres or tyres at the same temperature as H up to 210 km/h, 131 mph
the ambient temperature.
F up to 240 km/h, 150 mph
Only check the tyre inflation pressures when the
tyres are cold, i.e.:
328
Designation Maximum speed Tyre damages

W up to 270 km/h, 167 mph
General
Y up to 300 km/h, 186 mph
Inspect tyres regularly for damage, the presence
(Y) above 300 km/h/186 mph of foreign bodies and wear.
Vehicle behaviour that may indicate tyre damage
or other faults:
Tyre tread ▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tyre or running noises.
Summer tyres
▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐
The tyre tread depth should not be less than nounced pulling to the left or right.
3 mm, 0.12 in, otherwise there is a high risk of
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
aquaplaning.
tions, for example:
Winter tyres ▷ Driving over kerbs.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than ▷ Road damage.
4 mm, 0.16 in, otherwise its suitability for winter ▷ Insufficient tyre inflation pressure.
use is restricted. ▷ Overloading the vehicle.
▷ Incorrect tyre storage.
Minimum tread depth
Safety notes
WARNING
If the tyres are damaged, the tyre inflation pres‐
sure may be reduced, which in turn could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There
is a risk of accident. If you suspect tyre damage
while you are driving, immediately reduce
speed and bring the vehicle to a stop. Have the
Wear indicators are distributed around the cir‐
wheels and tyres checked. To do so, carefully
cumference of the tyre. These wear indicators
drive to a Service Partner of the manufacturer
have the legally prescribed minimum height of
or another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐
1.6 mm, 0.06 in.
cialist workshop. If necessary, have the vehicle
The positions of the wear indicators are identi‐ towed or transported there. Do not repair dam‐
fied on the tyre sidewall by TWI, Tread Wear In‐ aged tyres. Have them replaced.
dicator.
WARNING
Tyres can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, for example kerbs or damaged road
surfaces, at high speed. Larger wheels have a
smaller tyre cross-section. The smaller the tyre
329
cross-section, the higher the risk of tyre dam‐ workshop about the approved wheels and tyres
age. There is a risk of accident and material for the vehicle and the special equipment.
damage. If possible, drive around obstacles or
drive over them slowly and carefully. Safety notes
WARNING
Tyre age Wheels and tyres that are not suitable for the
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. For ex‐
Recommendation ample they could come into contact with the
bodywork on account of their dimensional tol‐
Irrespective of the tyre tread depth, change tyres
erances, despite having the same nominal size.
after 6 years at the latest.
There is a risk of accident. The manufacturer of
the vehicle recommends using wheels and
Date of manufacture tyres that have been rated as suitable for the
The date of manufacture of the tyre is indicated vehicle concerned.
on the tyre sidewall.
Designation Date of manufacture
WARNING
DOT … 3821 38th week of 2021
Mounted steel wheels can lead to technical
problems, for example wheel bolts may work
loose and brake discs may be damaged. There
Replacement of wheels and is a risk of accident. Do not install steel wheels.
tyres
WARNING
Fitting and balancing
Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations will im‐
Have the wheel fitted and balanced by a Service
pair the vehicle's driving characteristics and a
variety of system functions, for example the
Anti-lock Braking System ABS or Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control. There is a risk of accident. To
Permissible wheels and tyres maintain good vehicle handling, always fit tyres
of the same make and tread pattern to all
General wheels. The manufacturer of the vehicle rec‐
The following are recommended and approved ommends using wheels and tyres that have
by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the ap‐ been rated as suitable for the vehicle type con‐
proved wheels and tyres per vehicle type and cerned. After a tyre has been damaged, refit
special equipment: the same wheel/tyre combination as the origi‐
▷ Wheel and tyre combinations. nal.
▷ Rim designs.
▷ Tyre sizes.
▷ Tyre makes.
You can ask a manufacturer Service Partner or
another qualified Service Partner or specialist
330
Recommended makes of tyre Winter tyres
General
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the

manufacturer of the vehicle for each tyre size.
The tyre brands can be identified by a star on the Winter tyres are recommended if driving in winter
tyre sidewall. conditions.
The winter tyres can be identified by the moun‐
New tyres tain and snowflake icon, as well as the M+S
marking on the tyre sidewall.
Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do
not achieve their full road grip immediately. Although tyres known as all-season tyres with M
Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles. +S marking but without a mountain and snow‐
flake icon have better winter characteristics than
Retreaded tyres summer tyres, they do not normally match the
performance of winter tyres.
WARNING Maximum speed of winter tyres

Retreaded tyres may have different tyre car‐ If the vehicle is capable of maximum speed
casses. Their durability may be reduced due to higher than the speed permitted for the winter
their advanced age. There is a risk of accident. tyres, a sign stating the permitted maximum
Do not use retreaded tyres. speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in
the driver's field of view. The sign is available
The vehicle manufacturer advises against the from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
use of retreaded tyres. other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
If winter tyres are fitted, observe and do not ex‐
ceed the relevant permitted maximum speed.
Replacing run-flat tyres

When changing from run-flat tyres to standard
tyres, make sure that a emergency spare wheel
or a flat tyre kit is available in the vehicle. Addi‐
tional information is available from a Service Part‐
331
Wheel change between axles General

The wheels are fitted with tyres which are self-
WARNING supporting to a limited degree. They may also
have special rims.
Rotating wheels between axles on vehicles with
differently sized tyres or rims on the front and The reinforced sidewall means that the tyre
rear may cause tyre damage and damage to keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree, even if tyre
the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do not inflation pressure has been lost.
rotate wheels between axles on vehicles with Observe the notes on continuing driving with a
differently sized tyres or rims on the front and flat tyre.
rear.
Safety notes
Depending on the individual operating condi‐
tions, the tyre tread wears differently on the front
and rear wheels. To achieve even wear, the tyres WARNING
can be swapped in pairs between the axles. Ad‐ A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation
ditional information is available from a Service pressure will change the vehicle's handling
Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified characteristics, for example there may be re‐
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. After duced directional stability when braking, longer
swapping the wheels, check the tyre inflation braking distances and different self-steering
pressure and adjust if necessary. characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive
with care and do not exceed a speed of
Storing tyres 80 km/h, 50 mph.
Tyre inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tyre inflation pres‐ WARNING
sure indicated on the tyre sidewall. Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in
heavy trailers starting to slalom. There is a risk
Storage of accident or material damage. When driving
▷ Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and dark with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the
place when not in use. speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to
snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐
▷ Protect the tyres against contamination from sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐
oil, grease and solvents. ble.
▷ Do not leave tyres in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from the wheels or tyres.
Run-flat tyres
Principle
In the event of a complete tyre pressure loss,
run-flat tyres enable you to continue driving, with
certain restrictions.
332
Identification General
▷ To allow the driver to continue driving, tyre
sealant is pumped into the tyres which seals
the damage from the inside when it hardens.
▷ Please observe the notes on using the tyre
repair kit which are on the compressor and
the tyre sealant bottle.
▷ The use of the tyre repair set can be ineffec‐
tive in the event of tyre damage from a size of
approx. 4 mm, approx. 0.16 in.
The tyres are identified by Runflat System Com‐ ▷ Contact a Service Partner of the manufac‐
ponent RSC on the tyre sidewall. turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
specialist workshop if you are unable to put
the tyre back in operation.
Remedying flat tyre ▷ Foreign bodies that have penetrated the tyre
should remain inside the tyre. Only remove
Safety measures foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tyre.
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far
away from moving traffic as possible. ▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the tyre
sealant bottle and attach to the steering
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights. wheel.
▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐ ▷ Using tyre sealant can damage the wheel
cle rolling away. electronics. In this case, have the electronics
▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the replaced at the next opportunity.
wheels in the straight-ahead position. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ tyre inflation pressure.
hicle and guide them out of the danger area,
for example behind the crash barrier. Overview
▷ Where required, set up the warning triangle
an appropriate distance away. Storage
Storage for the tyre repair set is provided in the
storage under the luggage compartment floor.
Tyre repair kit
Principle
With the tyre repair kit, minor tyre damage can
be quickly sealed to allow the driver to continue
driving.
333
Tyre sealant bottle ▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and guide them out of the danger area,
for example behind the crash barrier.
▷ Where required, set up the warning triangle
an appropriate distance away.
Filling with tyre sealant
▷ Tyre sealant bottle, arrow 1. Safety note

▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.
Note the use-by date on the tyre sealant bottle. NOTE
The compressor can overheat if operated for
too long. There is a risk of material damage. Do
Compressor
not let the compressor run for longer than
10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the tyre sealant bottle.
1 To unlock tyre sealant bottle

2 Tyre sealant bottle holder
3 Tyre inflation pressure indicator
4 Button for reducing the tyre inflation pressure
5 On/Off button
2. Pull filler hose completely out of the cover of
6 Compressor
the tyre sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose.
7 Plug/cable for socket
8 Connecting hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far
away from moving traffic as possible.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle rolling away.
334
3. Push the tyre sealant bottle into the holder on 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the compressor housing, until it audibly en‐ plug into the socket inside the vehicle interior.
gages.
6. Switch on the compressor with standby state

4. Screw the filler hose of the tyre sealant bottle or drive-ready state switched on.
onto the tyre valve of the faulty wheel.
Let the compressor run for a maximum of 10 mi‐

nutes to fill the tyre with sealant and achieve a
tyre inflation pressure of approximately 2.0 bar.
The tyre inflation pressure may rise to approxi‐
mately 5 bar during the filling process of the tyre
sealant. Do not switch off the compressor during
this step.
Checking and adjusting the tyre

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off compressor.
2. Read off the tyre inflation pressure as shown
on the tyre pressure indicator.
To be able to continue the journey, a tyre infla‐
tion pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
335
Removing and storing the tyre sealant If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
bottle not reached, contact a Service Partner of the
manufacturer or a qualified Service Partner or
1. Unscrew the filler hose of the tyre sealant
a specialist workshop.
bottle from the tyre valve.
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
2. Press the red unlocking device.
reached, see Minimum tyre inflation pressure
3. Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the com‐ is reached.
pressor.
6. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐
4. Pack and store the tyre sealant bottle to avoid pressor from the tyre valve.
soiling the luggage compartment.
7. Remove the plug from the socket inside the
vehicle interior.
Minimum tyre inflation pressure is not
reached 8. Stow the tyre repair kit in the vehicle.

Minimum tyre inflation pressure is
vehicle interior.
reached
2. Drive forwards and backwards by 10 m,
1. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐
400 inches, to distribute the tyre sealant in
pressor from the tyre valve.
the tyre.
3. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐
vehicle interior.
sor directly onto the tyre valve.
3. Stow the tyre repair kit in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive for approximately
10 km/5 mi to evenly distribute the tyre seal‐
ant in the tyre.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h/50 mph.
If possible, do not drive slower than
20 km/h/12 mph.
Adjusting
4. Insert the plug into the socket inside the vehi‐ 1. Stop in a suitable area.
cle interior.
2. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tyre valve.
5. With standby or drive-ready state turned on,

turn on the compressor and let it run for a
maximum of 10 minutes.
336
3. Insert the plug into the socket inside the vehi‐

cle interior.
Snow chains
Safety notes
WARNING
If snow chains are fitted to unsuitable tyres, the
snow chains can come into contact with parts
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident or ma‐
terial damage. Only fit snow chains on tyres
which have been approved by the manufacturer
4. Correct the tyre inflation pressure to at least as being suitable for snow chains.
2.0 bar:
▷ Increase tyre pressure: with standby or
drive-ready state turned on, turn on the WARNING
compressor and let it run for a maximum Insufficiently tensioned snow chains can dam‐
of 10 minutes. age tyres and vehicle components. There is a
▷ To reduce tyre inflation pressure: press risk of accident or material damage. Ensure that
the button on the compressor. snow chains are always adequately tensioned.
5. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐ Re-tension them if necessary in accordance
pressor from the tyre valve. with the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
vehicle interior.
7. Stow the tyre repair kit in the vehicle. Fine-link snow chains
The vehicle manufacturer recommends using
Resuming a journey fine-link snow chains. Certain fine-link snow
Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed of chains have been tested, found safe for use in
80 km/h, 50 mph. traffic and rated as suitable by the manufacturer
Reinitialise the flat tyre monitor RPA. of the vehicle.
Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor. Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
Have the punctured tyre and the tyre sealant turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
bottle of the tyre repair kit replaced as soon as specialist workshop.
possible.
For further information: Use
▷ Flat tyre monitor RPA, see page 345. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 338. with the tyres of the following wheel/tyre sizes:
Tyre size Wheel size Rim offset (IS)
225/55 R17 7.5J x 17 30
245/45 R18 8.5J x 18 36
337
The information on the wheel size and rim offset rent tyre inflation pressures are then accepted as
is located on the inside of the wheel. the nominal pressures.
The list can also include wheel/tyre sizes that are When operating the system, please also comply
only suitable for certain models. with the information and notes in the chapter on
Information about approved wheels and tyres for tyre inflation pressure.
the vehicle can be requested from one of the For further information:
manufacturer's Service Partners or another quali‐ Tyre inflation pressure, see page 327.
fied Service Partner or specialist workshop.
Observe the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ Safety note
tions.
Do not initialise the flat tyre monitor (RPA) with
WARNING
snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐
ings. The display showing the specified tyre inflation
pressures does not replace the tyre inflation
Do not reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor with
pressure information on the vehicle. If incorrect
snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐
data has been entered into the tyre settings,
ings.
the specified tyre inflation pressures will also be
When driving with snow chains fitted, activate incorrect. As a result, reliable signalling of a loss
Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly as re‐ of tyre inflation pressure can no longer be guar‐
quired in order to optimise drive. anteed. There is a risk of injury and material
damage. Make sure that the tyre sizes of the
Maximum speed with snow chains fitted tyres are displayed correctly and that they
When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed match the specifications on the tyres and in the
50 km/h, 30 mph. tyre inflation pressure information.
Tyre Pressure Monitor Operating requirements

The following requirements must be met for the
system, otherwise reliable message of a tyre
Principle
pressure loss is not ensured:
The Tyre Pressure Monitor monitors the tyre
▷ After each tyre or wheel change, the system
pressure and issues a warning if the tyre pres‐
has detected the fitted tyres, updated the rel‐
sure has dropped.
evant information and, after a short journey,
shown it on the control display.
General
If the system does not detect the tyres auto‐
Sensors in the tyre valves measure the tyre infla‐ matically, enter the specifications for the fit‐
tion pressure and tyre air temperature. ted tyres in the tyre settings.
Depending on the tyres detected or entered, the ▷ The Tyre Pressure Monitor only becomes ac‐
system displays the specified nominal pressures tive after driving for several minutes:
on the control display and compares them to the
current tyre inflation pressures. ▷ After tyre/wheel change.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyres which are not lis‐ ▷ After a reset, For tyres with special appro‐
ted in the tyre inflation pressure information on val.
the vehicle, for example tyres with special appro‐ ▷ After changing the tyre setting.
val, the system must be actively reset. The cur‐
338
▷ For tyres with special approval: See the Performing a reset section for how to
▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the sys‐ proceed.
tem must be reset once the tyre inflation 12. Select the load status of the vehicle once tyre
pressure is correct. size has been selected.
▷ A reset must be carried out after the tyre 13. "Save tyre settings"
inflation pressure has been adjusted to a The measurement of the current tyre inflation
new value. pressure is started. The progress of the meas‐
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics. urement is shown.
Tyre settings Status display
General Current status

If the system does not detect the tyres automati‐ The status of the system, for example whether
cally, the specifications for the fitted tyres can be the system is active, can be shown on the con‐
entered in the tyre settings. trol display.
The tyre sizes of the fitted tyres can be found in 1. "MENU"
the tyre inflation pressure information on the ve‐
2. "Vehicle apps"
hicle or directly on the tyres.
3. "Live Vehicle"
The tyre data does not have to be re-entered if
the tyre inflation pressure is corrected. 4. "Content"
For summer and winter tyres, the tyre data last 5. "Vehicle status"
entered for each type is saved. This means that 6. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
the settings can be selected again after a tyre or The current status is displayed.
wheel change.
Current tyre inflation pressure
Adjusting the settings
The current tyre inflation pressure is displayed
1. "MENU" for each tyre.
2. "Vehicle apps" The current tyre inflation pressures can vary de‐
3. "Live Vehicle" pending on vehicle operation or outside temper‐
4. "Content" ature.
5. "Vehicle status"
Current tyre air temperature
6. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
Depending on the model, the current tyre air
7. "Tyre settings" temperatures are shown.
8. "Tyre selection" The current tyre air temperatures can change as
9. "Manual" a result of vehicle operation or the outside tem‐
10. "Tyre type" perature.
11. Select the tyre type mounted on the rear axle.
Nominal pressure
For tyres with special approval:
The nominal pressure for the tyres on the front
"Other tyres" and rear axle is displayed.
339
The stated nominal pressure takes account of ▷ Malfunction.

the temperature effects caused by vehicle oper‐ ▷ The tyre inflation pressure is being measured,
ation and the outside temperature. The appropri‐ after confirmation of the tyre settings.
ate nominal pressure is always displayed irre‐
▷ For tyres with special approval: a system re‐
spective of the weather conditions, tyre air
set is being performed.
temperatures and length of journey.
The displayed nominal pressure may vary and
For tyres with special approval:
differ from the value stated in the tyre inflation
pressure information on the body pillar of the performing a reset
driver's door. The tyre inflation pressure can thus 1. "MENU"
be corrected to the value of the displayed nomi‐ 2. "Vehicle apps"
nal pressures.
3. "Live Vehicle"
The nominal pressure is adjusted immediately if
4. "Content"
the load status is changed in the tyre settings.
5. "Vehicle status"
Tyre statuses 6. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
7. Make sure that the tyre settings are correct.
General Tyre settings, see page 339.
The status of the system and tyres is indicated 8. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive
by the wheel colour and a message on the con‐ off.
trol display.
9. Reset the tyre inflation pressure: "Perform
Existing messages may not be deleted if the reset"
nominal pressure is not reached when the tyre
10. Drive off.
inflation pressure is corrected.
The wheels are shown grey and the following ap‐
All wheels green pears on the display: "Resetting tyre
pressure…".
▷ The system is active and refers to the nomi‐
nal pressures for the warning. After driving for several minutes, the set tyre in‐
flation pressures are accepted as the specified
▷ For tyres with special approval: the system is
tyre inflation pressures. The reset is completed
active and is using the tyre inflation pressures
automatically during the journey.
saved during the last reset for the warning.
If the reset was successful, the wheels are
One to four wheels yellow shown in green on the control display and the
following appears: "Reset successful."
There is a flat tyre or major tyre pressure loss in
the tyres shown. You can interrupt your journey at any time. The
reset resumes automatically when you continue
driving.
Wheels grey
Tyre pressure losses might not be detected.
Messages: for tyres without special
Possible causes: approval
General
When a low tyre pressure is indicated, the Dy‐
namic Stability Control may be turned on.
340
Safety note Action

1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of
WARNING 130 km/h, 80 mph.
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no 2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all
istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres four tyres and correct if necessary.
with run-flat properties allow a limited level of
stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ If there is a significant tyre pressure loss
cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the Message
notes on run-flat tyres and continuing a journey A yellow warning light is illuminated in
with these tyres. the instrument cluster.
In addition, an icon indicating which tyre is affec‐

If a tyre inflation pressure check is ted is shown in a Check Control message on the
required control display.
Icon Possible cause
Message
An icon with a Check Control message is shown There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre
on the control display. pressure loss.
Icon Possible cause

Action
The tyre was not inflated properly, for
example insufficient air was added or 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐
there was a natural, even tyre pressure hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐
loss. ing manoeuvres.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
Action standard tyres or run-flat tyres.
Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust as The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle
necessary. with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
Run-flat tyres, see page 332.
If the tyre inflation pressure is too low 3. Follow the description of what to do when the
vehicle gets a flat tyre.
Message
What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see
A yellow warning light is illuminated in page 343.
Messages: for tyres with special
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐
sage is shown on the control display.
approval
Icon Possible cause General
There has been a tyre pressure loss. When a low tyre pressure is indicated, the Dy‐
namic Stability Control may be turned on.
341
Safety note If the tyre inflation pressure is too low
Message
WARNING
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no A yellow warning light is illuminated in
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ the instrument cluster.
istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐
stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐
cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is Icon Possible cause
fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the
There has been a tyre pressure loss.
notes on run-flat tyres and continuing a journey
with these tyres. No reset has been performed on the
system. System warning is based on
the tyre inflation pressures saved dur‐
If a tyre inflation pressure check is ing the last reset.
required
Action
Message
1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of
An icon with a Check Control message is shown 130 km/h, 80 mph.
on the control display.
2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling
Icon Possible cause station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all
four tyres and correct if necessary.
The tyre was not inflated properly, for
3. Perform a system reset.
example insufficient air was added.
The system has detected a wheel
If there is a significant tyre pressure loss
change, but no reset has been per‐
formed.
Message
The tyre inflation pressure has drop‐
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
ped compared to the last reset.
No reset has been performed on the
system. System warning is based on In addition, an icon indicating which tyre is affec‐
the tyre inflation pressures saved ted is shown in a Check Control message on the
during the last reset. control display.
Icon Possible cause
Action
1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre
as necessary. pressure loss.
2. Perform a system reset. No reset has been performed on the
system. System warning is based on
the tyre inflation pressures saved dur‐
ing the last reset.
342
Action Run-flat tyres

1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐
hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐ Safety notes
ing manoeuvres.
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with WARNING
standard tyres or run-flat tyres. A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle pressure will change the vehicle's handling
with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. characteristics, for example there may be re‐
Run-flat tyres, see page 332. duced directional stability when braking, longer
braking distances and different self-steering
3. Follow the description of what to do when the
characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive
vehicle gets a flat tyre.
with care and do not exceed a speed of
What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see 80 km/h, 50 mph.
page 343.
What to do in the event of a flat tyre WARNING

Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in
Standard tyres
1. Identify the damaged tyre. of accident or material damage. When driving
Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the
tyres, for example using the tyre inflation speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to
pressure indicator of a tyre repair kit. snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐
For tyres with special approval: if all four tyres sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐
are inflated to the correct tyre inflation pres‐ ble.
sures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor might not
have been reset. Perform a reset.
Maximum speed
If no tyre damage can be found, contact a
If a tyre is damaged you can continue driving, but
Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h,
50 mph.
workshop.
2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a tyre Continuing driving with a flat tyre
repair kit or by changing the wheel.
Observe the following if you continue driving with
The use of tyre sealant, for example a flat tyre kit, a flat tyre:
can damage the wheel electronics. Have the
electronics replaced at the next opportunity. 1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering
manoeuvres.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
3. At the next opportunity, check the tyre infla‐
tion pressure in all four tyres.
Possible driving distance with a deflated tyre

The possible driving distance varies depending
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected
343
to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ After a temperature-related warning, the nominal
face, outside temperature. The driving distance pressures are displayed again on the control dis‐
may be shorter but can be increased if a careful play after driving a short distance.
driving style is adopted.
With moderate loads and low stress, it is possible Sudden tyre pressure loss
to travel up to 80 km, 50 miles. No warning can be given in the event of extreme,
sudden tyre damages caused by external factors.
Driving properties with damaged tyres
Driving with damaged tyres changes the vehi‐ Reset not carried out
cle's handling characteristics and may lead to sit‐ Tyres with special approval: the system will not
uations such as the following: function correctly if a reset has not been carried
▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. out, for example, a flat tyre may be reported even
▷ Longer stopping distances. though the tyre pressure is correct.
▷ Different self-steering properties.

Malfunction
Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or
driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐ Message
holes.
The yellow warning light flashes and then
Final tyre failure illuminates continuously. A Check Con‐
trol message is shown. Tyre pressure
Vibration or loud noises during the journey may
losses may not be detected.
be an indication that the tyre has finally failed.
Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of
the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐ Action
dent. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐
Do not continue driving, but instead contact a ted: have the wheels checked if necessary.
Service Partner of the manufacturer or another ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ same radio frequency: the system is auto‐
shop. matically reactivated upon leaving the field of
interference.
System limits ▷ For tyres with special approval: the system
was unable to complete the reset. Perform a
Temperature system reset again.
The tyre inflation pressure depends on the tem‐ ▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor malfunction: have the
perature of the tyre. system checked by a Service Partner of the
The tyre inflation pressure increases as the tyre manufacturer or another qualified Service
air temperature increases, for example while driv‐ Partner or specialist workshop.
ing or when exposed to sunlight.
The tyre inflation pressure decreases when the
tyre air temperature drops.
Due to the system's inherent warning thresholds,
therefore, this behaviour may cause a warning to
be triggered when significant temperature drops
occur.
344
Flat tyre monitor RPA Initialisation required

An initialisation must be performed in the
Principle
▷ After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure.
The flat tyre monitor detects a tyre pressure loss
while driving and issues a warning if the tyre ▷ After tyre/wheel change.
pressure has dropped.
Initialisation
General Initialisation saves the set tyre inflation pressures
The system identifies a tyre pressure loss by as reference values for subsequent detection of
comparing the rotational speeds of the individual a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by confirming
wheels during the journey. the correct tyre inflation pressures.
A tyre pressure loss changes the diameter, and Do not initialise the system if driving with snow
with it the rotational speed, of the corresponding chains fitted.
wheel. The discrepancy is detected and reported 1. "MENU"
as a flat tyre.
2. "Vehicle apps"
The system does not measure the tyre inflation
pressure as such. 3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
Operating requirements 5. "Vehicle status"
The following requirements must be met for the 6. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
system, otherwise reliable message of a tyre 7. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive
pressure loss is not ensured: off.
▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the system 8. Start the initialisation: "Perform reset"
must be initialised once the tyre inflation
9. Drive off.
pressure is correct.
Initialisation is completed during the journey
▷ The system must be initialised after the tyre
which can be interrupted at any time.
inflation pressure is adjusted to a new value.
Initialisation resumes automatically when you
Status display continue driving.
It is possible to display the current status of the

flat tyre monitor RPA, for example to check
Messages
whether the RPA is active.
General
1. "MENU" When a flat tyre is indicated, the Dynamic Stabil‐
2. "Vehicle apps" ity Control is turned on, if needed.
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Vehicle status"
6. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
The status is displayed.
345
Safety note To do this, check the tyre inflation pressure in

all four tyres, for example using the tyre infla‐
tion pressure indicator of a tyre repair kit.
WARNING
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no inflation pressures, the flat tyre monitor (RPA)
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ might not have been initialised. In this case
istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres initialise the system.
stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ If no tyre damage can be found, contact a
cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
notes on run-flat tyres and continuing a journey workshop.
with these tyres. 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a tyre
repair kit or by changing the wheel.
Flat tyre message Run-flat tyres

A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster. Safety notes
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐ WARNING

A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre inflation
Icon Possible cause pressure will change the vehicle's handling
characteristics, for example there may be re‐
There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre
duced directional stability when braking, longer
pressure loss.
braking distances and different self-steering
characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Drive
Action with care and do not exceed a speed of
80 km/h, 50 mph.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐
hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐
ing manoeuvres.
WARNING
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
standard tyres or run-flat tyres. Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can result in
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle
of accident or material damage. When driving
with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the
Run-flat tyres, see page 332. speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts to
3. Follow the description of what to do when the snake, brake immediately and make the neces‐
vehicle gets a flat tyre. sary steering corrections as carefully as possi‐
ble.
What to do in the event of a flat tyre
Maximum speed
Standard tyres
If a tyre is damaged you can continue driving, but
1. Identify the damaged tyre.
do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h,
50 mph.
346
Continuing driving with a flat tyre qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
Observe the following if you continue driving with shop.
a flat tyre:
System limits
1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering
manoeuvres. In the following situations, the system could be
slow to respond or could work incorrectly:
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
▷ A natural, even tyre pressure loss in all four
3. At the next opportunity, check the tyre infla‐ tyres that occurs over time will not be detec‐
tion pressure in all four tyres. ted. Therefore check the tyre inflation pres‐
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre sure at regular intervals.
inflation pressures, the flat tyre monitor might ▷ No warning can be given in the event of sud‐
not have been initialised. In this case initialise den tyre damages caused by external factors.
the system.
▷ The system has not been initialised.
Possible driving distance with a deflated tyre ▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery
The possible driving distance varies depending roads.
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected ▷ Dynamic driving style: drive wheels slipping,
to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ high lateral acceleration.
face, outside temperature. The driving distance ▷ When driving with snow chains.
may be shorter but can be increased if a careful
driving style is adopted.
With moderate loads and low stress, it is possible Wheel change
to travel up to 80 km, 50 miles.
General
Driving properties with damaged tyres
For run-flat tyres or when using a tyre repair kit, it
Driving with damaged tyres changes the vehi‐ is not always necessary to change a wheel im‐
cle's handling characteristics and may lead to sit‐ mediately if tyre inflation pressure is lost due to a
uations such as the following: flat tyre.
▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. If required, the tools for wheel change are avail‐
▷ Longer stopping distances. able as optional accessories from a Service Part‐
▷ Different self-steering properties. ner of the manufacturer, another qualified Serv‐
ice Partner or a specialist workshop.
Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or
driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐
holes. Safety notes
Final tyre failure WARNING

Vibration or loud noises during the journey may The jack is only intended for raising the vehicle
be an indication that the tyre has finally failed. briefly during a wheel change. Even if the safety
Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of measures are complied with, there is a risk of
the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐ the raised vehicle falling over due to the jack
dent. slipping. There is a danger of injury or danger to
Do not continue driving, but instead contact a life. If the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not
347
lie underneath the vehicle and do not switch on

drive-ready state. WARNING
If the jack has not been guided into the jacking
point provided, the vehicle might be damaged
WARNING when the jack is extended, or the jack could
Supports such as wooden blocks under the slip. There is a risk of injury or material damage.
jack can prevent it from achieving its load ca‐ When extending, make sure that the jack is gui‐
pacity due to the restricted height. The load ca‐ ded into the jacking point adjacent to the wheel
pacity of the wooden blocks may be exceeded, arch.
causing the vehicle to tip over. There is a dan‐
ger of injury or danger to life. Do not place sup‐
ports under the jack. WARNING
A vehicle raised with a jack can fall from the
jack if lateral forces are applied. There is a risk
WARNING of injury and material damage. If the vehicle is
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is raised, do not apply any lateral forces to the ve‐
provided in order to perform a wheel change in hicle or pull the vehicle with sudden move‐
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ ments. Have any wheel that is jammed re‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing moved by a Service Partner of the
from summer to winter tyres. Using the jack manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐
frequently may cause it to become jammed or ner or a specialist workshop.
damaged. There is a risk of injury and material
damage. Only use the jack to change an emer‐
gency wheel or a spare wheel when the vehicle WARNING
gets a flat tyre. The jack can damage the base of the vehicle if
operated incorrectly, thereby exposing high-
voltage components. There is a risk of injury or
WARNING material damage. When extending, make sure
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example that the jack is guided into the jacking point ad‐
snow, ice, tiles or similar, the jack may slip. jacent to the wheel arch. Ensure that no parts
There is a danger of injury. Perform the wheel of the underbody trim are damaged.
change on a level, firm and non-slip surface if at
all possible.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
away
WARNING
General
The jack is only optimised for raising the vehi‐
cle and for use with the jacking points on the The vehicle manufacturer recommends that the
vehicle. There is a danger of injury. Do not lift vehicle should additionally be protected against
another vehicle or other items with the jack. rolling away during a wheel change.
348
On a level surface
▷ Locking wheel bolt, arrow 1.
Place chocks or other suitable objects in front of ▷ Adapter, arrow 2.

and behind the wheel diagonally opposite to the
one being changed. Unscrewing
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt.
On a slight downhill gradient 2. Unscrew the locking wheel bolt.
3. After unscrewing the wheel stud, remove the
adapter again.
Screwing on
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the
locking wheel bolt.
2. Screw on the locking wheel bolt. The tighten‐
ing torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft.
If it is necessary to change a wheel on a slight
3. After screwing on the wheel bolt, remove the
downhill gradient, place chocks and other suita‐
adapter again and stow it.
ble objects, for example stones, under the
wheels of the front and rear axles against the di‐
rection of roll. Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on firm and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
Locking wheel bolts
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Principle ▷ Apply the parking brake.
The locking wheel bolts have a special coding. ▷ Engage a gear or select selector lever posi‐
The bolts can only be released with the adapter tion P.
that matches the coding. ▷ As soon as the traffic flow permits, have all
vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and
Overview guide them out of the danger area, for exam‐
The adapter of the locking wheel bolts can be ple behind the crash barrier.
found in the on-board tool kit or in an oddments ▷ Depending on the equipment, take the tools
tray in the on-board tool kit. for changing wheels and, if necessary, the
emergency spare wheel out of the vehicle.
349
▷ If applicable, set up warning triangle or flash‐ 1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and
ing light at the correct distance. grasp the jack crank or lever with your other
▷ Additionally protect the vehicle against rolling hand, arrow 2.
away.
▷ Undo the wheel bolts by half a turn.
Jacking points
2. Guide the jack into the rectangular recess of

the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
The jacking points are located in the marked po‐

sitions.
Raising vehicle
WARNING
Your hands or fingers could get trapped when
using the jack. There is a danger of injury. Keep 3. Turn the jack crank or lever clockwise to ex‐
your hands in the described position when us‐ tend the jack.
ing the jack, and do not change this position.
4. Remove your hand from the jack as soon as

the jack is under load and continue to turn
the jack crank or lever with one hand.
350
5. Make sure that the base of the vehicle jack is 4. Tighten the remaining wheel bolts until fin‐
extended vertically and at right angles under‐ ger-tight and then tighten all the wheel bolts
neath the jacking point. crosswise.
5. Turn the jack crank handle anticlockwise to
retract the jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After wheel change

1. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the luggage com‐
partment, if necessary.
6. Make sure that the base of the jack is vertical
and at right angles below the jacking point af‐ 3. Check tyre inflation pressure at the next op‐
ter extension. portunity and correct as necessary.
4. Re-initialise the flat tyre monitor or reset the
Tyre Pressure Monitor.
5. Check the tight fit of the wheel bolts using a
calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest Service Partner of the
manufacturer or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop to have the
damaged tyre replaced.
7. Raise by cranking until the jack is supported

on the ground with its entire surface and the
wheel in question is a maximum of 3 cm,
1.2 inches off the ground.
Fitting a wheel
No more than one emergency spare wheel may
be fitted.
1. Unscrew the wheel bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put on the new wheel or emergency spare
wheel and tighten at least two wheel bolts
crosswise until finger-tight.
If installing non-original light alloy wheels not
supplied by the manufacturer, the wheel bolts
belonging to the wheels may also have to be
used.
351
MOBILITY Under the bonnet
Under the bonnet
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Vehicle identification number

2 Jump start, positive battery terminal 5 Jump start, negative battery terminal
3 Coolant
Bonnet
WARNING
Safety notes opening and closing the bonnet. There is a
danger of injury. When opening and closing,
WARNING make sure that the area of movement of the
If the bonnet is not correctly locked, it can bonnet is kept clear.
come open during the journey and impair visi‐
bility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immedi‐
ately and close the bonnet correctly. WARNING
Work performed incorrectly under the bonnet
can damage components and lead to a safety
risk. There is a risk of accident or material dam‐
age. Have work under the bonnet carried out by
a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
352
Under the bonnet MOBILITY
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist Opening bonnet

workshop.
1. Pull the lever, arrow 1. The bonnet is un‐
locked.
WARNING
The front flap has protruding parts on the in‐
side, for example locking hooks. There is a dan‐
ger of injury. When the front flap is open, watch
out for protruding parts and keep these areas
clear.
WARNING 2. After releasing the lever, pull the lever again,

The front flap contains moving components. arrow 2.
Certain components under the front flap can The bonnet can be opened.
also move when the vehicle is switched off, for
example the radiator fan. There is a danger of 3. Watch out for any protruding parts on the
injury. Do not reach into an area where there bonnet.
are moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and
hair away from moving parts. Closing the bonnet
NOTE
Wipers which are folded away from the wind‐
screen can become trapped if the front flap is
opened. There is a risk of material damage. Be‐
fore opening the bonnet, make sure that the
wipers are fitted with wiper blades and are in
contact with the windscreen.
Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of ap‐
proximately 50 cm, approx. 20 in.
NOTE The bonnet must engage on both sides.
When closing, the front flap must lock into
place on both sides. Applying additional pres‐
sure can damage the front flap. There is a risk
of material damage. Open the front flap again
and close it firmly. Avoid applying additional
pressure.
353
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Operating fluids
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes equipment, systems and Additives are harmful to health and using the
functions which are offered or will be offered on wrong additives can damage the drivetrain.
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ There is a danger of injury and material dam‐
ded in the vehicle in question. age. Do not allow additives to come into con‐
tact with clothing, skin or eyes, and do not
swallow them. Only use suitable additives.
Coolant level
Coolant
General
General The coolant tank is located on the right side un‐
Coolant is a mixture of water and coolant addi‐ der the bonnet.
tive. On factory delivery, the coolant may be overfilled
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ in the coolant tank. The normal level of the cool‐
ble for the vehicle. The vehicle manufacturer rec‐ ant level is achieved by prolonging the operating
ommends using coolant with the BMW LC-18 time.
specification. Do not mix additives of different The target coolant level is indicated by means of
colours. Comply with the 50:50 mixing ratio of the max. mark in the coolant filler neck of the
water to additive. Information regarding suitable coolant tank.
additives is available from a Service Partner of
Have coolant topped up by a Service Partner of
Partner or specialist workshop.
Safety notes
Overview, see page 352.
WARNING
Checking the coolant level
If the cooling system is opened when the drive‐
1. Allow the drivetrain to cool down.
train is hot, coolant can escape and cause
scalding. There is a danger of injury. Only open 2. Open the bonnet.
the cooling system when the drivetrain has Opening, see page 353.
cooled down.
354
Operating fluids MOBILITY
3. Open the cover under the bonnet. Safety notes
WARNING
Some antifreezes can contain toxic substances,
and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and in‐
jury. Please comply with the instructions on the
containers. Keep antifreezes away from sour‐
ces of combustion. Do not pour operating fluids
into other bottles. Keep operating fluids out of
the reach of children.
4. Turn cap on coolant expansion tank slightly
anticlockwise to allow the excess pressure to
escape.
NOTE
5. Open cap on coolant expansion tank.
Silicone additives mixed with the washer fluid
6. The coolant level is correct if it is just below for their water beading effect on the windows
the max. mark in the filler neck. may damage the washer system. There is a risk
of material damage. Do not add silicone addi‐
tives to the washer fluid.
NOTE
Mixing different screenwash concentrates or
antifreezes may damage the washer system.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not mix
different screenwash concentrates or antifree‐
7. Tighten cap. zes. Please comply with the instructions and
mixing ratios stated on the containers.
Disposal
When disposing of coolant and coolant Overview
additives, comply with the relevant envi‐
ronmental protection regulations.
Washer fluid
General
All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank.
Use a mixture of tap water and screenwash con‐
centrate for the window washer system, if neces‐ The reservoir for the washer fluid is located un‐
sary with the antifreeze additive. der the bonnet.
Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre,

1.7 Imp. pints.
355
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Malfunction
Using undiluted screenwash concentrate or anti‐
freeze based on alcohol may result in false read‐
ings at low temperatures below -15 ℃/+5 ℉.
356
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Condition Based Service CBS
Principle
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ Condition Based Service (CBS) determines the
ded in the vehicle in question. maintenance requirement using sensors and
special algorithms which monitor the conditions
in which the vehicle is used.
The system therefore allows the scope of the
maintenance work to be adapted to the individual
usage profile.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system indicates what mainte‐
General
nance measures are required and thereby assists Information on service requirements can be
in maintaining the road safety and operational shown on the control display.
safety of the vehicle. For further information:
The exact work required and the maintenance in‐ Service requirements, see page 166.
tervals may vary depending on the national-mar‐
ket version. Labour, spare parts, operating mate‐ Service data in the vehicle key
rials and wear materials are charged separately.
Information on maintenance requirement is con‐
tinuously stored in the vehicle key. The Service
Partner can read out this data and suggest a pro‐
gramme of maintenance for your vehicle.
Safety note It is therefore important to give the service advi‐

sor the vehicle key that was last used to drive the
vehicle.
WARNING
An electric shock can occur if the work is not Stationary periods
carried out correctly, in particular maintenance Stationary periods when the vehicle is out of use
and repair of the high-voltage system. There is with its vehicle battery disconnected are not
a danger of injury, fire or danger to life. Only taken into account.
have work on the vehicle, particularly mainte‐
In such cases, have any time-dependent mainte‐
nance, repair and modifications, carried out by a
nance procedures, for example those concerning
the brake fluid and the microfilter/active carbon
filter, updated by a Service Partner of the manu‐
shop.
facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
357
MOBILITY Maintenance
Service history For Australia: maintenance

No maintenance work other than normal mainte‐
Maintenance and repairs
nance is required to keep the emission levels of
Have maintenance and repairs carried out by a your vehicle within the design limits.
shop. OBD diagnostic socket
Entries
General
The maintenance work carried out is entered in
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the maintenance records and the vehicle data.
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
As with a service booklet, the entries provide evi‐
move any devices connected to the OBD socket
dence of regular maintenance.
before locking the vehicle.
If an entry is made in the electronic service his‐
tory of the vehicle, service-relevant data is saved
Safety note
both in the vehicle and in the central IT systems
of BMW AG, Munich.
After a change of registered keeper, the new NOTE
owner will be able to view the data entered in the Incorrect use of the OBD on-board diagnosis
electronic service history. Similarly, a Service socket can cause malfunctions in the vehicle.
Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified There is a risk of material damage. Only have
Service Partner or a specialist workshop can also service and maintenance work involving the
view the data entered in the electronic service OBD on-board diagnosis socket carried out by
history. a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
Objection workshop or other authorised persons. Only
connect devices that have been tested and
The registered keeper is entitled to contact a
found to be safe for use with the OBD on-
board diagnosis socket.
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop
and request that no entries are made in the elec‐
tronic service history and that no data relating to
his/her time as owner is subsequently stored in
Position
the vehicle or transferred to the vehicle manufac‐
turer. In such cases, no entries will be made in
the vehicle's electronic service history.
Displays
Service work which has been logged can be dis‐
played on the control display.
Service requirements, see page 166. On the driver's side there in a OBD socket for
reading vehicle data.
358
Maintenance MOBILITY
Vehicle recycling
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
returning the vehicle to a collection point nomi‐
nated by the manufacturer at the end of its life
cycle. The regulations concerning the returning
of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to
country. Additional information is available from a
shop.
High-voltage battery recycling

The vehicle manufacturer recommends
having a Service Partner of the manufac‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner
or specialist workshop dispose of high-voltage
batteries that are at the end of their useful life or
are faulty.
The regulations concerning the returning of end-
of-life vehicles may vary from country to country.
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. For
more information, see www.bmw.com.
359
MOBILITY Replacing parts
Replacing parts
Vehicle equipment Replacing the wiper blades
1. To replace the wiper blades, move the wipers
This chapter describes equipment, systems and to the fold-out position.
functions which are offered or will be offered on For fold-out position of the windscreen wip‐
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ ers, see page 151.
2. Fold out the wiper arm and hold firm.
3. Press together securing spring, arrow 1, and
Vehicle equipment, see page 7. fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Toolkit
4. Remove the wiper blade forwards out of its

catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in the opposite se‐
The toolkit is located in the left storage compart‐ quence ensuring that it clips into place.
ment of the luggage compartment, under a 6. Fold in the windscreen wipers.
cover.
Bulbs and lights

Wiper blades
General
Safety note Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐
ing safety.
NOTE All headlights and other lights use LED or laser
technology.
The windscreen may sustain damage if a wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade fitted. There Some equipment versions have light-emitting di‐
is a risk of material damage. Hold the wiper odes behind a cover as a light source. These
firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not light-emitting diodes are similar to conventional
fold in or switch on the wiper without a wiper lasers and are classified by legislation as Class 1
blade installed. light-emitting diode.
In the event of a fault, the manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends having the relevant work
carried out by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
360
Replacing parts MOBILITY
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a More information regarding the battery can be
specialist workshop. obtained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
Safety notes specialist workshop.
Safety notes
WARNING
Concentrated laser light can cause irritation or
lasting damage to the retina of the eye. There DANGER
is a danger of injury. The manufacturer of the Touching live components can result in an
vehicle recommends having work on the light‐ electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even
ing system, including bulb replacement, per‐ death. Do not touch any components that
formed by a Service Partner of the manufac‐ could be live.
WARNING
Vehicle batteries that are classified as unsuita‐
WARNING ble may damage systems or result in functions
Intense brightness can irritate or harm the ret‐ no longer being carried out. There is a risk of
ina of the eye. There is a danger of injury. Do injury or material damage. Only use vehicle bat‐
not look directly into the headlights or other teries that have been classified as suitable by
light sources. Do not remove covers from the vehicle manufacturer.
LEDs.
Registering the battery with the

Headlight glass vehicle
During cool or humid weather, the headlight The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
glass can mist over on the inside. When driving having a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
with the lights switched on, the condensation another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
disappears after a short time. There is no need to workshop register the vehicle battery with the
replace the headlight glass. vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once
If moisture increases, for example if there are wa‐ the battery has been registered again, all comfort
ter droplets in the lamp despite the headlights functions will be available without restriction and
being switched on, have the headlights checked. any Check Control messages relating to the
comfort functions will no longer be displayed.
Vehicle battery Hazard icons

The following hazard icons can be found on the
General vehicle battery:
As well as the high-voltage battery, the vehicle
has a 12-volt vehicle battery. The vehicle battery
supplies the vehicle electronics with energy.
The battery is maintenance-free.
361
MOBILITY Replacing parts
Icon Meaning ▷ Park the vehicle and switch off consumers.

▷ First disconnect the power at the negative
No smoking, no naked flames,
terminal. Then disconnect the power at the
no sparks.
positive terminal.
Wear protective goggles.

Notes on installation
Observe the following notes on installing the ve‐
Keep away from children. hicle battery:
▷ Remove any foreign bodies from the battery
holder.
Risk of acid burns: wear gloves, ▷ Only install the battery in the intended posi‐
do not tilt the battery. tion in the vehicle.
Rinse any splashes of acid with ▷ Keep the battery and vehicle connection con‐
water immediately. If acid comes tacts clean.
into contact with eyes or is swal‐ ▷ First connect the power at the positive termi‐
lowed, seek medical attention nal. Then connect the power at the negative
immediately. terminal.
▷ Use the connections, connectors and covers
No direct sunlight, no frost.
provided.
▷ Connect a hose to the gas outlet opening if
Follow the operating instruc‐ necessary.
tions.
Initial operation
Explosive gas mixture. Do not The battery is operational. No special precau‐
seal any openings on the bat‐ tions are required for start-up.
tery.
Charging the battery
Replacing the battery A battery charger installed in the vehicle supplies
the vehicle battery with current. The battery
General charger draws the energy required from the
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends high-voltage battery.
only having the vehicle battery replaced by a For further information:
Charge vehicle, see page 316.
shop. If the battery is not replaced correctly, the
vehicle may not recognise it properly and perfect Open circuit
functioning cannot be guaranteed. Following an open circuit, some equipment will
have to be reinitialised or individual settings will
Notes on removal need to be updated, for example:
Observe the following notes on removing the ve‐ ▷ Parking brake, see page 146.
hicle battery: ▷ With memory function: save positions again.
▷ Time: update.
362
Replacing parts MOBILITY
▷ Date: update. Information on the fuse assignment, as well as

▷ Glass sunroof: initialise system. the positions of the fuse boxes, is available on
the Internet: www.bmw.com/fusecard.
Storing the battery
Safety note
Observe the following information on storing ve‐
hicle batteries:
▷ Store the battery in a cool and dry place. WARNING
▷ Protect the battery from direct sunlight and Incorrect or repaired fuses can overload electri‐
frost. cal cables and components. There is a risk of
fire. Do not repair blown fuses or replace them
▷ Only clean the battery with a damp, anti-static
with fuses with a different colour or amp rating.
cloth.
▷ Store the battery upright and secure it
against falling over. Replacing fuses
▷ Install the oldest batteries first. The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
▷ Do not remove the protective cap from the fuses changed by a Service Partner of the manu‐
contacts. facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
▷ Charge or install the battery by the date on
the battery label at the latest. Once fully
charged, the battery will work for another
10 months.
Disposing of the old battery

Dispose of old batteries at a Service
Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐
lecting point.
Batteries filled with acid should be transported
upright. Protect batteries against falling over
when in transit.
Warranty
See the vehicle purchase contract for informa‐
tion on the battery warranty.
Fuses
General
The fuses are located at different positions in the
vehicle.
363
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
Help in case of a breakdown

Vehicle equipment Warning triangle
This chapter describes equipment, systems and 1. Turn the twist lock in the tailgate by 90°, ar‐
functions which are offered or will be offered on row 1, and fold open the trim panel, arrow 2.
Hazard warning lights

2. To remove it, slide the warning triangle to the
left side.
Hazard warning lights button
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐

ard warning system is turned on. First-aid kit
General
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version, the vehicle may have a first-aid
kit.
Some items in the kit have a limited life.
Check the use-by dates of the contents regularly
and replace any items that have expired in good
time.
364
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Storage Starting BMW Roadside Assistance

The first-aid kit is to be stored on the right-hand manually
side of the luggage compartment. When equipped with Teleservices, support is
provided first through Teleservice Diagnosis and
then by Teleservice Assistance if required.
BMW Emergency Service
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
Principle
3. "Assistance"
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a 4. If necessary, select the entry for BMW Road‐
breakdown. side Assistance.
A voice contact is established.
General
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ Teleservice Diagnosis
cle's condition is sent to BMW Roadside Assis‐ Teleservice Diagnosis enables the detailed vehi‐
tance. It is possible that malfunctions can be cle data required for diagnosis to be transferred
remedied directly. via mobile radio. This data is transferred auto‐
There are various ways of contacting BMW matically. It may be necessary to approve this on
Roadside Assistance. the Control Display.
▷ Via a Check Control message.
Teleservice Assistance
Supplementary text messages, see
page 157. Teleservice Assistance is a country-specific fea‐
ture that allows BMW Roadside Assistance to
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
carry out a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐
▷ Via the BMW app. cle via mobile radio.
Depending on the national-market version and Teleservice Assistance can be started after a re‐
vehicle type, a different Roadside Assistance quest by BMW Roadside Assistance.
provider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive
customer portal if necessary. 1. Park the vehicle safely.
2. Apply the parking brake.
Operating requirements 3. Turn on control display.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment 4. Consent to Teleservice help.
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐
nectedDrive services.
▷ Mobile reception. BMW Accident Assistance
Principle
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be contac‐
ted if assistance is needed in the event of an ac‐
cident.
365
General 3. "Assistance"
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ 4. If necessary, select the entry for BMW Acci‐
ately severe accident that did not trigger any air‐ dent Assistance.
bags, a Check Control message is displayed in Follow the displays on the control display. A
the instrument cluster. A corresponding text voice contact is established.
message also appears on the control display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is transferred to Emergency call
BMW.
Depending on the national-market version and Statutory emergency call
vehicle type, a different accident assistance pro‐
vider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive Principle
customer portal if necessary. The system can be used to trigger an emer‐
gency call automatically or manually in emer‐
Operating requirements gency situations.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ General
nectedDrive services. Depending on the equipment and the national-
▷ Mobile reception. market version, the vehicle may have an emer‐
▷ Standby state is switched on. gency call system.
Press the SOS button in an emergency only.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance The emergency call establishes a connection to
a public emergency call number.
If an accident is detected automatically This depends on factors such as the specific
A BMW Accident Assistance text message is mobile phone network and national regulations.
shown on the control display. The emergency call is placed using the
The connection can be established directly: integrated SIM card in the vehicle and cannot be
"Contact accident assistance" switched off.
For a short time, the Check Control message for For technical reasons, it might not be possible to
BMW Accident Assistance can also be retrieved make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐
from the saved Check Control messages. tions.

Overview
Check Control, see page 156.
Starting BMW Accident Assistance

manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be contac‐
ted independently of the automatic accident de‐
tection function.
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
366
SOS button centre may still be able to hear the vehicle

occupants speak.
The rescue coordination centre ends the emer‐
gency call.
Malfunction
▷ Emergency call system is functional.
The emergency call function may be impaired.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
The LED in the area of the SOS button flashes
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control
the vehicle is activated.
message is shown.
Have checks performed by a Service Partner of
Automatic triggering
In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ Partner or a specialist workshop.
ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be
placed automatically immediately after an acci‐
dent of appropriate severity. Pressing the SOS
Intelligent emergency call
button does not affect the automatic emergency
call. Principle
The system can be used to trigger an emer‐
Manual triggering gency call automatically or manually in emer‐
gency situations.
1. Tap the cover flap.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED General
in the button area is illuminated green.
Depending on the equipment and the national-
▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐ market version, the vehicle may have an emer‐
gency call has been activated. gency call system.
If a cancellation request is shown on the con‐ Press the SOS button in an emergency only.
trol display, the emergency call can be can‐
celled. The intelligent emergency call system estab‐
lishes a connection with the BMW emergency
If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐ call centre.
til voice contact has been established.
Even if no emergency call through BMW is pos‐
▷ The LED flashes green when the connection sible, in some cases an emergency call may still
to the emergency call has been established. be established to a public emergency call num‐
In an emergency call, data is sent to the pub‐ ber. This depends on factors such as the specific
lic rescue coordination centre in order to de‐ mobile phone network and national regulations.
cide what rescue measures are required. The For technical reasons, it might not be possible to
data may include, for example, the vehicle's make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐
current position, if this can be determined. tions.
For information on data transfer and storage:
Statutory emergency call system, see
page 15.
Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer
hear the rescue coordination centre through
the loudspeakers, the rescue coordination
367
Overview When an emergency call is made through

BMW, data such as the vehicle's current po‐
sition, if this can be determined, is sent to the
emergency call centre in order to decide
what rescue measures are required.
If questions asked by the emergency call
centre remain unanswered, rescue measures
are implemented automatically.
Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer
hear the emergency call centre through the
loudspeakers, the emergency call centre may
SOS button
still be able to hear the vehicle occupants
speak.
The emergency call centre ends the emergency
Operating requirements call.
▷ Emergency call system is functional.
Malfunction
The emergency call function may be impaired.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in The LED in the area of the SOS button flashes
the vehicle is activated. for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control
message is shown.
Automatic triggering Have checks performed by a Service Partner of
In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐ the manufacturer or another qualified Service
ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be Partner or a specialist workshop.
placed automatically immediately after an acci‐
dent of appropriate severity. Pressing the SOS
button does not affect the automatic emergency Fire extinguisher
call.
Principle
Manual triggering The fire extinguisher can be used to put out vehi‐
1. Tap the cover flap. cle fires.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
in the button area is illuminated green. General
▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐ Depending on the equipment and the national-
gency call has been activated. market version, the vehicle may have a fire extin‐
If a cancellation request is shown on the con‐ guisher.
trol display, the emergency call can be can‐
celled.
If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐
til voice contact has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when the connection
to the emergency call has been established.
368
Safety notes Stowing the fire extinguisher

1. Insert the fire extinguisher into the holder.
WARNING 2. Hook in and close the buckles.
Incorrect use of the fire extinguisher can cause
injury. There is a danger of injury. Observe the Maintenance and refilling
information below when using the fire extin‐ Have the fire extinguisher checked every 2 years
guisher: by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
▷ Do not inhale the extinguishing agent. If other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
the extinguishing agent is inhaled, move workshop.
the casualty out into the fresh air. If the Make a note of the next maintenance date for
casualty experiences breathing difficulties, the fire extinguisher.
contact a doctor immediately.
Replace the fire extinguisher after use or have it
▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to refilled.
come into contact with the skin. Pro‐
longed contact with the extinguishing
agent can cause the skin to dry out. Conduct after an accident
▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to
come into contact with the eyes. In the General
event of contact with the eyes, rinse them
immediately with plenty of water. In case After an accident, take the following safety
of prolonged discomfort, contact a doctor. measures regarding the high-voltage system:
▷ Put the selector lever into position P, apply
the parking brake and switch off or deactivate
WARNING standby state or drive-ready state.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the ▷ Secure the area where the accident has
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been taken place.
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that ▷ Lock the vehicle when you leave it.
items in the vehicle are stowed securely and ▷ Inform the fire, police or ambulance service
cannot get into the driver's footwell. immediately that it involves a vehicle with a
high-voltage system.
Overview ▷ Do not inhale any gases from the high-volt‐

age battery and keep away from the vehicle
The fire extinguisher is located in the interior, for
as appropriate.
example under the seat or in the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety notes
Removing the fire extinguisher
Open the buckles on the retaining strap. DANGER
Using the fire extinguisher electric shock. There is a danger of injury or
danger to life. After an accident, do not touch
To use the fire extinguisher, follow the manufac‐
any high-voltage components, for example or‐
turer's instructions on the fire extinguisher and
the information supplied with it.
369
ange high-voltage cables or parts which are in Transporting the vehicle

contact with exposed high-voltage cables.
General
The vehicle must not be towed.
WARNING
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive. Safety notes
There is a danger of injury. Do not touch fluid
from the high-voltage battery.
NOTE
If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised, the
vehicle can be damaged. There is a risk of ma‐
Jump start terial damage. Only have the vehicle transpor‐
ted on a truck bed.
General
Only ever have a Service Partner of the manufac‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a NOTE
specialist workshop provide jump start. The vehicle may be damaged when raising and
securing it.
Safety note There is a risk of material damage.
▷ Raise the vehicle with suitable equipment.
DANGER ▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by its
Touching live components can result in an towing eye, body parts or chassis parts.
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even
death. Do not touch any components that
Pushing the vehicle
could be live.
To remove a broken-down vehicle from a dan‐
gerous area, it can be pushed over a short dis‐
tance at a maximum speed of 10 km/h, 6 mph.
Towing away For further information:
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 140.
Safety note
Recovery vehicle
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/tow-away when
the front-collision warning is activated. There is
a risk of accident. Turn the front-collision warn‐
ing off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Only have the vehicle transported on a loading

platform.
370
Towing other vehicles ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps that will allow the
vehicle to be towed smoothly.
General ▷ Fasten the towing rope so it is not twisted.
Switch on the hazard warning lights in line with ▷ Check the towing eye and towing rope fas‐
local regulations. tening regularly.
If the electrical system of the vehicle being ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h,
towed has failed, the vehicle must be made iden‐ 30 mph.
tifiable to other road users, for instance by plac‐ ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 5 km,
ing a sign or the warning triangle in the rear win‐ 3 miles.
dow.
▷ Ensure that the towing rope is taut when the
towing vehicle drives off.
Safety notes
Towing eye
WARNING
If the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle General
is less than that of the vehicle being towed, the
towing eye may be torn off or it may not be
possible to control the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle
weight of the towing vehicle is greater than the
weight of the vehicle being towed.
NOTE
If the tow bar or the towing rope is not attached Always keep the screw-on towing eye in the ve‐
correctly, other vehicle parts can be damaged. hicle.
There is a risk of material damage. Attach the
The towing eye can be screwed in at the front or
tow bar or towing rope to the towing eye cor‐
rear of the vehicle.
rectly.
The towing eye is located in the toolkit.
Observe the following notes when using the tow‐
Towbar ing eye:
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on ▷ Only use the towing eye supplied with the ve‐
the same side. hicle.
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar at ▷ Turn the towing eye at least 5 turns clock‐
an angle, note the following: wise and screw it in tight and as far as it will
▷ Clearance may be restricted when cornering. go. If necessary, tighten with a suitable ob‐
ject.
▷ Lateral force will be generated if the towbar is
installed at an angle. ▷ After use, unscrew the towing eye in an anti-
clockwise direction.
Towing rope ▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on paved
Note the following if using a towing rope: roads.
371
▷ Avoid transverse loads on the towing eye, for

example do not raise the vehicle by the tow‐
ing eye.
▷ Check the towing eye fastening regularly.

Toolkit, see page 360.
Safety note
NOTE
If the towing eye is not used as intended, the
vehicle or towing eye may be damaged. There
is a risk of material damage. Observe the notes
on using the towing eye.
Thread for towing eye
Press the marking on the edge of the cover to

press it out.
372
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle equipment
NOTE
This chapter describes equipment, systems and The charging socket outlet may be damaged
functions which are offered or will be offered on when the charging socket flap is open while
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ washing. There is a risk of material damage.
ded in the vehicle in question. Close the charging socket flap before washing.
Remove any dirt behind the charging socket
flap with a cloth.
High-pressure cleaners
Vehicle wash
Safety note
General
Regularly remove foreign objects, for example, NOTE
leaves or snow, in the area below the wind‐
When cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, ex‐
screen.
cessive pressure or excessive temperatures
Wash the vehicle frequently, especially in winter. can damage various components. There is a
Heavy soiling and road salt can cause damage to risk of material damage. Maintain a sufficient
the vehicle. distance and do not spray for an extended pe‐
For further information: riod of time. Comply with the instructions for
For fold-out position of the windscreen wipers, the high-pressure cleaner.
see page 151.
Distances and temperature

Safety notes
▷ Maximum temperature: 60 ℃/140 ℉.
▷ Minimum distance to sensors, cameras,
WARNING
seals: 30 cm, 12 in.
▷ Minimum distance to the glass sunroof:
electric shock. High voltage is present at the
80 cm, 31.5 in.
charging socket. There is a risk of injury or even
death. Have work on the charging socket, for
example cleaning, performed by a Service Part‐
373
MOBILITY Care
Automatic car washes General

The vehicle must be able to roll freely while in
Safety notes the car wash.
Some car washes require you to leave the vehi‐
NOTE cle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle from the
outside in selector lever position N. If an attempt
If high-pressure washers are used, water may
is made to lock the vehicle, a signal sounds.
penetrate the area around the windows. There
is a risk of material damage. Do not drive in For further information:
high-pressure washers. For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 140.
Exiting from a car wash

NOTE Make sure that the vehicle key is in the vehicle.
The vehicle can be damaged if automatic car Switch on drive-ready state.
washes are used incorrectly. There is a risk of For further information:
material damage. Observe the following notes:
Drive-ready state, see page 52.
▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft
brushes are preferable, to avoid damage
Headlights
to the paintwork.
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
▷ Do not drive into automatic car washes or
abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.
washing bays with guide rails higher than
10 cm, 4 in, to avoid damage to the body. Soak impurities, for example insect residues, with
shampoo and wash off with water.
▷ Note the maximum tyre width of the guide
rail to avoid damage to tyres and rims. Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid dam‐
aging them.
After vehicle wash
▷ Deactivate the windscreen wipers and the
rain sensor (if fitted) to avoid damage to After vehicle wash, briefly apply the brakes to dry
the wiper system. them, otherwise braking effect may be tempora‐
rily reduced. The heat generated by braking dries
the brake discs and brake pads and protects
Entering a car wash them against corrosion.
Completely remove residues on the windscreens
Safety note to avoid affecting visibility due to smearing and to
reduce wiping noise and wiper blade wear.
NOTE
Vehicle care
switch off standby state in car washes. Care products
General
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
products from BMW. Suitable care products are
374
Care MOBILITY
available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as it
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a has the tendency to soil faster.
specialist workshop. Use leather cleaner, otherwise dirt and grease
will attack the protective coating of the leather.
Safety note Remove aggressive substances, such
sunscreen, immediately to prevent the leather
WARNING from being altered or discoloured.
Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐
stances or constitute a health risk. There is a Synthetic leather care
danger of injury. When cleaning the interior, Clean the synthetic leather regularly with a damp
open the doors or windows. Use only products microfibre cloth or vacuum cleaner.
that are intended for cleaning the vehicle's inte‐ Dust and road dirt will otherwise become worked
rior. Observe the notes on the packaging. into pores and folds, resulting in considerable
abrasion and causing the surface to become pre‐
maturely brittle.
Vehicle paintwork
In case of major contaminations, use a moist soft
sponge or microfibre cloth with a suitable interior
General
cleaners.
Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐
Remove aggressive substances, for example
serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef‐
sunscreen, immediately to prevent the synthetic
fects in areas with high air pollution or natural
leather from being altered or discoloured.
contaminants, for example tree resin or pollen,
may affect the vehicle paintwork. Take such fac‐
tors into consideration when deciding on the fre‐ Fabric care
quency and scope of vehicle care measures.
Immediately remove aggressive substances, for
General
example oil, grease or bird droppings to prevent In case of major contaminations, such as bever‐
paintwork damage and discolouration. age stains, use a moist soft sponge or microfibre
cloth with a suitable interior cleaners.
Matt paintwork Remove aggressive substances, for example
Only use cleaning and care products that are sunscreen, immediately to prevent the fabric
suitable for vehicles with matt paintwork. from being altered or discoloured.
Leather care Safety note

Remove dust from the leather at regular intervals
with a cloth or vacuum cleaner. NOTE
Dust and road dirt will otherwise become worked Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
into pores and folds, resulting in considerable clothing can damage the seat covers and other
abrasion and causing the leather surface to be‐ cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is a risk of
come prematurely brittle. material damage. Make sure that the hook and
To protect against discolouration, for example loop fasteners are closed.
from clothing, clean and care for the leather ap‐
proximately every two months.
375
MOBILITY Care
Care of upholstery fabrics Wiper blades

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. The wiper blades are cleaned by using the win‐
Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid rub‐ dow washer system.
bing vigorously. Avoid additional manual cleaning of the wiper
blades to prevent a reduction in wipe quality.
Textile care
Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning minor con‐ Fine wood parts
tamination. Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts with a
Dampen the cloth with water. damp cloth only. Then dry them with a soft cloth.
Care of special parts Kenaf

Treat parts made from kenaf fibres with a suita‐
Light alloy wheels ble care product only.
When cleaning the wheels while they are instal‐
led on the vehicle, only use neutral rim cleaner Plastic parts
with a pH value between 5 and 9. Do not use
abrasive cleaners or high-pressure cleaners NOTE
above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the manufacturer's
Cleaning agents containing alcohol or solvents,
instructions.
for example nitro thinners, cold cleaners, fuel or
Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroy similar can damage plastic parts. There is a risk
the protective coatings of adjacent parts, for ex‐ of material damage. Clean with a microfibre
ample brake disc. cloth. Lightly moisten the cloth with water if
After cleaning, briefly apply the brakes to dry necessary.
them. The heat generated by braking dries the
brake discs and brake pads and protects them Clean with a microfibre cloth.
against corrosion. Lightly moisten the cloth with water if necessary.
Do not soak the headliner.
Chrome-like surfaces
Carefully clean chrome-like surfaces with plenty Seat belts
of water, particularly if they have been exposed
to road salt; add shampoo if need be.
WARNING
Rubber parts Chemical cleaners can cause irreparable dam‐
The surfaces of rubber parts can be contamina‐ age to the fabric of the seat belts. The protec‐
ted or lose their shine due to environmental influ‐ tive function of the seat belts will be lost. There
ences. Only use water and suitable care prod‐ is a risk of injury or even death. Only use a mild
ucts for cleaning. soap and water solution for cleaning the seat
belts.
Rubber parts subjected to high wear and tear
should be treated regularly with rubber care
Dirt on the seat belt straps can interfere with the
products. Do not use silicone-based care prod‐
action of the reel and is a safety hazard.
ucts for treating rubber seals, otherwise these
could be damaged and become a source of Only clean the seat belt straps with a mild soap
noise. solution while still fitted to the vehicle.
376
Care MOBILITY
Do not allow seat belts to retract until they are Use a dry, clean antistatic microfibre cloth.
dry. Depending on the equipment: clean the protec‐
tive glass of the head-up display using a microfi‐
Carpets and floor mats bre cloth and commercially available dish-wash‐
ing soap.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
Sensors and camera lenses
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been Clean sensors or camera lenses using a cloth
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
items in the vehicle are stowed securely and
cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not
use loose floor mats, and do not place several
floor mats on top of one another. Make sure
that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐
sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐
ter removal, for example for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle to

enable the interior to be cleaned more thor‐
oughly.
In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor carpets
using a microfibre cloth and water or textile
cleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction of
travel to prevent matting.
Displays, screens and protective glass of

the head-up display
NOTE
Chemical cleaners, moisture or fluids of all
kinds can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of material damage.
Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth.
NOTE
Incorrect cleaning can damage the surfaces of
displays. There is a risk of material damage.
Avoid applying excessive pressure and do not
use abrasive materials.
377
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General
The technical data and specifications in the on the vehicle or can be requested from a Serv‐
Owner's Handbook are reference figures. Data ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
relating to a specific vehicle can deviate from fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
this, for example, due to selected optional equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents always
ment, national-market versions or country-spe‐ takes precedence over the information in the
cific measurement procedures. Detailed values Owner's Handbook.
can be found in the permit documents, on signs
Dimensions
Dimensions can vary depending on the model In addition, the height of the vehicle may vary, for
version, equipment or country-specific measure‐ example, due to tyres and load.
ment method.
BMW i4 Gran Coupé
Width with mirrors mm (in) 2073 (81.6)
Width without mirrors mm (in) 1886 (74.3)
Height mm (in) 1448 (57)
Length mm (in) 4783 (188.3)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2856 (112.4)
Smallest turning circle dia. m (ft) 12.5 (41.0)
378
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
i4 eDrive40
Vehicle kerb weight ready for use, with 75 kg load, no op‐ kg (lb) 2125 (4685)
tional equipment
Permitted total weight kg (lb) 2605 (5743)
Payload kg (lb) 555 (1224)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1140 (2513)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1550 (3417)
Permitted roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
i4 M50
Vehicle kerb weight ready for use, with 75 kg load, no op‐ kg (lb) 2290 (5049)
tional equipment
Permitted total weight kg (lb) 2735 (6030)
Payload kg (lb) 520 (1146)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1270 (2800)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1550 (3417)
Permitted roof load kg (lb) 75 (165)
Trailer operation
i4 eDrive40
Trailer loads according to EU operating permit. Consult manufacturer’s Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Trailer load without brake kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 1600 (3527)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
379
REFERENCE Technical data
i4 eDrive40
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1660 (3660)
Permitted total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2680 (5908)
i4 M50
Trailer loads according to EU operating permit. Consult manufacturer’s Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Trailer load without brake kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 75 (165)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1660 (3660)
Permitted total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2810 (6195)
380
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seats for child restraint systems

Vehicle equipment Information for manufacturers
of child seats
a model-specific basis, even if they are not inclu‐ General
ded in the vehicle in question. Information about which child restraint systems
For further information: can be used on each seat, in accordance with
the ECE-R 16 and ECE-R 129 standard.
Left-hand drive vehicles: Suitability of child restraint systems for each vehicle
seat
Seat position 1 3 – Airbag 3 – Airbag 4 5 6

ON OFF
Seat position suitable for No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

universal fastening with
a belt.
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suitable for No No No Yes No Yes

side mounting: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No No No R3 No R3
mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R
3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3
mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster No No No B3 No B3

mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no top tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 3 Front right
2 Front centre 4 Second-row seating left
381
REFERENCE Seats for child restraint systems
5 Second-row seating centre 8 Third-row seating centre
6 Second-row seating right 9 Third-row seating right
7 Third-row seating left
Right-hand drive vehicles: suitability of child restraint systems for each vehicle
seat
Seat position 1 – Airbag 1 – Airbag 3 4 5 6

ON OFF
Seat position suitable for No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

universal fastening with
a belt.
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suitable for No No No Yes No Yes

side mounting: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No No No R3 No R3
mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R
3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3
mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster No No No B3 No B3

mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no top tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
1 Front left 7 Third-row seating left
2 Front centre 8 Third-row seating centre
3 Front right 9 Third-row seating right
4 Second-row seating left
5 Second-row seating centre
6 Second-row seating right
382
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
General
Here is where any updates to the Owner's
Handbook for the vehicle are listed.
Updates after going to press

After the Integrated Owner's Handbook in the
vehicle went to press, the following chapters
were updated in the printed Owner's Handbook:
▷ Operation: opening and closing: access to
the vehicle interior: with the vehicle key: com‐
fort entry.
▷ Mobility: care: vehicle wash: entering a car
wash.
383
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Air distribution, manual 278
Air pressure, tyres 327
3D view 256 Air quality 279
Alarm signal, high-voltage battery 21
A Alarm system 102
All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 331
ABS Anti-lock Brake System 220 Ambient lighting 185
ACC, Cruise Control with distance control 229 Amount of air, automatic air conditioning 277
Acceleration assistant, see Launch Control 143 Android Auto, connection to vehicle 81
Accelerator pedal settings 141 Android Auto preparation, connection to vehi‐
Accessories and parts 9 cle 81
AC charging station, see Vehicle charging 316 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐
Accident, conduct 369 tion 81
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 216 Angle, backrest 112
Acoustic protection for pedestrians 136 Antifreeze protection, see Washer fluid 355
AC quick charge cable, see Mode 3 charging ca‐ Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 355
ble 318 Anti-lock Brake System ABS 220
Activation, airbags 188 Anti-slip control, see Dynamic Stability Con‐
Activation, towing a trailer 306 trol 220
Active Cruise Control 229 Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 102
Active front flap, see Active pedestrian protec‐ Anti-theft security system, locking wheel
tion 189 bolts 349
Active Park Distance Control 263 Anti-trap mechanism, glass sunroof 108
Active pedestrian protection 189 Anti-trap mechanism, windows 105
Active Protection 216 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to vehi‐
Active seat ventilation 123 cle 80
Active shock absorber adjustment, see Adaptive Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐
M suspension 271 tion 80
Adaptive brake assist 220 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake tertainment, Communication 6
lights 214 Aquaplaning 299
Adaptive Headlights 181 Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic protection
Adaptive lighting functions 180 for pedestrians 136
Adaptive M suspension 271 Ashtray 282
Age of tyres 330 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering and lane
Airbags 186 control assistant 241
Airbags, indicator/warning lamp 187 Assisted Driving Plus 244
Airbag switch, see Key switch for front passen‐ Assisted View 154
ger airbags 188 Attentiveness Assistant 217
Air conditioning 273
384
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Audio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Blower, see Amount of air 277
Entertainment, Communication 6 Bluetooth connection 77
AUTO H button, see Automatic Hold 147 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Automatic air conditioning 273 Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic air recirculation control 277 BMW Accident Assistance 365
Automatic camera perspective 255 BMW Digital Key 96
Automatic car wash 373 BMW Drive Recorder 214
Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage sys‐ BMW eDrive 135
tem 22 BMW ID 71
Automatic dimming, see High beam assis‐ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 61
tant 182 BMW Maintenance System 357
Automatic driving lights 177 BMW Roadside Assistance 365
Automatic driving lights control 177 BMW Services, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Automatic formation of emergency lane 248 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic Hold 147 Bonnet 352
Automatic locking 101 Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 290
Automatic parking function, exterior mirror 120 Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 290
Automatic rear air-conditioning system, disabling Bottleneck support, see Steering and lane con‐
operating elements 274 trol assistant 241
Automatic time setting 165 Brake assist 220
Automatic unlocking 100 Brake assist, adaptive 220
Automating habits, BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Brake discs, see Brake system 298
sistant 64 Brake lights, adaptive, see Dynamic brake
AUTO program, automatic air conditioning 275 lights 214
Average consumption, see Journey data 171 Brake lights, dynamic 214
Avoiding false warnings 103 Brake pads, see Brake system 298
Axle loads, permitted 379 Brake, see Drive position B 139
Brake system 298
B Braking, notes 299
Braking safely 299
Backrest angle 112 Breakdown, help 364
Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 113 Break recommendations, see Attentiveness As‐
Backrest, seats 110 sistant 217
Backrest width 113 Brightness, control display 57
Bad weather light 183 Bulbs and lights 360
Ball linkage electrically swivellable 306 Button, AUTO H, see Automatic Hold 147
Bar for tow-starting/towing 371 Button, central locking system 99
Battery changing, vehicle key 85 Buttons on the steering wheel 42
Battery charging, see Charging the vehicle 316 Button SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 367
Battery, charging status display 163 Button SOS, see Statutory emergency call 366
Battery, disposing of 363 Button, start/stop 137
Battery for high-voltage system, long stationary
periods 325 C
Battery, vehicle 361
B, drive position 139 Calendar day, see Date 165
Belts, see Seat belts 113
385
Camera instrument cluster, see Driver Attention Charging screen 155

Camera 218 Charging, see Charging the vehicle 316
Camera lenses, care 377 Charging status display, high-voltage bat‐
Camera perspective, automatic 255 tery 163
Camera, Reversing Assist camera 255 Charging status display, indicator light on the
Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 47 charging socket outlet 322
CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 229 Charging status, indicator light on the charging
CANCEL button, cruise control 226 socket outlet 322
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 290 Charging the battery, see Charging the vehi‐
Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 290 cle 316
Care 373 Charging the vehicle 316
Care, Head-Up Display 377 Charging, vehicle 316
Care, light-alloy wheels 376 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
Care of upholstery fabrics 375 ber 19
Care products 374 Check Control 156
Care, vehicle 374 Child locks 133
Caring for displays, monitors 377 Child restraint systems, i-Size 127
Car key, see Vehicle key 84 Child restraint systems, see Carrying children
Carpet, care 377 safely 124
CarPlay, connection to vehicle 80 Child safety seat fasteners, ISOFIX 126
Carrying children 124 Child seat classes, see Suitable seats for child
Carrying children safely 124 restraint systems 129
Car wash 373 Child seat mounting 125
Car wash, automatic 373 Child seats, see Carrying children safely 124
Car wash view 257 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 376
CBS Condition Based Service 357 Chrome surfaces, care 376
Central key, see Vehicle key 84 Cigarette lighter 283
Central locking switch, see Central locking sys‐ Cleaning displays, monitors 377
tem 99 Cleaning, Head-Up Display 377
Central locking system 99 Closing with a smartphone, see BMW Digital
Central screen, see Control display 57 Key 96
Centre armrest, front 289 Closing with the Key Card 95
Centre console 45 Coasting 313
Changes, technical, see Your own safety 8 Coasting in idle 313
Change, wheels and tyres 330 Coat hooks 291
Changing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 360 Collision Warning, see Front-collision warn‐
CHARGE, energy recuperation 136 ing 192
Charging a smartphone, see Wireless charging Collision warning systems 191
dock 285 COMFORT, see Driving Experience Control 144
Charging cable, Flexible Fast Charger 319 Communication, see Owner's Handbook for
Charging cable, high-voltage battery 318 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Charging cable, ID 318 Compartments in the doors 289
Charging cables, stowing, see Storage 319 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 76
Charging dock for smartphones, see Wireless Compressor 334
charging dock 285 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Charging process, see Charging screen 155 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
386
Condensation when vehicle is parked 300 Data storage medium, see Vehicle data and data
Condensation, windscreen 278 protection 10
Condition Based Service CBS 357 Data, technical 378
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Handbook for Date 165
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Daytime running lights 180
Connecting a device 75 DCC, Cruise Control without distance con‐
Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 283 trol 226
Connecting, mobile devices 75 DC charging cable 318
Consumption, see Journey data 171 Deactivation, airbags 188
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Deceleration and energy recuperation 141
Entertainment, Communication 6 Defrosting, see Defrosting the windscreen 278
Contact with water, high-voltage system 21 Defrosting, windscreen 278
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre 343, 347 Deleting personal data 70
Control display 57 Departure schedule, see Stationary air condition‐
Control display, brightness 57 ing 280
Control display, pop-ups 56 Departure times, stationary air conditioning 281
Control systems, driving stability 220 Destination entry, see Owner's Handbook for
Converting the headlights, see Right-hand/left- Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
hand traffic 184 Detecting traffic lights 239
Coolant 354 Device list 76
Coolant level 354 Diagnosis connection 358
Cooling, maximum 277 Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 96
Cooling system 354 Dimensions 378
Cornering light 181 Dimming exterior mirror 120
Corrosion of brake discs 300 Dimming interior mirror 120
Crossing traffic warning 212 Dipping headlights, see High beam assis‐
Crossroads Warning, see Front-collision warn‐ tant 182
ing 192 Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 56
Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 226 Direction indicators, see Turn indicators 148
Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with distance Disabling operating elements, automatic rear air-
control 229 conditioning system 274
Cruise Control with distance control 229 Display charge state, high-voltage battery 163
Cruise Control without distance control 226 Display charging process, see Charging
Cup holder, front 290 screen 155
Cup holder, rear 290 Display, current driving condition 173
Current driving condition 173 Display, iDrive 55
Customer support, see Owner's Handbook for Display information on Driver Assistance, see As‐
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 sisted View 154
Display information on Parking Manoeuvre Assis‐
D tant, see Assisted View 154
Display in the windscreen, see Head-Up Dis‐
Damage, tyres 329 play 174
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 153 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 184
Dash cam, see BMW Drive Recorder 214 Display panel, see Instrument cluster 153
Data protection, settings 70 Displays 153
Data, see Deleting personal data 70 Displays and symbols 7
387
Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 171 Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 137
Display speed limit, see Speed Limit Info 167 Driving Stability Control Systems 220
Disposal, coolant 355 Driving, Start/Stop button 137
Disposal, vehicle battery 363 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 312
Disposing of the old battery 363 Driving style, eDRIVE drive system 311
Distance control, see Cruise Control 229 Driving through water 299
Distance warning, see Park Distance Con‐ DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 220
trol 260 DTC, Dynamic Traction Control 222
Door handle lighting, see Welcome light 179 Dynamic brake lights 214
Door opening angle 259 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M suspen‐
Downhill gradients 300 sion 271
Drinks holder, front, see Cup holder, front 290 Dynamic ECO lighting function 180
Drinks holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 290 Dynamic Stability Control 220
Drive mode, see Driving Experience Control 144 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 222
Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 220 E
Drive position B, Brake 139
Drive power reduced, see Heavily discharged ECO lighting function, dynamic 180
high-voltage battery 166 ECO PRO, driving style analysis 312
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 218 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience
Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis‐ Control 144
tance systems 251 ECO PRO, see Driving Experience Control 144
Driver assistance systems 224 eDRIVE drive system, driving style 311
Driver Attention Camera 218 eDRIVE, electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 135
Driver Attentiveness Camera, see Driver Atten‐ Efficient4x4, see xDrive 223
tion Camera 218 Electrical power window switches 103
Drive-ready state in detail 137 Electric driving 141
Drive-ready state, see Operating condition of the electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 135
vehicle 51 Electric range 165
Drive-ready state, switching off 137 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Drive-ready state, switching on 137 Entertainment, Communication 6
Driver profiles 71 Emergency assistance, see BMW Accident As‐
Driver profiles, welcome screen 71 sistance 365
Drive sound 272 Emergency assistance, see BMW Roadside As‐
Driving 135 sistance 365
Driving Assistant, see Collision warning sys‐ Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐
tems 191 tant 210
Driving comfort 271 Emergency braking, see PostCrash – iBrake 217
Driving condition, display 173 Emergency call 366
Driving Experience Control 144 Emergency luggage compartment release 95
Driving hints 298 Emergency release, tailgate 95
Driving in detail 141 Emergency release, transmission lockout 140
Driving information, running in 298 Emergency running properties, tyres 332
Driving lights control, automatic 177 Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
Driving notes, general 298 tance 365
Driving path lines, Reversing Assist camera 254 Emergency stop assistant 210
388
Energy recuperation and deceleration 141 Finding charging stations, see Owner's
Energy recuperation, CHARGE 136 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
Engine compartment, see Under the front munication 6
flap 352 Fine wood parts, care 376
Engine coolant 354 Fire extinguisher 368
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 313 First-aid kit 364
Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic protection Flank view 256
for pedestrians 136 Flat tyre, continuing a journey 343, 347
Engine start, see Starting aid 370 Flat tyre, flat tyre monitor RPA 345
Entering an address, Navigation, see Owner's Flat tyre message, RPA 345
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Flat tyre message, Tyre Pressure Monitor 341
munication 6 Flat tyre monitor RPA 345
Entering letters and numbers 55 Flat tyre, remedying 333
Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Flat tyre, see Tyre Pressure Monitor 338
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Flat tyre warning lamp, RPA 345
Entertainment, selection list in the instrument Flat tyre warning light, Tyre Pressure Moni‐
cluster 170 tor 341
Equipment, interior 282 Flat tyre, wheel change 347
ESP Electronic Stability Programme, see Dy‐ Flexible Fast Charger 319
namic Stability Control 220 Flood, driving through 299
Evasion Assistant, see Front-collision warn‐ Floor carpet, care 377
ing 192 Fold-out position, windscreen wiper 151
Exchange, wheels and tyres 330 Foot brake 299
Exterior lights with the vehicle locked 179 Foot mats, care 377
Exterior mirror 119 Fording depth, water 299
Exterior mirror, automatically dimming 120 Four-wheel drive, see xDrive 223
Exterior mirror, automatic parking function 120 Front airbags 186
Exterior mirror internal 120 Front-collision warning 192
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 119 Front head rests 116
External start, see Starting aid 370 Front neck supports, see Front head rests 116
Eye for securing cable, towing a trailer 307 Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting
Eye for towing 371 down, see Automatic parking function 120
Eyes, see Lashing eye in the luggage compart‐ Front passenger airbags, deactivating/activat‐
ment 293 ing 188
Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 189
F Front seats 110
Fuses 363
Factory settings, see Resetting vehicle data 71
Failure message, see Check Control 156 G
False warnings, see Avoiding false warnings 103
Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 113 General driving notes 298
Fatigue warning function 217 Give way warning 207
Fault displays, see Check Control 156 Glare protection, see Sun visor 282
Filter, see Interior filter 280 Glass sunroof 106
Glass sunroof, initialising system 109
Glove compartment 288
389
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Hour, see Time 165
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Guest profile, see BMW ID 71 I
H iBrake – PostCrash 217

Ice, see Outside temperature 165
Handbrake, see Parking brake 145 Ice warning, see Outside temperature 165
Hands-free system, see Owner's Handbook for Iconic sounds, see Drive sound 272
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 ID, charging cable 318
Hazard warning lights 364 Identification number, see Vehicle identification
Head airbag 186 number 19
Head Light, adaptive 181 iDrive 54
Headlight flasher 149 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 84
Headlight glass 361 Important considerations 124
Headlights, care 374 Increasing range 309
Headliner 46 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbags 189
Head restraints and seats 110 Indicator light on the charging socket outlet, see
Head-Up Display 174 Charging status display 322
Head-Up Display, care 377 Indicator lights 157
Head-Up Display, saving position, see Memory Individual air distribution 278
function 121 Individual settings, see BMW ID 71
Heavy transported loads, stowing 292 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Height, vehicle 378 charging dock 285
Help in case of a breakdown 364 Inflation pressure, tyres 327
High beam assistant 182 Inflation pressure warning RPA, tyres 345
High-beam headlights 149 Initialising, runflat indicator RPA 345
High-voltage battery, alarm signal 21 Input comparison 56
High-voltage battery, charging status dis‐ Input, iDrive 55
play 163 Instrument cluster 153
High-voltage battery, heavily discharged 141 Instrument cluster switch, see Turn indica‐
High-voltage battery, long stationary peri‐ tors 148
ods 325 Instrument cluster switch, see Wiper sys‐
High-voltage battery, overheated 141 tem 149
High-voltage battery, recycling 359 Instrument lighting 184
High-voltage battery, service life 325 Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 153
High-voltage system, automatic deactivation 22 Integrated key 85
High-voltage system, contact with water 21 Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle 23
High-voltage system, safety 21 Intelligent emergency call 367
High-voltage system, work 21 Intelligent Personal Assistant 61
Holder for drinks, front 290 Intended use 8
Holder for drinks, rear 290 Interior equipment 282
Home lights 179 Interior filter 280
Home lights, switching on 179 Interior light 184
Home page, see Internet 6 Interior light with the vehicle locked 179
Horn 42 Interior mirror 120
Hotel function, see Parking service mode 99 Interior mirror, external 119
390
Interior mirror, manual dim 120 Light-alloy wheels, care 376

Interior movement detector 103 Lighter 283
Internet site 6 Lighter, front 283
Interval Display, see Service requirements 166 Light in exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic warn‐
i-Size child restraint systems 127 ing 212
ISOFIX, child safety seat fasteners 126 Lighting 177
Light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Change
J Warning 202
Lights 177
Jacking points 350 Light switch 177
Journey data 171 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 224
Jump starting, see Starting aid 370 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 170
Junction warning, see Road priority warning 207 Live Vehicle 171
Load 292
K Loading the luggage compartment, see Stowing
transported loads 292
Kenaf, care 376 Loads 292
Key Card 95 Local time, see Time 165
Key, mechanical 85 Locking, automatic 101
Key, see Vehicle key 84 Locking, doors and windows 133
Key switch for front passenger airbags 188 Locking, see Opening and closing 84
Locking settings 100
Locking wheel bolts 349
L Lock, power window switches, see Safety
switch 105
Labelling of recommended tyres 331
Lock, wheel bolts 349
Labelling of run-flat tyres 332
Logging on, mobile devices, see Connec‐
Lane boundary, warning 199
tions 75
Lane change assistant 246
Long stationary periods, high-voltage bat‐
Lane Change Warning 202
tery 325
Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane
Low-beam headlight, operation 178
control assistant 241
Lower back support, see Lumbar support 113
Lane control assistant with active side collision
Luggage compartment 292
protection, see Side collision warning 205
Luggage compartment cover 295
Lane Departure Warning 199
Luggage compartment, extending 294
Language, setting 63
Luggage rack, see Roof rack 300
Laser high-beam headlights 183
Lumbar support 113
Lashing eyes in the luggage compartment 293
Lashing straps, see Lashing eyes in the luggage
compartment 293 M
Lateral Parking Aid 255
Launch Control 143 Maintenance 357
Leather care 375 Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based
LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and Service CBS 357
bulbs 360 Maintenance, see Service requirements 166
Left-hand traffic, light setting 184 Maintenance System, BMW 357
Length, vehicle 378 Make-up mirror 282
391
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 156 Multifunction hook 293

Malfunction, vehicle key 87 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 42
Managing devices 76 Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Manual operation, air distribution 278 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Manual operation, amount of air 277
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ N
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Matt paintwork, care 375 Navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Maximum cooling 277 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit Net, luggage compartment 293
Info 167 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 376
Maximum speed, winter tyres 331 No-overtaking indicator 167
Media of the Owner's Handbook 23 No Passing information, see Speed Limit Display
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 364 with no-overtaking indicator 167
Memory function 121 Notes 6
Messages, see Check Control 156 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 371
Metres, see Instrument cluster 153
Minimum tread depth, tyres 329 O
Mirror, vanity 282
Mobile communication in the vehicle 299 OBD, see On-board diagnosis, OBD 358
Mobile devices, managing 76 Obstacle marker, Reversing Assist camera 254
Mobile phone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Odometer, see Journey data 171
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 OFF display, instrument cluster, see Standby
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ state and Drive-ready state 164
tance 365 On-board computer, see Journey data 171
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ On-board diagnosis, OBD 358
tance 365 On-board literature, printed 23
Mobile telephone, connecting 75 On-board monitor, see Control display 57
Mobile telephone, see Owner's Handbook for On-board tool kit 360
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Opening and closing 84
Mobility system, see Tyre repair kit 333 Opening with a smartphone, see BMW Digital
Mode 2 charging cable 318 Key 96
Mode 2 charging, see Vehicle charging 316 Opening with the Key Card 95
Mode 3 charging cable 318 Operating condition of the vehicle 51
Mode 4 charging cable, see DC charging ca‐ Operating menus, iDrive 54
ble 318 Operating principle, iDrive 54
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 229 Operation via voice control 61
Moisture in the headlights, see Headlight Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
glass 361 Outlets, see Ventilation 279
Monitoring of the high-voltage battery 21 Outside air, see Automatic air recirculation con‐
Monitor, see Control display 57 trol 277
Mounting child restraints 125 Outside temperature 165
MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Owner's Handbook on language, BMW Intelli‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 gent Personal Assistant 63
M suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Owner's Handbook, printed 23
sion 271
392
P Power window switches 103

Preliminary air conditioning, see Stationary air
Paintwork, vehicle care 375 conditioning 280
Panorama View 257 Pressure, tyres 327
Panorama View, see Panorama View 257 Pressure warning RPA, tyres 345
Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 106 Printed on-board literature 23
Park Assist 264 Protection for pedestrians, acoustic 136
Park Distance Control 260 Protection function, glass sunroof, see Anti-trap
Parking aid, see Park Distance Control 260 mechanism 108
Parking assistance systems 251 Protection function, windows, see Anti-trap
Parking assistant 264 mechanism 105
Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance
systems 251 Q
Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys‐
tems 251 Quick charge cable, see Mode 3 charging ca‐
Parking brake 145 ble 318
Parking brake function, Active Park Distance
Control 263 R
Parking lights 178
Parking service mode 99 Racetrack 302
Parking with Automatic Hold 147 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 47
Part replacement 360 Radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Parts and accessories 9 Entertainment, Communication 6
Payload, technical data 379 Radio signals 299
PDC, see Park Distance Control 260 Rain sensor 150
Pedestrian protection, active 189 Range 165
Pedestrian Warning, see Front-collision warn‐ READY display, instrument cluster, see Standby
ing 192 state and Drive-ready state 164
Performance Control 271 Rear automatic air conditioning 273
Performance display, instrument cluster 163 Rear Collision Prevention 206
Personal Assistant 61 Rear collision warning, see Rear Collision Pre‐
Personal data, deleting 70 vention 206
Personal eSIM 79 Rear fog light 183
Personal hotspot 80 Rear fog light, replacing, see Lights and
Personal profile, see BMW ID 71 bulbs 360
Personal settings 70 Rear head rests 117
Physical units, see Set units of measure‐ Rear luggage rack 301
ment 165 Rear neck supports, see Rear head rests 117
Place for children 124 Rear seat backrests, folding down 294
Plasters, see First-aid kit 364 Rear-view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle func‐
Plastic parts, care 376 tion 120
Pop-ups, control display 56 Rear window heating 279
PostCrash – iBrake 217 Recirculated-air mode 277
Power display, see Sport displays 174 Recirculation, see Recirculated-air mode 277
Power failure 362 Recommended makes of tyre 331
Powermeter, see Performance display 163 Recuperation, see Energy recuperation 136
393
Recycling 359 Retreaded tyres 331

Recycling, high-voltage battery 359 Reuse 359
Reduced drive power, see Heavily discharged Reversing assistant 269
high-voltage battery 166 Reversing Assist camera 255
Registering a device 75 Right-hand traffic, light setting 184
Remaining range, see Range 165 Road priority warning 207
Remote 3D View 259 Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
Remote control for audio, see Owner's tance 365
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Roller cover 295
munication 6 Rolling away in idle, see Coasting 313
Remote control, see Vehicle key 84 Roof load, permitted 379
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Roof rack 300
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Rope for tow-starting/towing 371
tion 6 Roundabout light 181
Remote Software Upgrade 66 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Renewal, wheels and tyres 330 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Replacement of parts 360 RPA flat tyre monitor 345
Replacement, wheels and tyres 330 RSC Runflat System, see Run-flat tyres 332
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 360 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Replacing front lights, see Bulbs and lights 360 tertainment, Communication 6
Replacing headlights, see Bulbs and lights 360 Rubber parts, care 376
Replacing laser headlights, see Bulbs and Run Flat, see Run-flat tyres 332
lights 360 Run-flat tyres 332
Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Bulbs and Running in 298
lights 360
Replacing lights, see Bulbs and lights 360 S
Replacing parts 360
Replacing rear light, see Bulbs and lights 360 Safe seating position 110
Replacing tail lights, see Bulbs and lights 360 Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 96
Replacing the wiper blades 360 Safety of the high-voltage system 21
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 229 Safety package, see Active Protection 216
RES CNCL button, cruise control 226 Safety switch, windows 105
Reserve warning, see Range 165 Safety systems, see Airbags 186
Reservoir for washer fluid 355 Safety systems, see Collision warning sys‐
Resetting settings, vehicle 71 tems 191
Resetting, Tyre Pressure Monitor 340 Saving mirror position, see Memory func‐
Resetting, vehicle data 71 tion 121
Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor 340 Saving seat position, see Memory function 121
Reset, vehicle settings 71 Saving steering wheel position, see Memory
Restraint systems for children, see Carrying chil‐ function 121
dren safely 124 Screen, see Control display 57
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 96 Sealing compound, see Tyre repair kit 333
Rest state, see Operating condition of the vehi‐ Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger
cle 51 seat 115
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 229 Seat belts 113
RESUME button, cruise control 226 Seat belts, care 376
394
Seat heating 122 Smallest turning radius, vehicle 378

Seats and head restraints 110 Smartphone, connecting 75
Seats, front 110 Smartphone integration, Android Auto prepara‐
Securing, transported loads 292 tion 81
Selection list in the instrument cluster 170 Smartphone integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐
Selector lever position 138 tion 80
Selector lever position B, Brake 139 Smartphone, operating via voice control 64
Sensors, care 377 Smartphone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Sensors of the vehicle 47 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Service history 167 Smokers package 282
Service life of the high-voltage battery 325 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's
Service requirements 166 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
Service requirements, see Condition Based munication 6
Service CBS 357 Snow chains 337
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD 358
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Sockets, electrical devices 283
munication 6 Software update, see Remote Software Up‐
Service, see BMW Accident Assistance 365 grade 66
Service, see BMW Roadside Assistance 365 Software upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐
Servotronic 223 grade 66
SET button, Active Cruise Control 229 Software version, see Remote Software Up‐
SET button, cruise control 226 grade 66
Set clock 165 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 367
Set day, see Date 165 SOS button, see Statutory emergency call 366
Set system language, see Language 63 Sound of drivetrain 272
Set time, see Time 165 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Setting, control display 57 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Settings, locking/unlocking 100 Sound, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Settings, seats and head restraints 110 Entertainment, Communication 6
Settings, steering wheel 121 Spanner, see On-board tool kit 360
Set units of measurement 165 Speech recognition 61
Shock absorber adjustment, active, see Adaptive Speed Limit Assist 237
M suspension 271 Speed Limit Device, Manual Speed Limiter 224
Shortcuts, iDrive 56 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 167
Side airbag 186 Speed limiter, manual 224
Side collision warning 205 Speed Limit Info 167
Side lights 178 Speed warning 224
Side nozzles, see Ventilation 279 SPORT BOOST, see Driving Experience Con‐
Side protection, see Lateral Parking Aid 255 trol 144
Signal horn, horn 42 Sport displays 174
Signals on unlocking, see Acknowledgement SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience
signals 101 Control 144
Sign, charging cable 318 SPORT, see Driving Experience Control 144
Sizes, see Dimensions 378 Sport steering, variable 223
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 165 Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspen‐
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 165 sion 271
395
Stability control systems 220 Symbols and displays 7

Standard charging cable 318 SYNC program, automatic air conditioning 278
Standard charging, see Vehicle charging 316
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 T
Standby state, see Operating condition of the
vehicle 51 Tailgate, emergency release 95
Start/Stop button 137 Technical changes, see Your own safety 8
Starting aid 370 Technical data 378
Starting the engine with the Key Card 95 Telephone, connecting 75
Stationary air conditioning 280 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Telephone, selection list in the instrument clus‐
Status indicator, tyres 340 ter 170
Status information, iDrive 55 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Status of the Owner's Handbook 8 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Status, vehicle 174 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Statutory emergency call 366 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Steering and lane control assistant 241 Temperature, automatic air conditioning 276
Steering assistance, see Servotronic 223 Temperature display, see Outside tempera‐
Steering column adjustment 121 ture 165
Steering wheel, buttons 42 Temperature preconditioning, see Stationary air
Steering wheel heating 121 conditioning 280
Steering wheel, setting 121 Tension belt, see Lashing eyes in the luggage
Storage, charge cables 319 compartment 293
Storage compartment, centre console 289 Thigh support 112
Storage compartments 288 Tilt alarm sensor 103
Storage, tyres 332 Tilting down the front passenger's side exterior
Stowing charging cables, see Storage 319 mirror, see Automatic parking function 120
Stowing, transported loads 292 Time 165
Suitable devices 76 Time of day, see Time 165
Suitable mobile telephones 76 Time setting, automatic 165
Summer tyres, tread 329 Time zone 165
Sun visor 282 Tools 360
Sun visor, moveable 282 Torque display, see Sport displays 174
Supplementary Owner's Handbook 23 Total weight, permitted 379
Suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Total weight, trailer operation 379
sion 271 Touchpad, Controller 59
Suspension settings, see Driving Experience Tourist function, see Right-hand/left-hand traf‐
Control 144 fic 184
Swinging of the trailer, see Trailer Stability Con‐ Tow bar 371
trol 305 Tow fitting, see Towing eye 371
Switches, see Vehicle cockpit 42 Towing a trailer 303
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Experi‐ Towing a trailer, activation 306
ence Control 144 Towing a trailer, technical data 379
Switching off drive-ready state 137 Towing away 370
Switching on drive-ready state 137 Towing eye 371
396
Towing rope 371 Tyre sealant, see Tyre repair kit 333
Towing, see Towing away 370 Tyre settings 339
Traction control 222 Tyres with emergency running properties 332
TRACTION, driving dynamics 222 Tyre tread 329
Traffic information, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 U
Traffic jam assistant, see Assisted Driving
Plus 244 UCC, see Traffic light detection 239
Traffic light detection 239 Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi‐
Traffic-queue assistant, see Assisted Driving cle 47
Plus 244 Units, see Set units of measurement 165
Trailer loads 379 Unloaded weight 379
Trailer nose weight, technical data 379 Unlocking, automatic 100
Trailer Stability Control 305 Unlocking, see Opening and closing 84
Trailer tow hitch, ball linkage electrically swivella‐ Unlocking, settings 100
ble 306 Updates after going to press 8
Trailer tow hitch, zoom 257 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 66
Transmission lockout, unlocking electroni‐ Upper retaining strap, top tether 128
cally 140 Urban Cruise Control, see Traffic light detec‐
Transported loads, stowing and securing 292 tion 239
Tread, tyres 329 USB connection 82
Trip distance recorder, see Journey data 171 USB port, position in the vehicle 284
Triple turn signal 148 Use, intended 8
Turn indicator, indicator lamp 160
Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight V
flasher 148
Turn indicators, replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and Valet parking mode, see Parking service
lights 360 mode 99
Turning circle lines, Reversing Assist cam‐ Vanity mirror 282
era 254 Variable sport steering 223
Turning radius, vehicle 378 Vehicle acknowledgement signals 101
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Vehicle battery 361
tertainment, Communication 6 Vehicle breakdown, see Help in case of a break‐
Tyre change 330 down 364
Tyre damage 329 Vehicle care 374
Tyre inflation pressure 327 Vehicle cockpit 42
Tyre makes, recommendation 331 Vehicle data and data protection 10
Tyre pressure 327 Vehicle data, resetting 71
Tyre Pressure Monitor 338 Vehicle equipment 7
Tyre pressure monitoring, see RPA 345 Vehicle identification number 19
Tyre Pressure Monitor, reset 340 Vehicle key 84
Tyre Pressure Monitor, resetting 340 Vehicle key, additional 84
Tyre pressure test, see Tyre Pressure Moni‐ Vehicle key, changing batteries 85
tor 338 Vehicle key, integrated key 85
Tyre repair kit 333 Vehicle key, loss 84
Tyres and wheels 327 Vehicle key, malfunction 87
397
Vehicle paintwork, care 375 Wheelbase, vehicle 378

Vehicle, running in 298 Wheel change 347
Vehicle status 174 Wheels and tyres 327
Vehicle wash 373 Wheels and tyres, exchange 330
Ventilation 279 Widgets, iDrive 55
Ventilation, see Stationary air conditioning 280 Width, vehicle 378
Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 214 Window, defrosting 278
Video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Windscreen, defrosting 278
Entertainment, Communication 6 Windscreen washing system, see Wiper sys‐
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 19 tem 149
Voice control 61 Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system 149
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Winter tyres 331
sistant 61 Winter tyres, tread 329
Voice control system 61 Wiper, fold-out position 151
Voice input 61 Wipers, see Wiper system 149
Wiper system 149
W Wiping fluid, see Washer fluid 355
Wireless charging dock for smartphones 285
Wake word 62 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Warning function, rear-end collision 206 charging dock 285
Warning function with wrong direction of travel, WLAN connection, see WiFi connection 78
see Wrong-way Warning 209 Wood parts, care 376
Warning lamp in exterior mirror, see Crossing Wordmatch principle, see Input comparison 56
traffic warning 212 Work, high-voltage system 21
Warning lamp in the exterior mirror, see Lane Wrong-way Warning 209
Change Warning 202
Warning lights 157 X
Warning messages, see Check Control 156
Warning of crossing traffic 212 xDrive 223
Warnings, false 103
Warning systems in case of risk of collision 191 Y
Warning triangle 364
Warranty 9 Your own safety 8
Warranty Booklet 9
Washer fluid 355
Washing fluid, see Washer fluid 355
Wash, vehicle 373
Water, high-voltage system 21
Water on streets 299
Water, see Condensation when vehicle is
parked 300
Website, see Internet 6
Weights 379
Welcome Light Carpet, see Welcome light 179
Welcome lights 179
Welcome screen, driver profiles 71
398
*BL5A4880100I*
01405A48801 en

The Ultimate
Driving Machine
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

*BL5A4880100I*
Your customised vehicle information in an app.

01405A48801 en
Optimised for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

Owners Manual BMWi 4 Gran Coupe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual BMWi 4 Gran Coupe

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual BMWi 4 Gran Coupe

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A48801 - X/21

After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up‐

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

After a software update in the vehicle

Owner's Handbook for Navigation,

Symbols and displays

Precautions that must be followed in

›...‹ Commands for the voice control

General After a software update in the vehicle

For Australia/New Zealand: general Your own safety

▷ Owner's Handbook. BMW specifications with properly trained per‐

Data protection laws ▷ To fulfill contractual obligations regarding the

Contact details Information on vehicle functions and settings

cle and retrieved as required, for example if the Stored data

Control over data Services

Sent information Statutory emergency call system

To request deactivation, please contact a Serv‐ Under the bonnet

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is on the type

The vehicle identification number is additionally

Safety of the high-voltage system

During and shortly after the charging

Actions in the event of a message

While the vehicle is moving

During and shortly after the charging

Owner's Handbook media

Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's Handbook

Scrolling within the Owner's

Selecting context-sensitive help from a

Selecting context-sensitive help from a

Unlocking on the outside door handle

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Access to vehicle interior

Central locking buttons Closing the luggage compartment

▷ Press the button on the inside of the

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

Displays, operating elements Switch cluster

Around the steering wheel

Indicator and warning lights iDrive

Driver's door Buttons on the Controller

To go to the main menu.

To go to the Media/Radio menu.

To go to the Telephone menu.

Go to previous display area.

To go to the Options menu.

Activating voice input

1. Press the button on the steering

Cancelling voice input

Adjustment and operation

▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide

Electrically adjustable seats

Press the switch up or down.

Adjusting the distance Adjusting the steering wheel

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Memory function

Select mirror, automatic parking func‐

The memory buttons are on the front doors.

Storing settings 3. To enter a new destination or start route